MX2010 1704e6ryq

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SINGLE PATIENT DIALYSIS MACHINE
DIAMAX R
N
O
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
Nipro Corporation
3-9-3 Honjyo-Nishi, Kita-ku
Osaka 531-8510
JAPAN
Phone +81-6-6372-2331
Nipro Europe N.V.

Weihoek 3 H
1930 Zaventem
BELGIUM
Phone +32-2-725-5533
MX2010-1704E6
U R
SO Y
Q
IN
TE
R
N
O
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. APPLICATION .................................................................................................... 1-1

2. CONTRAINDICATION ........................................................................................ 2-1
3. PRECAUTIONS .................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1. Equipment Classification and Handling precautions ........................................................... 3-1
3.2. Precaution for Fluid Penetration......................................................................................... 3-1
3.3. Precaution for Flammable Atmospheres ............................................................................ 3-1
3.4. Safety Precautions ............................................................................................................ 3-1
3.5. Precautions ....................................................................................................................... 3-9
3.6. Precautions for Software ................................................................................................. 3-10
4. GENERAL DESCRIPTION ................................................................................. 4-1
O
N
4.1. Dimensions and Weight ..................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2. Electrical Safety (Ordered by EN60601-1) ........................................................................ 4-1
R
4.3. Electrical Supply................................................................................................................ 4-2
Q
TE
4.4. Fuses ................................................................................................................................ 4-2

SO Y
4.5. External Connections ........................................................................................................ 4-2

IN
R
4.6. Storage and Transportation ............................................................................................... 4-2

4.7. Operating Conditions ......................................................................................................... 4-3
4.8. Hydraulics ......................................................................................................................... 4-4
4.8.1. Blood leak detector .................................................................................................. 4-4
4.8.2. Transmembrane pressure........................................................................................ 4-4
U
4.8.3. Dialysate pressure ................................................................................................... 4-4

4.8.4. Ultrafiltration ............................................................................................................ 4-5
4.8.5. Degassing ............................................................................................................... 4-5
4.8.6. Acetate dialysis ....................................................................................................... 4-5
4.8.7. Bicarbonate dialysis................................................................................................. 4-6
4.8.8. Dialysate temperature.............................................................................................. 4-6
4.8.9. Dialysate flow rate ................................................................................................... 4-6
4.9.Extra Corporeal Blood Circuit .............................................................................................. 4-7
4.9.1. Arterial pressure ...................................................................................................... 4-7
4.9.2. Venous pressure ..................................................................................................... 4-7
4.9.3. Air Bubble Detector ................................................................................................. 4-7
4.9.4. Blood pump ............................................................................................................. 4-8
4.9.5. Syringe pump .......................................................................................................... 4-8
4.9.6. Single needle single pump ....................................................................................... 4-9
4.10. Rinse............................................................................................................................... 4-9
4.11. Override ........................................................................................................................ 4-10
4.12. Range of Sound Pressure Levels................................................................................... 4-10
4.13. Options.......................................................................................................................... 4-11
4.13.1. Battery................................................................................................................. 4-11
4.13.2. Dialyzer inlet pressure ......................................................................................... 4-11
4.13.3. Blood Pressure Manometer Unit(BPM) ................................................................ 4-12
4.13.4. ETRE (Endotoxin Retentive Filter) ....................................................................... 4-12
4.13.5. Bicarb cartridge ................................................................................................... 4-13
4.13.6. Central Delivery System ...................................................................................... 4-13
4.14. Used Materials for Dialysate Line................................................................................... 4-14
5. REGULAR INSPECTION ................................................................................... 5-1

5.1. Precautions Before Working .............................................................................................. 5-1
5.1.1. Maintenance personnel ........................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.2. Clothes when performing maintenance/inspection ................................................... 5-1
5.2. Handling of Machine .......................................................................................................... 5-1
O
5.2.1. Maintenance procedure ........................................................................................... 5-1
5.2.2. Precautions when working ....................................................................................... 5-1
N
5.2.3. Precautions when cleaning and disinfection of enclosure ......................................... 5-2
R
5.2.4. Precautions for cleaning of dialysate concentrate connector and rinse port .............. 5-2
Q
TE
5.2.5. Precaution for cleaning and Disinfection inside Machine .......................................... 5-2
SO Y
5.3. Replacement of Parts ........................................................................................................ 5-3

IN
5.4. Responsibility for Readjustment and Repair....................................................................... 5-3

R
5.5. Daily Inspection by Operator.............................................................................................. 5-3

5.6. Maintenance Inspection..................................................................................................... 5-3
5.7. Inspection to be done after Long-Term Storage ................................................................. 5-3
U
6. MAINTENANCE INSPECTION .......................................................................... 6-1
7. MAINTENANCE MANUAL ................................................................................. 7-1

7.1. Inspection of Appearance, Connection Tubes, Power Cables, etc. ..................................... 7-1
7.1.1. Inspection of connection tube conditions .................................................................. 7-1
7.1.2. Inspection of connecting conditions of water supply and drainage hoses .................. 7-1
7.1.3. Inspection of power cable damage........................................................................... 7-1
7.1.4. Inspection of appearance ........................................................................................ 7-1
7.1.5. Confirmation of fold, damage, deterioration, etc. of tubes ......................................... 7-1
7.1.6. Confirmation of fold, damage, deterioration, etc. of harness ..................................... 7-2
7.1.7. Inspection of color lamps ......................................................................................... 7-2
7.2.Inspection of Dialysate Line................................................................................................. 7-2
7.2.1. Confirmation of Open/Close frequency of solenoid valve.......................................... 7-2
7.2.2. Confirmation of solenoid valve operation.................................................................. 7-2
7.2.3. Confirmation of reducing valve (PR1) operation ....................................................... 7-3
7.2.4. Confirmation of deaeration pressure ........................................................................ 7-4
7.2.5. Confirmation of deaeration pump (P1) flow rate ....................................................... 7-4
7.2.6. Confirmation of dialysate pump (P2) flow rate .......................................................... 7-4
7.2.7. Operating condition of air separator tank (AS1) ........................................................ 7-5
7.2.8. Confirmation of relief valve (RV1) operation ............................................................. 7-5
7.2.9. Confirmation of relief valve (RV2) operation ............................................................. 7-6
7.2.10. Condition of piping ................................................................................................. 7-6
7.3. Inspection of Blood Pump (BP) .......................................................................................... 7-7
7.3.1. Confirmation of play and abnormal noise at rotating part .......................................... 7-7
7.3.2. Confirmation of blocking .......................................................................................... 7-7
7.3.3. Confirmation of real flow rate ................................................................................... 7-8
7.4. Inspection of Syringe pump (HP) ....................................................................................... 7-8
7.4.1. Operation of pusher ................................................................................................. 7-8
7.4.2. Confirmation of play and abnormal noise ................................................................. 7-8
7.4.3. Confirmation of overload switch operation................................................................ 7-8
7.4.4. Confirmation of infusion volume ............................................................................... 7-9
O
7.5. Inspection of Sensors ........................................................................................................ 7-9
N
7.5.1. Confirmation of thermos sensor (T1-4)..................................................................... 7-9
R
7.5.2. Confirmation of concentration sensor (CD1-4) ....................................................... 7-10
7.5.3. Confirmation of blood leak detector (BLD).............................................................. 7-10
Q
TE
7.5.4. Confirmation of air bubble detector (ABD) .............................................................. 7-12

SO Y
7.6. Inspection of Electrical Equipment ................................................................................... 7-12

IN
R
7.6.1. Confirmation of insulation resistance...................................................................... 7-12

7.6.2. Confirmation of earth leakage current .................................................................... 7-12
7.6.3. Confirmation of backup battery performance .......................................................... 7-12
7.7. Inspection of safety-related Devices ................................................................................ 7-13
7.7.1. Confirmation of temperature error alarm ................................................................ 7-13
U
7.7.2. Confirmation of conductivity error alarm ................................................................. 7-14

7.7.3. Confirmation of hydraulic pressure error alarm ....................................................... 7-14
7.7.4. Inspection of venous clamp (CL) ............................................................................ 7-15
7.8. Confirmation of dialysate making ..................................................................................... 7-15
8. MAINTENANCE CHECKLIST ............................................................................ 8-1
9. INSTALLATION .................................................................................................. 9-1

9.1. Power Supply .................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.2. Water Supply Conditions, Drainage Conditions .................................................................. 9-1
9.2.1. Water supply conditions........................................................................................... 9-1
9.2.2. Drainage conditions ................................................................................................. 9-1
9.2.3. Environment of usage .............................................................................................. 9-2
9.3. Surrounding Space............................................................................................................ 9-2
9.4. Unpacking and Installation................................................................................................. 9-3
9.4.1. Unpacking carton and confirmation of included items ............................................... 9-3
9.4.2. Assembling attached parts into machine .................................................................. 9-4
9.4.3. Assembling disinfectant nozzle holder/disinfectant tray ............................................ 9-4
9.4.4. Assembling indicator/hanger .................................................................................... 9-6
9.4.5. Wiring for color lamps .............................................................................................. 9-7
9.5. Releasing Hinges at Operation panel................................................................................. 9-8
9.6. Connections to Water Supply Inlet and Drain Outlet........................................................... 9-9
9.6.1. Dimensions of connectors at water supply inlet and drain outlet ............................... 9-9
9.6.2. Connecting the water supply hose ........................................................................... 9-9
9.6.3. Connection to drain outlet ........................................................................................ 9-9
9.6.4. Connecting the power plug .................................................................................... 9-10
9.7. Preparing the System ...................................................................................................... 9-11
9.7.1. Filling water in the hydraulic................................................................................... 9-11
9.7.2. Setting date and clock ........................................................................................... 9-12
9.7.3. Setting a diameter of pump segment in the blood pump ......................................... 9-12
O
9.7.4. Setting the syringe pump ....................................................................................... 9-13
N
9.7.5. Setting the dialysate solution to be used ................................................................ 9-13
R
9.7.6. Setting the Blood Leak Detector override function
(For software ver. 06.00 or later) .......................... 9-13
Q
TE
9.7.7.Setting the Blood Pump Override at blood detect condition. ..................................... 9-14
SO Y
9.8. Changing a PASS ID ....................................................................................................... 9-16

IN
R
9.9. Verifying operation after installation ................................................................................. 9-16

9.10. Disposal of Machine ...................................................................................................... 9-17
9.10.1. Disposal of main machine .................................................................................... 9-17
9.10.2. Disposal of LCD display ....................................................................................... 9-17
9.10.3. Disposal of backup battery................................................................................... 9-17
U
10. FLOWCHART ................................................................................................. 10-1

10.1. Dialysate Flow chart (TYPE 0) ....................................................................................... 10-1
10.2. Dialysate Flow chart (TYPE 1) ....................................................................................... 10-4
11. REPLACEMENT OF PARTS ........................................................................... 11-1

11.1. Replacement Parts List for Maintenance ........................................................................ 11-1
11.2. Maintenance of Each Part.............................................................................................. 11-4
11.2.1. Maintenance of bottom part of machine ............................................................... 11-4
11.2.1.1. Method to open the front door and draw out the dialysate line................. 11-4
11.2.1.2. Method to remove the back cover of the dialysate line section ................ 11-5
11.2.2. Method to remove the backside cover of the Power supply section ...................... 11-6
11.2.3. Method to remove the rear cover at the operating panel ....................................... 11-7
11.3. Distinction about Types of DIAMAX ............................................................................... 11-8
11.4. Maintenance Parts – Parts List and Replacement Procedure ....................................... 11-17
11.4.1. Pressure Regulator (PR).................................................................................... 11-17
11.4.1.1. Pressure regulator (Type 1).................................................................. 11-17
11.4.1.2. Pressure regulator (Type 2): Non adjustment type ................................ 11-17
11.4.2. Heat Exchanger (HEX) ...................................................................................... 11-18
11.4.3. Deaeration buffer tank (AS1) ............................................................................. 11-19
11.4.4. Air Separator tank (AS2) .................................................................................... 11-20
11.4.5. Deaeration Chamber (BT1) ................................................................................ 11-21
11.4.6. Temperature Sensor (T1 to 4)............................................................................ 11-22
11.4.6.1. Temperature sensor (T1 to 4) (Type1: Pt 100Ω) .................................. 11-22
11.4.6.2. Temperature sensor (T1 to 4) (Type2: Thermistor) ............................... 11-23
11.4.6.3. Temperature sensor (T5/6) ................................................................... 11-24
11.4.7. Conductivity Sensor (CD 1 to 4) ......................................................................... 11-25
11.4.8. Heater and Heater tank ..................................................................................... 11-26
11.4.9. Chamber (CHa, CHb) ........................................................................................ 11-29
11.4.10. Flow Switch ..................................................................................................... 11-33
O
11.4.11. Dialysate Pressure Sensor (PG3) .................................................................... 11-35
N
11.4.11.1. Dialysate Pressure Sensor (Type 1) ................................................... 11-35
R
11.4.11.2. Dialysate Pressure Sensor (Type 2) ................................................... 11-36
11.4.12. Blood pressure sensor (PG4a/PG5) ................................................................. 11-37
Q
TE
11.4.13. Mixing Tank ..................................................................................................... 11-38

SO Y
11.4.14. Gear Pump (P1, P2) ........................................................................................ 11-39

IN
R
11.4.15. Piston Pump .................................................................................................... 11-47

11.4.15.1. UF Pump (P3) (Type 1) ...................................................................... 11-47
11.4.15.2. UF Pump (P3) (Type 2) ...................................................................... 11-49
11.4.15.3. UF Pump (P3) (Type 3) ...................................................................... 11-52
11.4.15.4. Concentration Pump (For B liquid; P4) (Type 1) .................................. 11-54
U
11.4.15.5. Concentration Pump (For A liquid; P5) (Type 1) .................................. 11-56

11.4.15.6. Concentration Pump (For A/B liquid) (Type 2)..................................... 11-58
11.4.15.7. Concentration Pump (For A/B liquid) (Type 3)..................................... 11-60
11.4.16. Two-way solenoid valve ................................................................................... 11-65
11.4.17. Check Valve .................................................................................................... 11-67
11.4.17.1. Check Valve (Type 1) ......................................................................... 11-67
11.4.17.2. Check Valve (Type 2) ......................................................................... 11-68
11.4.17.3. Relief Valve (RV1, 2,and 3) (Type 1) ................................................. 11-69
11.4.17.4. Relief Valve (RV1, 2,and 3) (Type 2/3) .............................................. 11-70
11.4.18. Dialyzer Coupler Holder ................................................................................... 11-72
11.4.18.1. Dialyzer Coupler Holder (Type 1) ....................................................... 11-72
11.4.18.2. Dialyzer Coupler Holder (Type 2) ....................................................... 11-74
11.4.19. Blood Leak Detector ........................................................................................ 11-76
11.4.19.1. Type1 & 2 ......................................................................................... 11-77
11.4.19.2. Type 3................................................................................................ 11-80
11.4.19.3. BLD Conversion Unit .......................................................................... 11-81
11.4.20. Sample Port..................................................................................................... 11-83
11.4.21. Concentrate Sheath ......................................................................................... 11-84
11.4.22. Blood Pump..................................................................................................... 11-87
11.4.23. Venous Clamp ................................................................................................. 11-92
11.4.23.1. Type1................................................................................................. 11-92
11.4.23.2. Type2................................................................................................. 11-94
11.4.24. Air Bubble and blood color detector Unit .......................................................... 11-96
11.4.25. Syringe Pump .................................................................................................. 11-97
11.4.25.1. Syringe Pump (Type1 & 2) ................................................................. 11-97
11.4.25.2. Syringe Pump (Type3) ..................................................................... 11-102
11.4.25.3. Syringe Pump (Type4) ..................................................................... 11-106
11.5. Maintenance Parts – Harness Parts Drawings ........................................................... 11-110
11.5.1. Machine type 1 ................................................................................................ 11-110
11.5.1.1. Power supply section ......................................................................... 11-110
11.5.1.2. Dialysate line and around operation panel .......................................... 11-111
11.5.2. Machine type 2 ................................................................................................ 11-112
O
N
11.5.3. Machine type 3 ................................................................................................ 11-114
R
Q
TE
11.5.3.3. SSR-Box ............................................................................................ 11-117

SO Y
11.5.4. Machine Type4 ................................................................................................ 11-118

IN
R

11.5.4.2. Dialysate line section and around operation panel .............................. 11-119
11.5.5. Machine Type5 ................................................................................................ 11-120
11.5.5.2. Dialysate line section and around operation panel .............................. 11-121
U
11.6. Other Parts................................................................................................................ 11-123

11.7. Options...................................................................................................................... 11-125
11.7.1. BPM (Blood Pressure Manometer) .................................................................. 11-125
11.7.1.1. BPM (Type0)...................................................................................... 11-125
11.7.1.2. BPM (Type1)...................................................................................... 11-126
11.7.2. 2nd. Chemical Rinse Port ................................................................................ 11-127
11.7.3. ETRF (Endotoxin Retentive Filter) Option ........................................................ 11-128
11.7.4. Bicarb Cartridge Option ................................................................................... 11-130
11.7.5. Cenrtal Delivery System Option ....................................................................... 11-139
11.7.5.1. Factory option and kit ......................................................................... 11-139
11.7.5.2. Parts .................................................................................................. 11-139
12. COMPOSITION OF ELECTICAL EQUIPMENT ............................................. 12-1

12.1. Electrical Parts at Rear Side of Machine ........................................................................ 12-1
12.1.1. Rear Side (Type 1) ............................................................................................ 12-1
12.1.2. Rear Side (Type 2) ............................................................................................ 12-3
12.1.3. Rear Side (Type 3) ............................................................................................ 12-6
12.1.3.1. Rear side 1 ............................................................................................ 12-6
12.1.3.2. Rear side (SSR Box) ............................................................................ 12-10
12.1.4. Rear Side (Type 4) ............................................................................................ 12-11
12.1.5. Rear Side (Type 5 and 6)................................................................................... 12-13
12.1.6. Rear Cover ...................................................................................................... 12-16
12.1.6.1. Fan for “Power box” (Upper position Fan) ............................................. 12-16
12.1.6.2. Fan for “Hydraulic part” (lower position Fan) ......................................... 12-17
12.2. Electrical Parts at Inner Side of Front Door around the Hydraulic ................................. 12-18
12.3. Electrical Parts at operation panel................................................................................ 12-22
12.3.1. Operation Panel (Type1).................................................................................... 12-23
13. CONNECTION AND REPLACEMENT OF P.C.BOARD ................................ 13-1
O
13.1. The Cautions on Replacement / Connection Work of a P.C. Board ................................ 13-1
N
13.2. Cautions of This Chapter ............................................................................................... 13-1
R
13.3. LCD Display P.C. Board .............................................................................................. 13-2
Q
TE
13.3.1. Part allocation of BP02-15A/B/C/D....................................................................... 13-2

SO Y
13.3.2. Part allocation of BP02-15F ................................................................................. 13-2

IN
13.3.3. Part allocation of BP02-15H ................................................................................. 13-3

R
13.3.4. Part allocation of BP02-15J1................................................................................ 13-3

13.3.5. Part alloxation of BP02-15J2................................................................................ 13-4
13.3.6. General ............................................................................................................... 13-4
13.3.7. Function of each part ........................................................................................... 13-5
U
13.3.8. Replacement ....................................................................................................... 13-8

13.3.9. Adjustment ........................................................................................................ 13-11
13.3.10. Precautions ..................................................................................................... 13-11
13.4. Control P.C. Board (BP02-16B, BP05-12#): CPU1....................................................... 13-12
13.4.1. Part allocation of BP02-16B, BP05-12A, B, B1................................................... 13-12
13.4.2. Part allocation of BP05-12E ............................................................................... 13-12
13.4.3. Part allocation of BP05-12G............................................................................... 13-13
13.4.4. Part allocation of BP05-12H ............................................................................... 13-13
13.4.5. General ............................................................................................................. 13-14
13.4.6. Function of each part ......................................................................................... 13-14
13.4.7. Replacement ..................................................................................................... 13-17
13.4.8. Adjustment ........................................................................................................ 13-18
13.4.9. Precautions ....................................................................................................... 13-18
13.5. Monitor P.C. Board (BP02-17B, BP02-17C, BP05-13#): CPU2 .................................... 13-20
13.5.1. Part allocation of BP02-17B/C ........................................................................... 13-20
13.5.2. Part allocation of BP05-13/A/B ......................................................................... 13-20
13.5.3. Part allocation of BP05-13E ............................................................................. 13-21
13.5.4. Part allocation of BP05-13F ............................................................................... 13-21
13.5.5. Part allocation of BP05-13G............................................................................... 13-22
13.5.6. General ............................................................................................................. 13-22
13.5.8. Replacement ..................................................................................................... 13-25
13.5.9. Adjustment ........................................................................................................ 13-25
13.5.10. Precautions ..................................................................................................... 13-25
13.6. Driver P.C. Board (BP02-18B, BP05-14#): DRIVER ..................................................... 13-27
13.6.1. Part allocation of BP02-18B, BP05-14A ............................................................. 13-27
13.6.2. Part allocation of BP05-14D ............................................................................. 13-27
13.6.4. General ............................................................................................................. 13-28
13.6.6. Replacement ..................................................................................................... 13-30
13.6.7. Adjustment ........................................................................................................ 13-30
13.6.8. Precautions ....................................................................................................... 13-30
13.7. Mother P.C. board (BP02-14A, BP05-11#)................................................................... 13-32
O
13.7.1. Part allocation of BP02-14A ............................................................................... 13-32
N
13.7.2. Part allocation of BP05-11A-C ........................................................................... 13-33
R
13.7.3. Part allocation of BP05-11D ............................................................................... 13-34
Q
TE
13.7.5. General ............................................................................................................. 13-35

SO Y

IN
R
13.7.7. Replacement ..................................................................................................... 13-39

13.7.8. Adjustment ........................................................................................................ 13-39
13.7.9. Precautions ....................................................................................................... 13-39
13.8. Blood Pressure Sensor P.C. Board (BP01-19#) ........................................................... 13-40
13.8.1. General ............................................................................................................. 13-40
U

13.8.3. Replacement ..................................................................................................... 13-41
13.8.4. Adjustment ........................................................................................................ 13-41
13.8.5. Precautions ....................................................................................................... 13-41
13.9. Dialysate Pressure Sensor P.C. Board (BP03-01#) ...................................................... 13-42
13.9.1. General ............................................................................................................. 13-42
13.9.3. Replacement ..................................................................................................... 13-42
13.9.4. Adjustment ........................................................................................................ 13-42
13.9.5. Precautions ....................................................................................................... 13-43
13.10. Conductivity Sensor P.C. Board (BP03-16#) .............................................................. 13-44
13.10.1. Part allocation of BP03-16/A ............................................................................ 13-44
13.10.2. Part allocation of BP03-16B ............................................................................. 13-44
13.10.3. Part allocation of BP03-16D ............................................................................. 13-45
13.10.4. General ........................................................................................................... 13-45
13.10.5. Function of each part ....................................................................................... 13-45
13.10.6. Replacement ................................................................................................... 13-46
13.10.7. Adjustment ...................................................................................................... 13-46
13.10.8. Precautions ..................................................................................................... 13-47
13.11. Air Bubble Detector P.C. Board.................................................................................. 13-48
13.11.1. Part allocation of 23SD-543, 26SD-520# .......................................................... 13-48
13.11.2. Part allocation of 35SD-513A ........................................................................... 13-48
13.11.3. General ........................................................................................................... 13-48
13.11.5. Replacement ................................................................................................... 13-49
13.11.6. Adjustment ...................................................................................................... 13-49
13.11.7. Precautions ..................................................................................................... 13-49
13.12. Sound Volume P.C. Board (BP01-24) ........................................................................ 13-50
13.12.1. General ........................................................................................................... 13-50
13.12.3. Replacement ................................................................................................... 13-50
13.12.4. Adjustment ...................................................................................................... 13-50
13.12.5. Precautions ..................................................................................................... 13-50
O
13.13. LCD Lamp P.C. Board (BP01-25#) ............................................................................ 13-51
N
13.13.1. General ........................................................................................................... 13-51
R
13.13.3. Replacement ................................................................................................... 13-51
Q
TE
13.13.4. Adjustment ...................................................................................................... 13-52

SO Y
13.13.5. Precautions ..................................................................................................... 13-52

IN
R
13.14. Level Adjustment Switch P.C. Board (BP01-50#) ....................................................... 13-53

13.14.1. General ........................................................................................................... 13-53
13.14.3. Replacement ................................................................................................... 13-53
13.14.4. Adjustment ...................................................................................................... 13-53
U
13.14.5. Precautions ..................................................................................................... 13-53

13.15. LCD Connector Conversion P.C. Board (BP02-30#) .................................................. 13-54
13.15.1. General ........................................................................................................... 13-54
13.15.3. Replacement ................................................................................................... 13-54
13.15.4. Adjustment ...................................................................................................... 13-54
13.15.5. Precautions ..................................................................................................... 13-55
13.16. Connector P.C. Board (BP02-31#) ............................................................................. 13-57
13.16.1. Part allocation of BP02-31B/ C/ D/ E ................................................................ 13-57
13.16.2. Part allocation of BP02-31F ............................................................................. 13-57
13.16.3. Part allocation of BP02-31G............................................................................. 13-58
13.16.4. General ........................................................................................................... 13-58
13.16.6. Replacement ................................................................................................... 13-60
13.16.7. Adjustment ...................................................................................................... 13-60
13.16.8. Precautions ..................................................................................................... 13-60
13.17. Pump Driver P.C. Board (BP03-10#) ........................................................................ 13-62
13.17.1. Part allocation of BP03-10A /D......................................................................... 13-62
13.17.2. Part allocation of BP03-10E ............................................................................. 13-62
13.17.3. General ........................................................................................................... 13-62
13.17.5. Replacement ................................................................................................... 13-63
13.17.6. Adjustment ...................................................................................................... 13-63
13.17.7. Precautions ..................................................................................................... 13-63
13.18. Inverter P.C. Board .................................................................................................... 13-65
13.18.1. Inverter P.C. Board (CXA-P1212B-WJL/ CXA-P1212E-WJL) ........................... 13-65
13.18.2. Inverter P.C. Board (ALD-310012PJ125) ......................................................... 13-65
13.18.3. General ........................................................................................................... 13-65
13.18.5. Replacement ................................................................................................... 13-65
13.18.6. Adjustment ...................................................................................................... 13-66
13.18.7. Precautions ..................................................................................................... 13-66
13.19. UFP encoder P.C. Board (BP05-34/34A) ................................................................... 13-67
O
13.19.1. General ........................................................................................................... 13-67
N
R
13.19.3. Replacement ................................................................................................... 13-67
13.19.4. Adjustment ...................................................................................................... 13-67
Q
TE
13.19.5. Precautions ..................................................................................................... 13-67

SO Y
13.20.Syringe pump Encoder P.C. Board (BP13-11) ............................................................. 13-68

IN
R
13.20.1. General ........................................................................................................... 13-68

13.20.3. Replacement ................................................................................................... 13-68
13.20.4. Adjustment ...................................................................................................... 13-68
13.20.5. Precautions ..................................................................................................... 13-68
U
13.21.BLD Conversion P.C. Board ........................................................................................ 13-69

13.21.1. General ........................................................................................................... 13-69
13.21.3. Replacement ................................................................................................... 13-69
13.21.4. Adjustment ...................................................................................................... 13-70
13.21.5. Precautions ..................................................................................................... 13-70
14. TECHNICIAN MODE AND MAKER MODE.................................................... 14-1

14.1. TECHNICIAN Mode and MAKER Mode ......................................................................... 14-1
14.2. PASS ID Setting the Method.......................................................................................... 14-2
14.2.1. PASS ID setting for the TECHNICIAN mode ........................................................ 14-2
14.2.2. PASS ID setting for the MAKER mode ................................................................. 14-4
14.3. Setting Items on Each Screen ...................................................................................... 14-6
14.3.1. Hierarchy of setting menu .................................................................................... 14-6
14.3.2. List of setting items in each screen ...................................................................... 14-9
14.4. Rinse Program Setting and Creating Methods ............................................................. 14-28
14.4.1. Rinse Program creating method......................................................................... 14-28
14.4.2. Notices on creating a rinse program and setting for disinfectant to be used ........ 14-36
14.4.3. Registering rinse program in rinse standby screen ............................................. 14-39
14.4.4. Registering WEEKLY RINSE in rinse standby screen ........................................ 14-41
14.5. UF PROFILE Program Creating Method ...................................................................... 14-44
14.6. AB PROFILE Program Creating Method ...................................................................... 14-48
15. ADJUSTMENT ............................................................................................... 15-1

15.1. Pressure Regulator, Relief Valve ................................................................................... 15-1
15.1.1. Adjustment of Pressure Regulator (PR1) ............................................................. 15-1
15.1.2. Adjustment of filling completion pressure (RV1) ................................................... 15-3
15.1.3. Adjustment of closed line pressure (RV2) ............................................................ 15-5
15.2. UF ................................................................................................................................. 15-7
15.2.1. For software version form ver.04 to 05.20 ............................................................ 15-7
O
15.2.1.1. ONE SHOT volume of UF pump calibration .......................................... 15-7
15.2.1.2. UF correction coefficient d calibration ..................................................... 15-9
N
15.2.1.3. Verification test of UF accuracy ............................................................ 15-11
R
15.2.1.4. Decision of UF correction coefficient d’ (For SEQ-UF) .......................... 15-13
Q
TE
15.2.1.5. Verification test of UF accuracy (For SEQ-UF)...................................... 15-15

SO Y
15.2.2. For software version ver.06.00 or later ............................................................... 15-17

IN
15.2.2.1. UF calibration ....................................................................................... 15-17

R
15.2.2.2. Verification test of UF and SEQ accuracy ............................................. 15-19

15.3. Sensors ....................................................................................................................... 15-20
15.3.1. Dialysate pressure sensor (PG3) calibration ..................................................... 15-20
15.3.2. Arterial (PG4a)/Venous (PG5) Pressure sensor calibration ................................ 15-22
U
15.3.3. Temperature sensor calibration.......................................................................... 15-24

15.3.4. Conductivity sensor calibration .......................................................................... 15-28
15.4. Blood sensor calibration (BD) ...................................................................................... 15-32
15.4.1. Blood sensor calibration (BD) (For amp type: FX-D1) ......................................... 15-32
15.4.2. Blood sensor calibration (BD) (For amp type: FX-301) ....................................... 15-35
15.4.3. Blood sensor calibration (BD) (For amp type: FX-101) ....................................... 15-39
15.5. Blood Pump................................................................................................................. 15-43
15.5.1. Adjustment of BP (Blood Pump) closed condition............................................... 15-43
15.5.2. Calibration of BP (Blood Pump) flow rate
(For software version from Ver.04. to Ver.7.11).................... 15-45
15.5.3. Calibration of BP (Blood Pump) flow rate
(For software version from Ver.07.02 or later) ...................... 15-47
15.6. Syringe Pump.............................................................................................................. 15-50
15.6.1. Working point adjustment of syringe pump overload limit switch ......................... 15-50
15.6.2. Overload adjustment of syringe pump (when using NIPRO 20 mL syringe) ........ 15-51
15.6.3. Verification test of syringe pump stroke .............................................................. 15-53
15.6.4. Setting of syringe ratio (For software version from Ver.04. to Ver.06) ................. 15-54
15.6.5. Setting of syringe length (For software version from Ver.07 or later)................... 15-55
15.7. Calibration of Dialysate ................................................................................................ 15-56
16. OTHERS ......................................................................................................... 16-1

16.1. Upgrading and Confirmation of Software Version ........................................................... 16-1
16.1.1. Installation of software ......................................................................................... 16-2
16.1.2. Loading program and language file (for software version V01) ............................. 16-5
16.1.3. Loading program and language file (for software version V02 or later) ................. 16-7
16.1.4. Confirm software version ................................................................................... 16-10
16.1.5. Machine Type Setting ........................................................................................ 16-10
16.2. Touch Calibration ........................................................................................................ 16-12
16.3. Color Lamp - State Diagram ........................................................................................ 16-14
16.4. State of Backup Battery Operation ............................................................................... 16-16
16.5. Conversion Table (Pressure) ....................................................................................... 16-17
O
16.6. Meaning of Symbols and Displays ............................................................................... 16-18
N
R
17. TERMINOLOGY ............................................................................................. 17-1
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
1 APPLICATION
(a) Single patient dialysis machine, DIAMAX is applied to treatment of an adult or child patient
with acute or chronic renal failure by dialysis when doctors instruct the application.
(b) DIAMAX can be used in a controlled environment such as a place in a hospital.
The standard equipment can perform the Hemodialysis and Sequential dialysis.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
1-1
2 CONTRAINDICATION
Any application other than dialysis using DIAMAX is contraindicated.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
2-1
3 PRECAUTIONS
Service life of this machine is 6 years.
3.1. Equipment Classification and Handling precautions

This machine is classified as follows:
Type of protection from electric shock ····················ClassⅠ
Degree of protection from electric shock ··················Type B
Ensure to have a protective earth connection with the equipped power plug.
Patient is connected to this machine via patient blood and dialysate.
3.2. Precaution for Fluid Penetration

Keep the machine out of water.
3.3. Precaution for Flammable Atmospheres

Do not use this machine in flammable atmospheres.
O
3.4. Safety Precautions
N
Appropriate operation and regular maintenance are essential for safer use of this machine.
R
Carefully read and thoroughly understand the safety precautions described in this manual before
Q
TE
using or servicing this machine.

SO Y
The operating procedures and precautions described in this manual are effective only when this
IN
R
machine is used for its intended purposes. Users shall be liable for all deeds and the safety
measures taken when the machine is used in methods other than specified in this manual.
1. Degree of damage to health and property, and its indication (Alert symbols and signal words)
U
The degree of the foreseeable damage to health and property when the machine is misused
is classified into the following three categories, and each category is expressed by the
following alert symbol and signal word.
DANGER
Indicates an imminent hazardous situation which, if the machine is misused, will result
in death or serious injury.
WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if the machine is misused, will result
3-1
in death or serious injury.
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if the machine is misused, may

result in minor or moderate injury or property damage.
2. Note and its indication
NOTE
Indicates note sentences. Make reference when operating or servicing the machine.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
3-2
DANGER
Before using the machine, be sure to read this manual.
• This machine operates in a safe and reliable manner when operated and serviced as
specified in this manual.
• Carefully read and thoroughly understand this manual before operating this machine.
Incorrect operation may endanger individual person or damage the machine.
• This machine shall be operated by trained qualified personnel at a hospital under the
supervision by a doctor.
Know the method to stop this machine immediately.
• Know the method to stop this machine immediately in order to prevent the
occurrence of serious troubles.
• Do not allow non-professionals to operate the unit without having proper instructions.
Know the measures to take in case when this machine has stopped due to some
troubles.
O
• Check the condition of the machine and take appropriate measures according to the
instructions described in this manual. N
R
Do not touch any printed wiring boards, electric wiring, and terminals except when
Q
servicing this machine.

TE
• Do not touch any electric wiring and terminals not isolated.

SO Y
• Do not touch any printed wiring boards with wet hands.

IN
R
• Turn OFF the breaker when touching a printed wiring board, electric wiring, or
terminals.
Take special caution on the following foreseeable risk of danger to a patient when he
or she is connected to or disconnected from the line of the machine for medical
U
treatment.
• Air must not enter the body of a patient.
• Do not connect a patient to the blood line before priming.
• Do not connect a patient to the blood line when this machine is being rinsed.
• Take caution so that any harmful viruses or chemicals do not enter the body of a
patient.
Always confirm that a patient is appropriately connected to the blood line. Improper
connection to the blood line may endanger a patient by the blood leak due to the poor
connection, rupture of the blood line due to inappropriate pressure rise, etc.
The venous pressure monitoring cannot prevent the risk of Extracorporeal blood loss
completely. Always check that a patient is appropriately connected to the bloodline.
Improper use of the bloodline may endanger a patient by the blood leak due to the
poor connection, rupture of the blood line due to inappropriate pressure rise, etc.
3-3
The narrow passages in the blood circuit such as kinks or too thin cannula may cause
the hemolysis, and the protective system may not detect this hazardous situation.
The blood clots or ultrasound gel may cause the functional failure of ultrasonic air
bubble detector.
The air may enter into blood circuit at connection point downstream of the air detector
such as single needle application, if pressure are negative.
This machine is not designed to use for patient with central venous catheter.
• If use with the central venous catheter, increase the risk of patient electric shock.
• When use this machine with other electric equipment (both medical and non-medical
equipment), make sure that the touch current and patient leakage current of the
equipment is not over the requirement of CF Type.
Responsible organization should be responsible for hygienic quality of any delivery
systems.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
3-4
WARNING
Do not change any set values during a treatment except for the case in emergency.
• Change set values before connecting a patient.
• When making a setting for a function, thoroughly understand the function to use in
advance.
Take caution to keep the power cable off the floor to prevent an electric shock due to
the leaked water on the floor when this machine is defected.
Furnish drainage near this machine.
Be sure to read maintenance manual before servicing the machine.
• Read carefully and thoroughly understand maintenance manual before servicing the
machine.
• Service the machine according to the instructions described in the maintenance
manual.
• Ask special maintenance personnel for the maintenance other than specified in the
O
maintenance manual.
N
Do not operate any switches unnecessarily during dialysis treatment.
R
Do not tilt the machine by five (5) degrees or more under the conditions where
Q
TE
something is put on the disinfectant tank table, hanger, tray, etc.

SO Y
Do not tilt the machine by ten (10) degrees or more. Otherwise, the machine may fall.
IN
R
Do not put anything on the disinfectant tank table, hanger, tray, etc when moving the
machine.
Do not connect any equipment other than allowed with this machine.
(Total leakage current (of this machine and other connected equipment) may exceed
U
the allowable value).

Usages other than specified by the manufacturer may cause injury or death of a
patient. The manufacturer will not liable for any troubles including damage to health of
a patient if this machine is operated, serviced, or calibrated in a manner other than
specified by the manufacturer. Only a trained qualified person must operate this
machine in the method specified by the manufacturer.
Check the real concentration by the Laboratory.
• Confirm that the real concentration is correct, using an osmotic pressure meter, a
conductivity meter, a flame photometer, etc.
• Confirm that the conductivity displayed on the machine is correct.
In the case that fluctuate the dialysate conductivity, the maximum conductivity
difference of Bicarbonate is 14%, the Total (mixed) one is 20% by alarm setting.
Confirm neither disinfectant nor acid fluid remains after rinsing is complete.
• After disinfection by sodium hypochloride or peracetic acid or acid cleaning by acetic
3-5
acids is complete, confirm neither disinfectant nor acidic fluid remains in the fluid
supply part and drainage part using test papers or reagent.
Our warranty does not apply to every damage, failure, negative effect etc., if things
other than the parts which we present are used.
Do not use DIAMAX in an oxygen rich, presence of the flammable anesthetic mixture
with air, oxygen, or nitrous oxide.
• This machine does not intended to use in the special environment such as a
hyperbaric oxygen therapy room, an operation room, MRI room, etc.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
3-6
CAUTION
Read and understand the installation procedures described in the maintenance
manual before installing this machine.
• Only the person who was trained qualified personnel must install this machine.
Read and understand the instruction manual of optional parts before connecting such
optional parts to this machine.
• Only the person who was trained qualified personnel must install this machine.
Do not give strong force or shock to the display and operation panel.
• Take caution not to give strong force or shock to the display and operation panel
during cleaning.
Sufficiently disinfect the machine before using it.
• Rinse the machine for one hour or longer when it has not been used for a long period
of time.
• When using the machine that has not been used for a long period of time without
O
draining, clean it until clean water comes out from the drain outlet.
Be sure to always keep the machine clean.
N
R
• Wipe off droplets and stains of blood, dialysate, cleaning solution as soon as
Q
TE
possible.
• Perform rinsing and disinfection regularly.
SO Y
IN
R
Some processes do not accept specific switches. In such cases, do not operate
switches forcedly.
Be sure to use the dialysate concentrate in properly color-coded container. The
dialysate concentrate not contained in a color-coded container cannot be used with
U
this machine.
Use only disposable products affixed with CE marking.
A person who handles disposable products may touch hepatitis virus or other
infectious medicals. Take extreme caution not to be infected when operating this
machine.
Assure the quality of water, dialysate concentrate, and substitution fluid used for the
machine operation in order to secure performance and safety.
Responsible organization should select and check any parameter and setting of
protective system.
3-7
NOTE
 Recommend the installation of Emergency power system for interruption of the
power supply
 The machine had optional batteries is immediately activated the audible alarm at
interruption of power supply. In the case the machine does not have optional
batteries, the audible alarm is not activation.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
3-8
3.5. Precautions
1. Allow only skilled personnel to operate the machine.
2. Take caution on the following points when installing the machine.
1) Install at a place where water does not splash on the machine.
2) Install at a place where the machine does not receive adverse effect from the
atmospheric pressure, temperature, humidity, ventilation, sunlight, and atmosphere
that includes dust, salty, sulfur, etc.
3) Take caution on the stability of the machine not to give it inclination, vibration, and
shocks (including the time of transportation).
4) Avoid a storage of chemicals or a place where gases are generated.
5) Pay attention to the frequency, voltage, and permissible current (or power
consumption) of the power supply.
6) Check the state of the power supply (state of the electrical discharge, polarity, etc.).
7) Connect the earth properly.
3. Take caution on the following points before using the machine.
O
1) Check the conditions of switch contacts and verify that the machine operates properly.
2) Confirm the grounding is ensured.
N
R
3) Confirm that all the cable connections are correct and safe.
Q
TE
4) Take sufficient caution when using the machine in combination with other machines
SO Y
since it may obstruct correct operation or cause danger.

IN
R
5) Verify that there is neither deforming nor discoloration in the appearance and other
features of the machine.
4. Take caution on the following points when using the machine.
1) Always observe that there is no abnormality in the operation of the machine and with a
U
patient.
2) If some abnormality has occurred with the machine, take appropriate measures such
as stopping the machine in a safe condition for the patient.
3) Do not raise the dialysate pressure above the allowable limit.
4) Take caution so that a patient does not touch the machine.
5) Do not give any strong vibration to the machine.
6) Do not bring any electromagnetic wave source close to the machine since it may
cause a breakdown or malfunction of the machine.
7) Do not push or lean against the machine, especially, from left or right side of it. It could
lead to overturn which may
5. Take caution on the following points after using the machine.
1) Turn OFF the power supply of the machine to return the machine to the condition
before use according to the specified procedures.
2) Do not give unnecessary force in pulling the power and other cables for disconnection,
but hold the plug.
3-9
3) Take caution on the following points for the storage of the machine.
a. Keep at a place where no water splashes on the machine.
b. Keep at a place where the machine does not receive adverse effect from the
atmospheric pressure, temperature, humidity, ventilation, sunlight, and
atmosphere that includes dust, salty, sulfur, etc.
c. Take caution on the stability of the machine not to give it inclination, vibration, and
shocks (including the time of transportation).
d. Avoid storage of chemicals at a place where gases are generated.
4) Put away the accessories, cables, and electrode, etc. together at an appointed place
after cleaning.
5) Always rinse and clean the machine after use to prepare for the next use.
6) Always keep the filter of the cooling fan clean.
6. If the machine is defected, check the trouble cause on the appropriate display and ask the
special maintenance personnel for repair without fiddling it by yourself.
7. Do not modify the machine.
8. Maintenance
O
1) Make the special maintenance personnel check the machine and its parts periodically.
N
2) Confirm that the machine operates properly and safely when operating the machine
R
that has not been used for a certain period of time.
Q
TE
9. Others
SO Y
1) Check the concentration of the dialysate before use by the osmotic pressure
IN
R
measurement method and the like.

2) (Concerning the water to dilute the dialysate concentrate:) AAMI standards water is
recommended for the water to dilute the dialysate concentrate used for the chronic
dialysis treatment.
U
3.6. Precaution for Software

The Version number of manuals is described on the front cover of each document.
These documents are corresponded with this software version. Please check the list below for
compliance with the software version and these documents before usage.
You can check the software version in the start-up screen.
Documents / Version Software Version

Instruction Manual MX1010-1704E*
Ver. 07.40 or later
Maintenance Manual MX2010-1704E6
(NOTE: * mark shows revision number.)
3-10
4 General description
4.1. Dimensions and Weight

Specification NOTE
Dimension W: 400 mm (Body. Without Base) Dimensions of Base: 465 (W) ×
D: 435 mm (Body. Without Base) 985 (D): Including disinfectant
bottle base (760 mm for without
H: 1350 mm (Without IV pole and Signal tower)
disinfectant bottle base)
H: 1750 mm (With signal tower)
H: 1490 to 1900mm (With IV pole without Signal tower)
Weight Approx. 110kg (Dry condition) Without liquid at hydraulic.
Airborne Noise The A-weighted instantaneous sound pressure Maximum sound pressure:53dB
level :Under 70dB (Measured at a distance of 1
meter from the back side and at a
height of 1.6 meters from the
floor.)
4.2. Electrical Safety (Ordered by EN60601-1)
O
Specification N NOTE
Class of electrical CLASS I None
R
classification
Q
TE
Type of electrical Type B Symbol:

classification Applied part: Dialysate Circuit
SO Y
IN
R
Type BF applied part: Cuff for

BPM option.
Protection against IPX1 Symbol: IPX1
the penetration of (Machine Type3 or later)
fluids
U
Leakage currents In normal condition: None

Earth leakage current: 0.5 mA or less
Enclosure leakage current: 0.1 mA or less
Patient leakage: 0.1mA or less
At single fault condition:
Earth leakage current: 1.0 mA or less.
Enclosure leakage current: 0.5 mA or less
Patient leakage: 0.5 mA or less
EMC EMC standard for conformity: None
IEC60601-1-2 Ed. 2.0: 2001 (Machine Type3 or later)
4-1
4.3. Electrical Supply
Specification NOTE
Line voltage 230 V AC, ±10% It has Battery option. See option
110 V AC, ±10% specification.
Frequency 50 Hz/ 60 Hz
Power consumption Equipment: Less than 2200 VA

(At rated power supply)
4.4. Fuses
Specification Qty. NOTE
Circuit Breaker Circuit protector 2 X 15A （230V） - Rear of Power Supply Unit
Circuit protector 2 X 25A （110V）
Heater Control Unit Tube Fuse AC250V T8.0AH 2 (Machine Type3 only)
O
230 V AC Type only
Pump Driver Board Tube Fuse AC250V T3.15AL N 2
Battery Tube Fuse AC250V T6.3AH 1
R
Q
TE
4.5. External connections

SO Y
IN
R
Specification NOTE
RS-232 Interface for serial communication with Not used at the moment
computer.
4.6. Storage and transportation

U
Specification NOTE
Storage -15 to 40 °C (without water in piping) Factory default: Water is
temperature 5 to 40 °C (with water in piping) eliminated when shipped
Storage humidity 10 to 90 % Non condensing
Transportation -20 to 40 °C (without water in piping) None
temperature 5 to 40 °C (with water in piping)
Transportation 10 to 90 % Non condensing
humidity
Atmospheric 700 to 1062 hPa None
pressure
NOTE
When resuming use after storage, allow the system to stand and raise to the room temperature
before turning on the power switch.
4-2
4.7. Operating Conditions
Specification NOTE
Water inlet Pressure 0.1 up to 0.73 MPa (1.0 up to 7.5 kgf/cm2) None
Water inlet flow More than 1100 mL/min
Water inlet 5°C up to 30°C ·To be at least 5°C lower than
temperature dialysate set temperature.
·Fluctuation of temperature per
1 min. must be within ±1°C.
Water drain Minimum drain capacity: More than 1500 No less than 5 cm free fall. The
mL/min water drain must be located at a
Height of drain: Max 60 cm above the ground. lower level than that of the
dialyzer position.
Concentrate supply 0.00 to -0.01 MPa (0.000 up to -0.102 kgf/cm2)
Connection height: Max. 50 cm
Mode of operation Continuous Operation
Environment of Not designed to use in the an oxgen rich,
usage presence of the flammable synesthetic mixture
O
with air, oxge, or nitrous oxide.
Surrounding space
N
Following clearance must be secured against None
R
outside dimensions of equipment.
Top clearance: 5 cm or more
Q
TE
Side clearance: 10 cm or more

SO Y
Rear clearance: 20 cm or more

IN
R
For ventilation, there must be a ventilation

opening of Φ20 cm or more, or one of top, side,
and rear must be open to atmosphere.
Range of operating 15 to 35°C To be at least 5°C lower than
temperature dialysate set temperature.
U
Air humidity 35 to 80% Non condensing

Norms for water Use water of quality meeting AAMI - None
quality approved American National Standard for
Haemodialysis System, RD5, 1981,
Section 3.2.
4-3
4.8. Hydraulics
4.8.1. Blood Leak Detector
Specification NOTE
Method Optical
Sensitivity Range: 0 to 370 ppm (1ppm increment) 190ppm (0.19 mL blood/L,
Hematocrit 32%)
CAUTION
When the dialysate flow turned off, the Blood leak alarm response is delayed.
The reaction time depends on the volume between the dialyzer and the Blood leak detector
(approx. 200mL total fluid volume) and as well on the Ultrafiltration rate.
4.8.2. Transmembrane Pressure
O
Specification NOTE
Alarm range N
Lower limit: -100 to 300 mmHg (Back filtration
alarm)
None
R
Upper limit: 10 to 600 mmHg
Q
TE
Calculation TMP
SO Y
=PG5-PG3+TMP OFFSET
IN
R
PG3=Dialysate pressure at the exit of the

dialyzer
PG5=Venous pressure.
TMP OFFSET= Pressure changes depending on
flow
U
Accuracy ±20 mmHg
4.8.3. Dialysate Pressure

Specification Condition
Measurement range -450 up to +450 mmHg None
Accuracy ±10 mmHg
Auto fixing Alarm Lower Width: -200 mmHg to -50 mmHg (Relative value from present
range Upper Width: 50 mmHg to 200 mmHg value)
Alarm Limit Lower limit: -450 to 450 mmHg None
(On shipment: -400 mmHg)
Upper limit: -450 to 450 mmHg
(On shipment: +450 mmHg)
4-4
4.8.4. Ultrafiltration
Ultrafiltration rate 0.00 L/h, 0.10L/h up to 5.00 L/h Set to Max. 2 L/h on shipment.
Accuracy 0.10-3.00 L/h: ±30g/h PG5: 150 mmHg
3.00-5.00 L/h: 1% of setting When equipment is adjusted in
the accuracy same as done on
shipment.
Accuracy of UF time Within 1sec / h
Control and Safety Volumetric system by the balancing chamber. None
system Monitoring of UF pump, TMP
Max. ratio of UF 10 to 100% (Setting is possible by 1%
pump against BP increment.)
UF-Profile 6 types of profile can be selected.
UF-Volume 0.00 to 99.99 L 0.01 L increment
4.8.5. Degassing
O
Specification NOTE
Deaeration method Negative pressure deaeration methodN None
R
Dissolved gas in Max.: 0.019 MPa (140 mmHg) When water temperature at
dialysate deaeration is 37°C
Q
TE
When dissolved oxygen partial

SO Y
pressure at deaeration is 0.027

IN
MPa (200 mmHg)

R
4.8.6. Acetate Dialysis

Setting range 10.0 to 17.0 mS/cm (0.1 mS/cm increment) On shipment, TOTAL is set to a
U
value within (12.6 to 15.4 mS/cm)

range.
Accuracy ±0.3 mS/cm
Alarm range 1 to 20% of set value (On shipment: 4%) CD1 and CD3
Dilution ratio 1/20.00 to 1/45.00 (Input denominator by 0.01 None

increment.)
4-5
4.8.7. Bicarbonate Dialysis
Bicarbonate Setting 1.0 to 8.0 mS/cm (0.1 mS/cm increment) On shipment, W+B is set to a
range value within (2.5 to 3.1 mS/cm)
range.
Accuracy ±0.3mS/cm
Bicarbonate 1 to 14% of set value (On shipment: 7%) CD2 and CD4
Alarm range
Bicarbonate 1/20.00 to 1/70.00 (0.01 increment) None
Dilution ratio
Total Mixed Setting 10.0 to 17.0 mS/cm (0.1mS/cm increment) On shipment, TOTAL is set to a
range value within (12.0 to 16.0 mS/cm)
range.
Accuracy ±0.3 mS/cm
Total Mixed Alarm 1 to 20% of set value (On shipment: 4%) CD1 and CD3
range
O
Dilution ratio 1/20.00 to 1/45.00 None
N
(Input denominator by 0.01 increment.)
R
4.8.8. Dialysate Temperature
Q
TE
SO Y
Setting range 30.0°C up to 40.0°C (0.1°C increment) Inlet water temperature must be
IN
R
(On shipment: 36 to 38 °C) at least 5°C lower than dialysate

set temperature.
Ambient temperature must be at
least 5°C lower than dialysate set
temperature.
U
Accuracy Measured value±0.8°C Measured value=Average for 1

min.
Alarm range 29.0°C to 41.0°C (0.1°C increment) T1 and T3 sensors
Sensor type Thermistor None
4.8.9. Dialysate Flow Rate

Specification NOTE
Setting range 300 to 800 mL/min
Accuracy ±10%
Safety system Monitoring of the Flow switch 2.
4-6
4.9. Extra corporeal Blood Circuit
4.9.1. Arterial Pressure
Specification NOTE
Measurement range -300 to +600 mmHg None
Accuracy ±10 mmHg
Auto fixing Alarm Lower Width: -200 mmHg to -10 mmHg (Relative value from present
range Upper Width: 10 mmHg to 200 mmHg value)
(On Shipment: -300mmHg)
(On shipment: 300 mmHg)
4.9.2. Venous Pressure

Specification NOTE
Measurement range -300 to +600 mmHg None
O
Accuracy ±10 mmHg
Auto fixing Alarm
range
Lower Width: -200 mmHg to -10 mmHg N (Relative value from present
value)
Upper Width: 10 mmHg to 200 mmHg
R
Q
TE
(On Shipment: -10mmHg)

SO Y

IN
(On Shipment: 400mmHg)

R
Level adjuster Pressure infusion button does not work during None
Venous pressure high alarm condition for
preventing over pressure.
U
4.9.3. Air Bubble Detector

Specification NOTE
Sensor type Ultrasonic sensor None
Applicable tube Tube material: Soft PVC However, limited to NIPRO's
standard blood line for DIAMAX.
Detection capability <Single bubble> ·Flow rate: 200 mL/min
Outputs alarm when a bubble of setting value or ·Fluid temp.: 37±1.0°C
more is detected. Detecting sensitivity differs
Range: 1.0 ~ 10.0µL (0.1µL increment) depending on flow rate of the
<Total bubble> bubble that passes bubble
Output alarm when bubbles of setting value or sensor.
more is detected during setting time.
Range: 1.0 ~ 1000.0µL (0.1µL increment)
Accumulate Time: 0 ~ 600 sec
Sensitivity 0.3 ~ 10.0µL (0.1µL increment)
4-7
4.9.4. Blood Pump
Blood pump type 2 roller type None
Automatic gap adjustment Spring gap on shipment:
(Gap adjustment spring: For large dia. tube: 3.5 3.5 mm (one side)
to 4.0 mm, For small dia. tube: 4.0 to 5.0 mm)
Setting range For large dia. tube Large dia. tube:
25 to 600 mL/min φ8.00×φ12.00±0.15 mm
(The Type 3 or before machine: 50 to 600mmHg) Length: 210 mm or more
(On shipment: 50 to 600mL/min)
For small dia. Tube Small dia. tube:

15 to 550 mL/min φ6.35×φ9.75±0.15 mm
(The Type 3 or before machine: 50 to 450mmHg) Length: 210 mm or more
(On shipment: 50 to 450mL/min)
(Min. and Max. flow rate may not
O
be achieved by permanent
fatigue, etc. of rolling tube.)
Accuracy 50mL/min or more: ±10% of set value
N Entrance pressure
R
Less than 50mL/min: ±20% of set value :Within ±150 mmHg
Exit pressure
Q
TE
:0 up to +500 mmHg
SO Y
BP stop alarm delay 0 to 120 sec. (Setting is possible by 1 sec. Time from BP stop till alarm
IN
R
time increment.) output
4.9.5. Syringe Pump

U
Type One cylinder type NIPRO 20mL standard syringe
Setting range 0.1 to 20.0 mL/h On shipment: 0.1 to 10.0 mL/h
Accuracy ±10% NIPRO 20 mL syringe

Overload detection Detection load: Approx. 53.9 to 58.8 N When NIPRO 20cc new syringe
(Approx. 5.5 to 6.0 kgf) (with low pusher resistance) is
used, discharge pressure will be
approx. 600 to 700 mmHg.
Fast infusion Approx. 2200 mL/h (NIPRO 30 cc syringe)
(Rapid speed) Approx. 1500 mL/h (NIPRO 20 cc syringe)
Approx. 750 mL/h (NIPRO 10 cc syringe)
One-shot infusion 0.5 to 10.0 mL NIPRO 20 mL syringe
(Bolus volume)
Prior stop function 1 to 60 min None
Other applicable 10, 20 and 30mL syringe None
syringe (full scale length : 15mm ~ 90mm)
4-8
4.9.6. Single Needle Single Pump
One stroke 0 to 1000 mL
minimum blood (Setting is possible by 1mL increment.)
volume
Reaction time over 5 to 30 sec.
(Setting is possible by 1 sec. increment.)
Rotation limit over 1 to 1000mL On shipment 100 mL
alarm
Setting range of Lower limit: -200 to -10 mmHg (Relative value from present
blood pressure (Setting is possible by 10 mmHg increment.) value)
switching alarm Upper limit: 10 to 200 mmHg
(Setting is possible by 10 mmHg increment.)
Possible setting Min.: -350 to 550 mmHg
range of blood (Setting is possible by 10 mmHg increment.)
pressure switching Max: -350 to 550 mmHg
alarm
(Setting is possible by 10 mmHg increment.)
O
4.10. Rinse
N
R
Specification NOTE
Q
TE
Water rinse Rinse time: 10 to 60 min Rinse

SO Y
Hot water rinse Set temperature: 75 to 85°C, and Rinse time: Rinse
IN
R
20 to 60 min
Acetic acid rinse Acetic acid concentrate 5 to 70%, Dilution Decalcification
concentration: 0.5 to 5%, and Rinse time: 20 to
60 min
Citric acid rinse Citric acid concentrate: 10 to 50%, Dilution Decalcification
concentration: 1 to 10%, and Rinse time: 20 to
U
60min
Hot citric acid Set temperature: 75 to 85°C, Citric acid Disinfection and Decalcification
disinfection concentrate: 10 to 50%, Dilution concentration: 1
to10%, and Rinse time:
20 to 60 min
Peracetic acid Peracetic acid concentrate: 3 to 12%, Dilution Disinfection and Decalcification
disinfection concentration: 0.01 to 0.3%, and Rinse time:
20 to 60 min
Sodium Sodium hypochloride concentrate: 3 to 12%, Disinfection
hypochloride Dilution concentration: 0.01 to 0.3%, and Rinse
disinfection time:
20 to 60 min
Dwell Soaking time: 1 to 60 min
4-9
4.11. Override
Specification NOTE
Alarm suppression Alarm goes off for the second time 2 minutes When the system detects a new
after the initial alarm stops alarming event during the 2 silent
minutes, alarm goes off
BP stop alarm delay 0 to 120 sec. (Setting is possible by 1 sec. Time from BP stop till alarm
time increment.) output
Air Bubble Detector Limited by the BP rotation frequency or time On shipment, 6 rotation
override OVERRIDE is enabled
Blood Leak detector On shipment, OVERRIDE is
1 to 300 min (by 1 min increment).
override enabled by Nurse mode.
Blood pump
On shipment, 4 rev.
override at Rinse of 1 to 10 rev. (by 1 rev. increment)
Override is enabled
Dialyzer
4.12. Range of sound pressure levels
O
Specification NOTE
Sound pressure
range
0 to 65dB or more N Measure 1 m away from the back
of the system
R
Adjustable sound pressure level
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
4-10
4.13. Options
4.13.1.Battery
Specification NOTE
Type Valve regulated (sealed) lead-acid battery None
Capacity 24 V / 7Ah (12 V * 2) None
Charging time 72h Charged when the breaker is
“On”
Continuous More than 30 min. When new and fully charged
operation time
Storage -15 to 40 °C None
temperature
Note: Deterioration of the battery can decrease continuous operation time. Please exchange
batteries annually. Replace of Batteries, please contact nearest branch or agency.
Ensure to full charge the battery before long-term storage.

Periodical charging can decrease battery deterioration during long-term storage. The following
table shows an example of storage temperatures and charging intervals.
O
Storage temperature
N Charging interval
R
25°C or less Within 6 months
Q
TE

SO Y

IN
R

40°C or more Do not store at this temperature
WARNING
U
Replacement of the Battery, please replace factory-authorized battery.
4.13.2.Dialyzer Inlet Pressure

Specification NOTE
Measurement range -250 to 650 mmHg None
Accuracy ±10 mmHg
Auto fixing Alarm Lower Width: -200 mmHg ~ -10 mmHg (Relative value from present
range Upper Width: 10 mmHg ~ 200 mmHg value)

4-11
4.13.3.Blood Pressure Manometer Unit (BPM)
Please refer to the “BLOOD PPRESSURE MANOMETER UNIT OPTION INSTRUCTION
MANUAL” for more information.
Specification Note
Pressure display range 10 to 300 mmHg
Pressure display accuracy Within ± 3 mmHg
Measurement method Oscillometric method
SYS : 60 to 250 mmHg
BP measurement range MAP : 45 to 235 mmHg
DIA : 40 to 200 mmHg
Average ± 5 mmHg
BP measurement accuracy Standard devition less than 8 According to AAMI SP-10
mmHg
Heart rate measurement count
40 to 200 bpm
range
O
Heart rate count measurement ± 2 % or ± rates, whichever is
N
accuracy smaller.
R
Q
TE
SO Y
4.13.4. ETFR (Endotoxin Retentive Filter)

IN
R
Please refer to the “ULTRA FILTER OPTION INSTRUCTION MANUAL” for more
information.
Specification Note
Effective Days 51 to 365 days On shipment: 90 days
U
Percentage for Replacement

60 to 90 % On shipment: 80 %
Reminder
Limit Time 50 to 2400 h On shipment: 400 h
NOTE
The other specifications are based on the DIAMAX specifications.
 Disposables
CF-609F
4-12
4.13.5. Bicarb cartridge
Please refer to the “BICARB CARTRIDGE OPTION INSTRCUTION MANUAL” for more
information.
NOTE
 Disposables
NIPROCART 750g
NIPROCART A2F 760
(Not be able to equip the large volumetic cartridge.)
4.13.6. Central Delivery System
O
N
Central Delivery System Option will only be able to use in Type 5 or later machine with option
R
parts.
Type 5 and part of Type 6 machine might need to replace some P.C. Boards.
Q
TE
SO Y
Please refer to the “CENTRAL DELIVERY SYSTEM OPTION INSTRUCTION MANUAL” for
IN
R
more information.
Specifications Conditions
Supply pressure 5－100 kPa Non fluctuation

U
Total required flow rate of connected

machine is less than solution
Flow rate 150mL/min or more
suppling capacity of Central
dialysate delivery system.
Temperature 5 – 30 °C None
Use water of quality meeting

AAMI – approved American
Norms for water
National Standard for None
quality
Haemodialysis System, RD5,
1981, Section 3.2.
NOTE
4-13
4.14. Used Materials for dialysate line
The following Materials have direct contact with water, dialysate and dialysate
concentrate.
Materials Abbreviation
Metals Stainless Steel SCS14 *
Stainless Steel SUS316 *
Stainless Steel SUS316L *
Stainless Steel SUS316-WPA *
Stainless Steel SUS316-WPB *
Plastic Poly phenylene sulfide PPS GF 40%
Polysulfone PSU
Polyetheretherketone PEEK (CF+PTFE)
Polypropylene PP
O
Polyethylene PE
Poly vinylindene fluoride
N PVDF
R
Polytetrafluoroethylene PTFE
Q
TE
Rubber Fluorocarbon rubber FKM

SO Y
Silicone Si
IN
R
Others AL2O3 Ceramic

Caution: Abbreviation of Materials accompanied by asterisk are based on JIS (Japanese
Industrial Standard).
U
4-14
5 REGULAR INSPECTION
5.1. Precautions Before Working

5.1.1. Maintenance personnel
Maintenance of the machine must be done only by the persons who have received the
training of this machine provided by the manufacturer and sufficiently mastered its skills
and expertise.
5.1.2. Clothes when performing maintenance/inspection
Wear clothes made of a material not likely to generate static electricity since electrical
parts such as P.C. boards are weak to static electricity. Also, wear clothes easy to work
not causing any injury or accident.
Wear shoes not slippery even on the wet floor since water may be spilt on the floor during
maintenance work.
5.2. Handling of Machine

5.2.1. Maintenance procedure
O
Carefully read the service manual, the instruction manual, etc. for the handling of the
machine. After sufficiently acquiring its characteristics, etc, perform maintenance of it as
N
specified.
R
5.2.2. Precautions when working
Q
TE
Perform maintenance after establishing the conditions in which any influence is given to
SO Y
other equipment such as those in the power supply system, the water supply and
IN
drainage lines, etc. Keep the floor dry while working since there is a danger of an electric
R
shock or a worker may slip and fall if the floor is wet.
CAUTION
U
There is a possibility of infection if performing maintenance of the dialysate line without

performing sufficient disinfection. Before servicing the dialysate line, always disinfect the line
sufficiently.
5-1
5.2.3. Precautions when cleaning and disinfection of enclosure
Wipe off the stains of blood and other organisms adhered on the machine enclosure with
a soft cloth wet with lukewarm water.
CAUTION
Do not use the following chemical solution.
These chemicals causes a damage of coating and solvent cracking.
- Organic solvent (Thinner, Benzene, etc.)

- Antiseptic solution and antimicrobial that contains quaternary ammonium salt
(Alkyldimethylbenzylammonium chloride, Didecyldimethylammonium chloride etc.) and/or some
kind of additive (N, N-Dimethylstearylamine etc.).
NOTE
Take sufficient caution so that any liquid does not enter the connections of the venous and
O
arterial pressure sensors. Otherwise, the sensors may be damaged.
N
R
5.2.4. Precautions for cleaning of dialysate concentrate connector and rinse port
Q
TE
Regularly clean the dialysate concentrate connector and the rinse port with a soft cloth
SO Y
wet with lukewarm water. By using the machine for a long time, the connector and the port
IN
R
will become unsanitary by the deposition of the dissolved objects of the concentrate, and
the machine alarm related with the connector may occur.
CAUTION
U
Do not wipe the machine with the disinfectant such as NaClO dilution. Chemicals such as
NaClO, etc. are resolved and generate chlorine. Chlorine is a harmful substance to the human
body and also gives a big damage to the parts of the electrical system, making the machine
defective.
Carefully clean and disinfect the connectors for the venous and arterial pressure sensors to
prevent the cross infection between patients.
5.2.5. Precaution for cleaning and Disinfection inside Machine

Confirm that the power supply is OFF before cleaning or disinfecting inside the machine.
(a) Wipe off the dirt in the hydraulic line inside the machine inside with a cloth wet with
water.
(b) Immediately wipe off the concentrate adhered on the hydraulic line.
(c) Never touch any parts except the hydraulic line.
5-2
NOTE
Before opening the front door for cleaning and disinfection, confirm the power is turned OFF.
DANGER
It is very dangerous to clean the electric circuits of the machine. Do not allow any persons other
than the qualified to open the electric circuit cover.
5.3. Replacement of Parts

Use only parts specified by the manufacturer when replacing a part.
5.4. Responsibility for Readjustment and Repair

The persons who have executed readjustment and/or repair must take the responsibility
of a series of troubles occurred related with the readjustment and/or repair.
O
5.5. Daily Inspection by Operator
N
R
The operator needs to check the following points to make sure that the machine is in a
Q
TE
good condition before and after using it every day.

SO Y
1. No water is spilt on the floor to prevent an electric shock and/or falling

IN
R
2. Hoses for water supply and drainage have no flaw, damage, fold, etc.
3. Hoses are properly connected to the water supply inlet connector and the drainage
outlet connector.
4. The power plug is properly connected.
5. No foreign matters such as concentrate, disinfectant, etc. are adhered to the outer
U
surface of the machine.

6. The machine has passed all the start-up tests done when the power ON/OFF switch is
turned ON or the dialysis preparation process begins without causing any trouble.
5.6. Maintenance Inspection

Check the hour meter at the rear of the machine, and perform periodical inspection
specified every 3500 hours (only UF/concentrate pump), every 5000 hours or every 6
months.
5.7. Inspection to be done after Long-Term Storage

When using the machine after the interval for two weeks or more, perform acid washing
and disinfection sufficiently, and also be sure to perform maintenance inspection.
Parts such as rubber parts and periodical replacement parts may be degraded depending
on the storage environment. When using the machine after long-term storage, it is
recommended to inspect rubber parts and periodical replacement parts before operating
the machine after long-term storage.
5-3
6 MAINTENANCE INSPECTION
In order to use the machine safely for a long time, it is necessary to perform maintenance inspection
periodically by an engineer who has acquired the expertise of the machine. Perform scheduled
maintenance referring to the maintenance manual in Chapter 7 and the replacement parts list for
maintenance in Chapter 11.
Make a copy of the maintenance check & record list in Chapter 8 and utilize it in regular maintenance
since it can also serve as the checklist for the regular maintenance.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
6-1
7 MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7.1. Inspection of Appearance, Connection Tubes, Power Cables, etc.

7.1.1. Inspection of connection tube conditions
Verify that there is no deterioration, damage, etc. with the water supply hose and the drainage hose.
Contents of work Judgment standard Remarks
Visually check that there is no fold, deterioration, and Judged as PASS when no
damage with the water supply and drainage hoses. fold, deterioration,
damage, etc. are found.
7.1.2. Inspection of connecting conditions of water supply and drainage hoses

Verify that the water supply hose and the drainage hoses are correctly connected.
Contents of work Judgment standard Remarks
Visually check that the water supply hose and drainage Judged as PASS when
hoses are properly connected to their inlet and outlet correctly connected to the
connectors respectively. connector with a hose
band not causing any
O
leakage.
7.1.3. Inspection of power cable damage

N
R
Verify that there is no deterioration, damage, etc. with the power cable.
Q
TE
Content of work Judgment standard Remarks

SO Y
Visually check that the power cable is not kinked, Judged as PASS when no
IN
R
deteriorated, or crushed. kink, deterioration, crush,

etc. are found.
7.1.4. Inspection of appearance

Verify that there is no damage, deforming, stain, etc. on the externals of the machine that may influence on
U
the functions of the machine.

Visually check that there is no damage, deforming, Judged as PASS when no
stain, etc. that may influence on the functions of the damage, deforming, stain,
machine. etc. are found.
7.1.5. Confirmation of fold, damage, deterioration, etc. of tubes

Confirm that there is no fold, damage, deterioration, etc. with tubes.
Open the front door, and visually check that each tube Judged as PASS when no
has no damage, deforming, deterioration, etc. Also, fold, damage,
visually check that screws are not loose. deterioration, etc. are
found.
7-1
7.1.6. Confirmation of fold damage, deterioration, etc. of harness
Confirm that there is no damage and deterioration with the harness inside the machine.
Open the front door and visually check that there is no Judged as PASS when no
damage and deterioration with each harness. damage, deterioration,
etc. are found.
7.1.7. Inspection of color lamps

Confirm that the color lamps function properly in the processes that the color lamps blink.
For example, while running Dialysate calibration Program, the color lamps blink in the order of “red →
yellow → green → blue” while the water supply program runs.
Refer to Chapter 16 Color Lamps - State Diagram.
7.2. Inspection of Dialysate Line

7.2.1. Confirmation of Open/Close frequency of solenoid valve
Check the frequency of opening and closing of solenoid valves.
O
1. Turn ON the power supply.
N
Judged as PASS if The hierarchy
R
2. Log in with the TECHNICIAN mode and press the open/close frequency of the
Q
TE
MENU-TECHNICIAN tab. Select MONITOR- does not exceed one maintenance

SO Y
MAINTENANCE DATA to display the maintenance million times with all data screen
IN
R
data screen for each part. (See Note below) valves. differs
3. Press TURN button at the bottom in the screen. depending on
4. Open/Close frequency of each valve is displayed. software
5. Confirm the open/close frequency of each valve is versions.
U
less than one million times.

6. Return to the original screen by pressing EXIT
button at the bottom in the screen.
Note) For software version VO1, log in with the MAKER mode and press the MENU –MAKER tab. Select
MAINTENANCE DATA to display the maintenance data screen for each part.
7.2.2. Confirmation of solenoid valve operation

Confirm that solenoid valves operate properly.
1. Open the front door and draw out the dialysate line. Judged as PASS if
2. Turn ON the power supply, log in the TECHNICIAN operation sound is heard
mode, press MENU-NURSE tab, and select with all valves.
MONITOR - FLOW MONITOR to display the
flowchart of the dialysate line.
3. Press FORCED OUT button at the bottom in the
7-2
screen.
4. Open or close each valve on the screen by the
pressing a each valve.
5. Confirm the operation sound heard when each
valve opens or closes.
6. Return to the original screen by pressing EXIT
button at the bottom in the screen.
7.2.3. Confirmation of Pressure regulator (PR1) operation

Confirm that reducing valves operate properly.
1. Stop the water supply. Judged as PASS if the Measure the
2. Open the front door and draw out the dialysate line. pressure is 0.025 ± 0.01 pressure after
3. Open the door at the rear side of the dialysate line the indication of
MPa (0.26 ± 0.1 Kgf/cm2) the pressure
and connect the pressure gauge on the OUT side of
gauge has
O
the reducing valve.
settled.
4. Turn ON the power supply and begin the dialysis N
preparation process.
R
5. Press MENU-NURSE tab and select MONITOR -
Q
TE
FLOW MONITOR to display the flowchart of the

dialysate line.
SO Y
6. Measure the pressure on the reducing valve OUT

IN
R
side while filling the chamber, referring to the

flowchart.
7. Return to the previous screen by pressing EXIT
button at the lower right in the screen and stop the
dialysis preparation process after the measurement
U
is completed.
8. Turn OFF the power supply, stop the water supply,
remove the pressure gauge, and restore the original
piping.
If the judge was not PASSED, refer to Chapter 15, and readjust or replace PR1.
(Type 2 Pressure regulator can not readjust. Please refer Chapter 11. )
NOTE
Do not wet inside of the machine when removing the tubing in the dialysate line. Wipe off immediately
if wet.
7-3
7.2.4. Confirmation of deaeration pressure
Confirm that the deaeration pressure is normal.
1. Open the back cover at the rear side of the Judged as PASS if the Measure the
dialysate line and connect a pressure gauge pressure is - 0.08 MPa pressure after
between buffer tank (BT1) and deaeration orifice
(-0.82 Kgf/cm2) or less. the indication of
(OL3).
2. Turn ON the power supply and start the dialysis the pressure
preparation process. gauge has
3. Read out the indication of the pressure gauge. settled.
4. Stop the dialysis preparation process after the
measurement is completed.
5. Turn OFF the power supply, remove the pressure
gauge, and then restore the original piping.
7.2.5. Confirmation of deaeration pump (P1) flow rate

Confirm the flow rate of the deaeration pump.
O
Content of work N Judgment standard Remarks
1. Turn ON the power supply and start the dialysis Judged as PASS if the Measure the
R
preparation process. flow rate is 750 mL/min or flow rate after
Q
TE
2. Press MENU-NURSE tab, select MONITOR - higher. the operation of

SO Y
FLOW MONITOR to display the flowchart of the the line has

IN
R
dialysate line. become stable.

3. Read out the flow rate display of P1 after the
operation in the line has become stable (about 5
minutes).
U

measurement is complete.
5. Turn OFF the power supply.
If the judge was not PASSED, refer to Chapter 15, and readjust P1 flow rate.
7.2.6. Confirmation of dialysate pump (P2) flow rate

Confirm the flow rate of the dialysate pump.
1. Turn ON the power supply and start the dialysis Judged as PASS if the Measure the
preparation process. Start with the dialysis flow rate flow rate is 500 ± 50 flow rate after
set at 500 mL/min.
mL/min. the operation of
FLOW MONITOR to display the flowchart of the the line has
dialysate line. become stable.
3. Read out the flow rate indication of P2.
7-4
measurement is complete.
If the judge was not PASSED, refer to Chapter 15, and readjust P2 flow rate.
7.2.7. Operating condition of deaeration tank (AS1)

Confirm that the air separation tank is working properly.
1. Open the front door and draw out the dialysate line. Judged as PASS if water
2. Turn ON the power supply and start the dialysis flow is not visually
preparation process. observed.
3. Visually check the piping on top of the deaeration
tank in which deaerated air flows.
4. Stop the dialysis preparation process after
confirmation is complete.
O
7.2.8. Confirmation of relief valve (RV1) operation N
Confirm the relief valve operates properly.
R
Q
TE
1. Open the front door and draw out the dialysate line. Judged as PASS if the Measure the
SO Y
2. Open the back cover at the rear side of the pressure is 0.12 ± 0.03 pressure after
IN
R
dialysate line and connect a pressure gauge on the MPa (1.2 ± 0.3 Kgf/cm2). the indication of
high-pressure side (deaeration tank side) of Relief the pressure
Valve 1. gauge has
3. Turn ON the power supply and start the dialysis become stable.
preparation process.
U

dialysate line.
5. Measure the pressure after filling of the chamber,
referring to the flow chart after the indication of the
pressure gauge has become stable (about 5
minutes).
is complete.
If the judge was not PASSED, refer to Chapter 15, and readjust RV1.
7-5
7.2.9. Confirmation of relief valve (RV2) operation
Confirm the relief valve operates properly.
1. Open the front door and draw out the dialysate line. Judged as PASS if the Measure the
2. Connect a pressure gauge on the high-pressure pressure is 0.08 ± 0.05 pressure after
side (air separator tank side) of Relief Valve 2. MPa (0.82 ± 0.5 Kgf/cm2). the indication of
3. Turn ON the power supply and start the dialysis the pressure
preparation process. gauge has
4. Press MENU-NURSE tab and select MONITOR - settled.
dialysate line.
5. Measure the pressure when the chamber is being
filled, referring to the flowchart.
is complete.
O
N
If the judge was not PASSED, refer to Chapter 15, and readjust RV2.
R
7.2.10. Condition of piping
Q
TE
Check the conditions inside the dialysate line.

SO Y

IN
R
1. Open the front door and draw out the dialysate line. Judged as PASS if there Select water
2. Open the back cover at the rear side of the is no fold, damage, washing for the
dialysate line. deterioration, etc. with water rinse
3. Turn ON the power supply and start the water rinse piping. process for this
U
process. Also judged as PASS if inspection.

4. Confirm that there is no leakage, fold, damage, there is no leakage from
deterioration, etc. with the dialysate line at sections the UF pump and the
such as tubes and tube joints. disinfectant pump.
5. Confirm that there is no leakage from the UF pump
and the concentrate pumps.
6. Stop the rinse process and turn OFF the power
supply.
7. Restore the former condition.
NOTE
You have to log in the TECHNICIAN mode to stop water rinse program.
7-6
7.3. Inspection of Blood Pump (BP)
7.3.1. Confirmation of play and abnormal noise at rotating part
Check the operating condition of the blood pump.
1. Turn ON the power supply. Judged as PASS if no Confirm
2. Prepare the bloodline and set it to the blood pump. abnormal sound is heard bloodline not to
3. Operate the blood pump and fill the bloodline with and no backlash or clack collect bubbles.
water. occurs during the
4. Set the blood pump flow rate to 100 mL/min and operation of the pump.
operate the blood pump.
5. Confirm that there are no abnormal noise, etc.
7. Turn the rotor with hand and confirm that there is no
abnormality such as play, clack, etc. has occurred.
7.3.2. Confirmation of blocking
O
Confirm that the blood pump is correctly blocking the tube.
Content of work
N Judgment standard Remarks
R
1. Turn ON the power supply. Judged as PASS if Begin
Q
2. Prepare the bloodline on the arterial side and set it pressure of approx. 375 measurement
TE
to the blood pump. mmHg (0.5Kgf/cm2) is after the

SO Y
3. Operate the blood pump and fill the bloodline with blocked and the pressure indication of
IN
R
water. Confirm the bloodline to be filled with water, in one minute is within PG5 has
stop the blood pump. ±20 mmHg settled.
4. Clamp the bloodline of arterial connection end of (0.03Kgf/cm2).
the dialyzer with a clamp.
5. Connect the pressure sensor connection end of the
U
blood pump POST side chamber to the venous

chamber connection port of the machine.
6. Press MENU-NURSE tab and select
MONITOR-FLOW2 to display the flowchart of the
bloodline.
7. Open the cover of the blood pump and set the value
of PG5 to 375 mmHg (0.5Kgf/cm2) by rotating the
rotor with hand.
8. Confirm that the pressure has not dropped by the
measurement one minute after the value of PG5
becomes stable.
9. Remove the bloodline and turn OFF the power
supply after the measurement is complete.
If the judge was not PASSED, refer to Chapter 15, and readjust BP rotor.
7-7
7.3.3. Confirmation of real flow rate
Confirm the real flow rate of the blood pump.
1. Turn ON the power supply. Judged as PASS if the
2. Prepare the bloodline and set it to the blood pump. flow rate is 100 ± 10 mL.
3. Operate the blood pump and fill the bloodline with
water.
4. Set the blood pump flow rate to 100mL/min and
operate the blood pump.
5. Measure the real flow rate for a minute with an
electronic balance, etc.
supply after the measurement is complete.
If the judge was not PASSED, refer to Chapter 15, and readjust flow rate.
7.4. Inspection of Syringe Pump (HP)

7.4.1. Operation of pusher
O
Confirm that the pusher is operating properly.
Content of work N Judgment standard Remarks
1. Pick up the pusher lever to release its lock. Judged as PASS if the
R
2. Slide it up and down to check for smooth pusher operates smoothly.
Q
TE
movement.
SO Y
IN
R
7.4.2. Confirmation of play and abnormal noise

Confirm the operation of the syringe pump.
1. Turn ON the power supply. Judged as PASS if no Recommended
U
2. Operate the syringe pump using the RAPID abnormal noise is heard grease:
function and the BOLUS function. and syringe pump MOLYCOTE
3. Confirm that there is no abnormal noise, etc. operates smoothly. G-NPASTE
4. Turn OFF the power supply. (DawCorning
5. Open the front door and grease up the syringe Corp.)
drive screw of the syringe pump.
7.4.3. Confirmation of overload switch operation

Confirm that the syringe pump overload switch works properly.
2. Prepare the syringe with sufficient water inside and pressure is 0.1-0.12 MPa
set it in the syringe pump. (1.0-1.2 Kgf/cm2).
3. Connect the tip of the syringe to the pressure
7-8
gauge.
4. Operate the syringe pump in the RAPID mode until
the overload switch is activated.
5. Measure the pressure when the overload switch is
activated.
6. Remove the syringe pump and turn OFF the power
supply after measurement is complete.
If the judge was not PASSED, refer to Chapter 15, and readjust syringe pump setting.
7.4.4. Confirmation of infusion volume

Confirm the discharge volume of the syringe pump.
1. Turn ON the power supply. Judged as PASS if
2. Prepare a syringe with plenty of water inside and measured volume is 2.5 ±
set it to the syringe pump. 0.375 mL.
O
3. Operate the syringe pump at 5 mL/h. N
4. Receive the water discharged for 30 minutes with a
R
container and measure the discharge amount with
Q
TE
an electronic balance.
SO Y
5. Remove the syringe pump and turn OFF the power

IN
R
supply when measurement is complete.

If the judge was not PASSED, refer to Chapter 15, and readjust syringe pump setting.
7.5. Inspection of Sensors

U
7.5.1. Confirmation of temperature sensor (T1- 4)

Confirm the temperature sensors operate properly.
2. Start the dialysis preparation process without A/B differences in temperature
solutions. between T1 and T3 and
3. Press MENU-NURSE tab and select MONITOR - between T2 and T4 are
FLOW MONITOR to display the flowchart of the within 0.5°C.
dialysate line.
4. Compare the temperatures of T1 with T3, and T2
with T4 after the temperatures become stable.
5. Stop the process and turn OFF the power supply
after the confirmation is complete.
If the judge was not PASSED, refer to Chapter 15, and readjust temperature sensor.
7-9
7.5.2. Confirmation of conductivity sensor (CD1- 4)
Confirm the conductivity sensor operates properly.
2. Prepare dialysate and start the dialysis preparation differences in conductivity
process and wait for the display of "CONNECT between CD1 and CD3
BLUE/RED COUPLER" to appear. and between CD2 and
3. Press MENU-NURSE tab and select MONITOR - CD4 are within 0.5
FLOW MONITOR to display the flowchart of the mS/cm..
dialysate line.
4. Compare the conductivity of CD1 with CD3, and
CD2 with CD4 after the conductivity become stable.
5. Stop the process, execute the rinse process to
wash the inside of the dialysate line sufficiently, and
then turn OFF the power supply.
O
If the judge was not PASSED, refer to Chapter 15, and readjust conductivity sensor.
N
R
7.5.3. Confirmation of blood leak detector (BLD)
Q
TE
7.5.3.1 Confirmation of blood leak detector (equal or before Machine Type 4)

SO Y
Confirm the blood leak detector operates properly.

IN
R
CAUTION
The window of the liquid permeable part of the blood leak detector is made of glass, and it cracks
U
easily. When cleaning the liquid permeable part, rinse with disinfectant without disassembling the
machine.
NOTE
Perform the rinse process with disinfectant in advance when checking the blood leak detector.

1. Turn ON the power supply. Judged as PASS if an
2. Open the front door and draw out the dialysate line. alarm bell sounds.
3. Start the dialysis preparation process without A/B
solution.
4. Remove the cover plate of the blood leak detector.
5. Insert the filter plate into the place where the cover
plate was removed.
7-10
6. Confirm that an alarm bell sounds.
7. Remove the filter plate, restore the original cover
plate, and turn OFF the power supply, interrupting
the dialysis preparation process.
7.5.3.2 Confirmation of blood leak detector (equal or later Machine Type 5)
CAUTION
The window of the liquid permeable part of the blood leak detector is made of glass, and it
cracks easily. When cleaning the liquid permeable part, rinse with disinfectant without
disassembling the machine.
NOTE
O
Perform the rinse process with disinfectant in advance when checking the blood leak detector.
N
R
1. Turn ON the power supply. Judged as PASS if an
Q
TE
2. Open the front door and draw out the dialysate line. alarm bell sounds.
SO Y
3. Start the dialysis preparation process without A/B

IN
R
solution.
4. Insert the paper between the main body and the
detection unit.
U
6. Remove the paper, and turn OFF the power supply,

interrupting the dialysis preparation process.
7-11
7.5.4. Confirmation of air bubble detector (ABD)
Confirm that the air bubble detector operates properly.
1. Turn ON the power supply. Judged as PASS if an This
2. Prepare bloodline, dialyzer, and dialysate, and start alarm occurs. confirmination
the dialysis preparation process. must be in the
3. Advance the process up to the RINSE OF “RINSE OF
DIALYZER process. Fill the bloodline with water. DIALYZER”
4. Open the cover at the clamp section to make the air process.
bubble detector work.
6. Stop the process, execute the rinse process to
sufficiently wash the inside of the dialysate line, and
then turn OFF the power supply.
O
7.6. Inspection of Electrical Equipment
7.6.1. Confirmation of insulation resistance
N
R
Confirm that dielectric breakdown has not occurred by measuring the insulation resistance.
Q
TE

1. Prepare an insulation-resistance tester and connect Judged as PASS if the Applied voltage
SO Y
it to the power plug and ground terminal at the insulation resistance is 5 500V.
IN
R
backside. MΩ or more.
2. Measure the insulation resistance by operating the
insulation-resistance tester.
U
7.6.2. Confirmation of earth leakage current

Confirm there is no current leak by measuring the earth leakage current.
Prepare a measurement instrument for the earth Judged as PASS if Prepare a
leakage current and measure the leakage current of leakage current is 0.5 mA measuring
instrument
the machine according to the operating instructions of or less.
complied with
the prepared instrument.
IEC60601-1.
7-12
7.6.3. Confirmation of backup battery performance
Check the battery performance if the backup battery (Option) is furnished.
NOTE
Check the performance of the backup battery under the condition where the battery is fully charged.
Electricity is being charged when the battery lamp at the lower right of the power ON/OFF switch is
blinking and charge is complete when it is ON. The battery is automatically charged regardless of the
ON/OFF condition of the power ON/OFF switch as long as the breaker is set ON.

2. Prepare the bloodline, set it to the machine, and fill blood pump and the
it with water. heparin pump operate
3. Operate the blood pump at 200 mL/min and the properly for 30 minutes or
syringe pump at 5 mL/h. more.
4. Keep the pumps ON, pull out the power cable, and
confirm that the pumps operate properly for 30
O
minutes.
5. Connect the power cable again, detach the
N
R
bloodline, and then turn OFF the power supply.
Q
TE
6. Keep the breaker ON to charge electricity again.

SO Y
NOTE
IN
R
Though a new battery has the capability to operation the machine for 30 minutes or more, it
deteriorates as time passes by regardless of the frequency of use. When deterioration is observed on
the periodical inspection, replace the battery as soon as possible.
U
7.7. Inspection of Safety-related Devices

7.7.1. Confirmation of temperature error alarm
Confirm that the temperature error alarm is given properly.
1. Turn ON the power supply. Judged as PASS if alarm
2. Prepare dialysate and start the dialysis preparation bell sounds.
process.
Then, wait until the display of "CONNECT
BLUE/RED COUPLER" appears.
3. After the display in Step 2 appears, log in the
TECHNICIAN mode, press MENU-TECHNICIAN
tab and select ALARM-TEMPERATURE to display
the alarm-setting screen of the temperature
sensors.
4. Change the value of T1 MAX or T1 MIN to change
to a value within the range where an alarm is output
at the present value of T1 displayed at the upper
7-13
section in the screen.
5. After confirming that the alarm sounds, return the
set value to the original value and then press EXIT
button at the lower right in the screen to restore the
original screen.
6. Stop the dialysis preparation process and turn OFF
the power supply after executing the rinse process
to wash the dialysate line sufficiently.
7.7.2. Confirmation of conductivity error alarm

Confirm the conductivity error alarm is output properly.
1. Turn ON the power supply. Judged as PASS if alarm
2. Prepare dialysate and start the dialysis preparation bell sounds.
process. Then, wait until the display of "CONNECT
BLUE/RED COUPLER" appears.
O
3. After the display in Step 2 appears, log in the
TECHNICIAN mode, press MENU-TECHNICIAN N
tab and select ALARM-CONDUCTIVITY to display
R
the alarm setting screen of the conductivity sensors.
Q
TE
4. Change the values of B+W and TOTAL in the

column of “WIDTH” to “1%”.
SO Y
5. After confirming that the alarm sounds, return the

IN
R
set value to the original value and then press EXIT

button at the lower right in the screen to restore the
original screen.
U
7.7.3. Confirmation of hydraulic pressure error alarm

Confirm that the pressure error alarm is output properly.
2. Prepare dialysate and start the dialysis preparation alarm is output properly
process. Then, wait until the display of "CONNECT for each ARTERIAL,
BLUE/RED COUPLER" appears. VENOUS, and
3. After the display in Step 2 appears, log in the DIALYSATE2.
TECHNICIAN mode, press MENU-NURSE tab and
select PRESSURE ALARM to display the
alarm-setting screen of the pressure sensors.
4. Press ARTERIAL PRESS button and select the
arterial pressure of the bloodline setting screen.
5. Change the value of LOWER LIMIT or UPPER
7-14
LIMIT to occur LOWER LIMIT or UPPER LIMIT
alarm.
6. Confirm the alarm occurs, and return the value to
the original value.
7. Also, confirm that the alarm is output by the
operation with VENOUS and DIALYSATE2.
7.7.4. Inspection of venous clamp (CL)

Confirm the blocking performance of the clamp.
1. Prepare the venous side bloodline filled with water Judged as PASS if the
and set it to the venous clamp section. Connect the difference between the
bloodline to the dialysate pressure sensor value recorded in Step 6
O
connection port. and Step 7 is within
2. Turn ON the power supply. 37.5mmHg (0.05
N
3. Log in the TECHNICIAN mode, press MENU- Kgf/cm2).
R
NURSE tab, and select MONITOR-FLOW2 to
Q
TE
display the flowchart of the blood line.

SO Y
4. Clamp the dialyzer connection end of the bloodline

IN
and the needle connection end with a clamp etc.

R
5. Inject water into the chamber of the bloodline with

the syringe so that the value of PG5 becomes
750mmHg (1.0Kgf/cm2).
6. Remove the clamp on the needle connection end
U
side and wait for two minutes. Record the value of

PG5 when the clamp is removed.
7. Record the value of PG5 in two minutes.
supply.
7.8. Confirmation of dialysate making

Confirm that the dialysate is appropriately made.
2. Prepare dialysate, bloodline, dialyzer, and start the measured conductivity is
dialysis preparation process. Proceed the process the set value ± 0.3
up to the RINSE OF DIALYZER process. mS/cm.
3. Sample the dialysate from the sample port after
the conductivity becomes stable and confirm that its
conductivity is the set value.
7-15
4. Stop the dialysis preparation process and turn
OFF the power supply after executing the rinse
process to wash the dialysate line sufficiently.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
7-16
8 MAINTENANCE CHECKLIST
Model: DIAMAX Serial No.: Operating hours when maintenance is performed:

Date of installation: Check date: Person checked:
1 Inspection of appearance, connection tubes, and power cables

No. Contents of check Result Remarks (Contents of work, Exchanged parts, etc.)
7.1.1 Condition of connection tube
Connecting conditions of water supply and
7.1.2
O
drainage hoses
7.1.3 Power cable damage
N
7.1.4 Appearance
R
Q
7.1.5 Fold, damage, and deterioration of tubes
TE
7.1.6 Fold, damage, and deterioration of harness
SO Y
IN
7.1.7 Color lamps
U R
8-1
Model: DIAMAX Serial No.: Operating hours when maintenance is performed:
2 Inspection of dialysate line

7.2.1 Open/Close frequency of solenoid valve
7.2.2 Operation of solenoid valve
7.2.3 Operation of reducing valve
O
7.2.4 Deaeration pressure
N
7.2.5 Deaeration pump (P1) flow rate
R
7.2.6 Dialysate pump (P2) flow rate
Q
TE
7.2.7 Operation of air deaeration tank (AS1)
SO Y
7.2.8 Operation of relief valve (RV1)
IN
7.2.9
7.2.10
Operation of relief valve (RV2)
Condition of piping
U R
8-2
Model: DIAMAX Serial No: Operating hours when maintenance is performed:
3 Inspection of blood pump

7.3.1 Play and abnormal noise at rotating part
7.3.2 Blocking
7.3.3 Real flow rate
O
4 Inspection of syringe pump (HP)
N
R
7.4.1 Operation of pusher
Q
TE
7.4.2 Play and abnormal noise
SO Y
7.4.3 Operation of overload switch
IN
7.4.4 Infusion volume
R
5 Inspection of sensors
U
7.5.1 Temperature sensor (T1-T4)
7.5.2 Conductivity sensor (CD1-CD4)
7.5.3 Blood leak detector (BLD)
7.5.4 Air bubble detector (ABD)
8-3
Model: DIAMAX Serial No: Operating hours when maintenance is performed:
6 Inspection of electrical equipment

7.6.1 Insulation resistance
7.6.2 Earth leakage current
7.6.3 Battery performance
O
N
7 Inspection of safety-related devices
R
Q
TE
7.7.1 Temperature error alarm
SO Y
7.7.2 Conductivity error alarm
IN
7.7.3
7.7.4
Hydraulic pressure error alarm
Venous clamp (CL) R
8 Others
U
7.8 Dialysate making
8-4
9 INSTALLATION
Install this machine at a place that satisfies the following installation requirements.
In addition, installation work described in this chapter must be done by qualified persons
who have received the specified training of this machine by the manufacturer.
WARNING
Installation of the machine must be done only by the persons who have received the training of
this machine provided by the manufacturer and sufficiently mastered its skills and experience.
9.1. Power Supply

The following shows the ratings of the power equipment for this machine.
Power supply: AC230V ± 10%, 50/60 Hz

AC110V ± 10%, 50/60 Hz
Power consumption: 2.2 KVA MAX
O
N
The power equipment must have sufficient capacity enough to operate this machine.
R
Q
TE
WARNING
SO Y
The power cable of DIAMAX is not designed to replace or to modify by users or technicians. If
IN
R
you need replace the cable, please contact the nearest branch or agency.
9.2. Water Supply Conditions, Drainage Conditions

U
Check the following points for the proper operation of the machine.
9.2.1. Water supply conditions

Water quality: Clean water for dialysis (Quality water must satisfy the requirements
enforced in the hemodialysis system U.S. standard RD5: Article 3.2
(1981))
Inlet pressure: 0.1 up to 0.73 MPa (1.0 up to 7.5 kgf/cm2)
Volume of water: 1100 mL/min or more
Temperature: 5-30°C (Temperature variation: Below 1°C/min.)
9.2.2. Drainage conditions

Drainage volume: 1500 mL/min or more can be drained.
Drainage height: 0-60 cm (Head: 5 cm or more) Distal end of the drain tube must not
contact with the surface of the water in the waste channel.
Drainage tube: Tube can be used less than 3meters long.
9-1
9.2.3. Environment of usage
DIAMAX is not designed to use in an oxgen rich, presence of the flammable anesthetic
mixture with air, or nitrous oxide.
9.3. Surrounding Space

Following clearance must be secured against outside dimensions of equipment.
Top clearance: 5 cm or more
Side clearance: 10 cm or more
Rear clearance: 20 cm or more
For ventilation, there must be a ventilation opening of Φ20cm or more, or one of top, side,
and rear must be open to atmosphere.
DANGER
Make sure that the installation environment satisfies the above conditions. An improper
installation environment may cause serious damage to the health of the operator or the patient
as well as machine malfunctions.
CAUTION
O
N
R
This system requires special instruction for EMC. Read and follow the EMC-related information
Q
in the attached document of instruction manual carefully for installation and use.
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
9-2
9.4. Unpacking and Installation
DANGER
Dropping out of the package can cause serious accident, such as bone fractures. Never open
the package if no one else is present. Handle the system carefully to avoid dropping it.
9.4.1. Unpacking Carton and Confirmation of accessories

Confirm that the following items are included inside the carton after unpacking the carton.
• IV Pole
• Color Lamp
• Disinfectant Tray
• Dialyser Holder
• Hexagonal Wrench (8 mm)
• Instruction Manual
• Disinfectant Nozzle Holder
O
• Disinfectant Nozzle
• Handle for Pole N
• Tray Disinfectant Nozzle
R
• Cross recessed head screw (2pieces)
Q
TE
• Cable fixture
SO Y
IN
R
Instruction Manual Color Lamp
IV Pole
Dialyzer Holder
U
Handle for Pole
Cross recessed
head screw
Disinfectant Nozzle Holder
Hexagonal Wrench
Cable fixture
Disinfectant Tray
Tray
9-3
9.4.2. Assembling accessories into machine
Following tools need to be prepared to assemble accessories into the machine.
• Phillips-head screwdriver
• Spanner (26 mm)
CAUTION
Note the following when assembling:
1. Work on a level and stable surface.
2. Ensure enough space for assembling.
3. Use the enclosed parts/accessories for assembling.
9.4.3. Assembling disinfectant nozzle holder/disinfectant tray
NOTE
The screws used in this machine are ISO metric screw threads. Use the tools that meet the
O
metric screw threads.
N
R
1. Unscrew the 8 screws [(A) circled in
Q
TE
the figure] to remove the back cover of

the hydraulic line. Since the tubes and
SO Y
wires are connected to the main

IN
R
machine, work carefully not to pull out

them.
U
2. Through the holes [(B) circled in the

figure above], attach the disinfectant
nozzle holder on the backside of the
removed back cover using the provided
screws. Attach the nozzle holder with the
flat side up. Tighten the nozzle holder
together with the cable fixture [(C) circled
in the figure on the left].
9-4
3. Fix the connector as (D) circled in
the figure with the cable fixture
tightened in step 2.
4. Remove the 4 truss head screws [(E)

circled in the figure].
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R
5. Using the Phillips-head

screwdriver, fix the disinfectant
tray with the truss head screws
removed in the step 4.
U
6. Follow the step 1 procedure in

reverse to re-install the back
cover. Make sure not to fold the
tubes or pinch the wires.
9-5
7. Connect the disinfectant nozzle to
the edge of the thin tube hanging
from the below the fan of the back
cover of the hydraulic line.
8. When the disinfectant nozzle is not

used, store it as in the figure on the
right.
9.4.4. Assembling color lamp/ IV pole
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
1. Insert the hanger to the fixed pole as the figure above.

2. Attach the handle for pole into the thread on the fixed pole.
3. Fix the IV pole at an adequate height by tightening up the handle for pole.
4. Insert color lamp to the bracket.
5. Fix the color lamp using the spanner (26 mm) as the figure above.
9-6
9.4.5. Wiring for color lamp
Connect the cables for the color lamp.
1. Remove the screws at seven circled
sections in the right figure with the
phillips screwdriver.
2. Remove the backside panel by
O
sliding it in the arrow direction.
The earth cable and the fan harness
N
R
are connected to the backside panel.
Turn over the backside panel, taking
Q
TE
caution not to damage the power

SO Y
supply cord, remove the fan

IN
connector, and remove the earth

R
cable with the Phillips screwdriver.

U
3. There is an unconnected connector at the

circled portion in the right figure. Connect
the connector of the color lamp with the
unconnected connector.
9-7
4. Re-install the backside panel in the order
reverse to the above procedures. Ensure to
connect the earth of the backside panel and
the fan harness. When re-installling the
backside panel, pass the cable for the color
lamp through the recess at the circled
Recess for Color Lamp
portion in the right figure.
Cable
Take caution not to catch the cable.
9.5. Releasing Hinge at Operation Panel
Remove the tape from the front edge.

Peel away the tape slowly not to remain
the substrate.
O
If operation panel was fixed and did not
tilt, it is fixed with screws.
N
There are holes to unscrew the operating
R
section fixing screws on both the right
Q
TE
and left sides of the control panel. To

SO Y
release the hinge, insert the Phillips

screwdriver into the holes (on the right
IN
R
and left sides) shown in the right figure

and remove the fixing screws.
Hole of Operation Panel
Fixing Screw
(On Both Right and Left Sides)
U
Membrane sheet has covered by protective thin film.

Peel the film from corner of membrane sheet.
9-8
9.6. Connections to Water Supply Inlet and Drain Outlet
9.6.1. Dimensions of connectors at water supply inlet and drain outlet
The connectors for the water supply inlet and the drain
outlet are as shown in the right figure.
When selecting a hose to use for water supply and
drainage, select one in the dimensions suit for the
connectors.
Unit: mm
9.6.2. Connecting the water supply hose
When connecting a hose that can resist water supply specifications to the water supply
inlet, fully insert it to the depth of the inlet port and be sure to secure it with the hose band.
DANGER
Insert the hose to the distal end of the water supply opening. Use a hose band to secure the
connection.
O
9.6.3. Connection to drain outlet N
R
Use a hose for drain outlet equal to the one used for the water supply inlet.
When connecting a hose to the drain outlet, fully insert it to the depth of the outlet and be
Q
TE
sure to secure it with the hose band.

SO Y
Also, regulate the length of the drain tube within 3 meters and avoid connecting the hose
IN
with the drain outlet at the height of 60 cm or less from the floor level.
U R
Drain hose
Drain outlet
Drainage 60cm or less
9-9
DANGER
Changes in the height of the drainage or clogging in the drain tube can cause errors in ultra
filtration.
CAUTION
Install the drain system appropriately in accordance with your community rule.
9.6.4. Connecting the power plug

Securely insert the power plug to the depth of the specified outlet.
CAUTION
O
The power specification is noted on the machine nameplate and near the breaker. Be sure to
apply the proper voltage when connecting to the machine.
N
R
Q
TE
CAUTION
SO Y
Use the machine with equipotential grounding. If equipotential grounding cannot be established
IN
R
at an outlet at the installation location, use the equipotential grounding terminal at the rear of the
machine. The terminal can be used only for equipotential grounding.
DANGER
U
Make sure that the electric power equipment at the installation location provides the voltage that
is proper to the machine before connecting them. Improper voltage may cause serious accidents
as well as machine malfunctions.
DANGER
If the protective grounding of the machine is incorrect, an electric shock due to a machine
malfunction or short circuit may happen. Make sure that a double-pole-grounding outlet is
correctly connected and protective grounding is assured at the installation location.
9-10
9.7. Preparing the system
9.7.1. Filling water in the hydraulic
Fill the dialysate line with water by executing the water supply program.
CAUTION
Execute the water supply program before operating the machine after its installation. When the
machine is operated with water not filled in the dialysate line, the machine may be defected.
CAUTION
Take caution since water may spout out of the rinse / disinfectant nozzle while the water supply
program runs. Before running water supply program, set rinse / disinfectant nozzle into bottle not
to spill over. (The bottle containing the water of 200 mL or more is prepared.)
1. Verify the water supply inlet and the drain outlet are properly connected and water is
O
sufficiently supplied.
2. Set rinse / disinfectant nozzle into bottle not to spill over (The bottle containing the
N
water of 200 mL or more is prepared.).
R
3. Turn ON the Power Breaker.
Q
TE
AC power supply lamp turns ON.

4. Press the Power ON/OFF switch for three seconds or more to turn ON the power
SO Y
supply of the machine.

IN
R
The lamp of the Power ON/OFF switch turns ON with the electronic sound. Then, the
Startup test screen is displayed and the Rinse Standby screen appears after a while.
5. Log in to the machine in the MAKER mode. See "Chapter 14 TECHNICIAN MODE
AND MAKER MODE” about the login method.
6. Press MENU button and select MAKER tab to open the Maker Maintenance screen.
U
7. Press WATER SUPPLY FUNCTION to display the Water Supply Program screen.
8. Press START button at the lower right section in the screen to start the water supply
program.
Hold the button pressed for approximately two seconds, then the filing water operation
start.
NOTE
The color lamps blink in the order of “red → yellow → green → blue” while the water supply
program runs.
9. The water supply program is made up of 8 steps in total, and completes less than 15
minutes. The chime will ring, informing the end of the program.
10. After all the steps complete, press EXIT button to restore the original screen.
9-11
9.7.2. Setting date and clock
The date and time of the machine are set to the Japan Standard Time on its shipment.
Change them to suit for the country or region where the machine is installed before
operating the machine.
1. Log in to the machine in the TECHNICIAN mode or the MAKER mode.

2. Press MENU button and select TECHNICIAN tab to open the Technician
Maintenance screen.
3. Press OPTION-CLOCK SETTING to display the Date Setting screen.
4. Display the ten keys by touching the numerals to be changed, and set to the date and
time in the region.
5. Press SET button at the lower section in the screen. Then, the input date and time will
be reflected into the setting.
6. After all the settings are complete, press EXIT button to close the Setting screen.
Reference: Input procedure of ‘WEEK’
O
Input Key result
0
1
N Sunday
Monday
R
2 Tuesday
Q
TE
3 Wednesday
4 Thursday
SO Y
5 Friday
IN
R
6 Saturday
9.7.3. Setting a diameter of pump segment in the blood pump

Select the diameter of a pump segment used for the bloodline set to the blood pump.
U
Two options of pump segment (8.00 mm or 6.25 mm) are available. The inner diameter
is set to 8.00 mm on the shipment of the machine. Change the setting only when the
diameter of the pump segment being used is 6.25 mm.

Maintenance screen.
3. Press CALIBRATIONBLOOD PUMP to open the setting screen for the blood pump.
4. Press the inner diameter button of a tube to be used.
5. Press EXIT button to restore the original screen
NOTE
If you change the setting to 6.35 mm, calibration of Blood Pump is necessary. Please refer to
Chapter 15.5 Blood Pump and follow the steps.
9-12
9.7.4. Setting the syringe pump
By changing the setting of the syringe pump, it is possible to use the syringes other than
the NIPRO product.
The syringe pump is set for the 10/20/30 mL syringes of NIPRO product on the shipment
of the machine.

Maintenance screen.
3. Press INITIAL DATAHEPARIN to open the setting screen for the syringe pump.
4. Set an appropriate figure to RATIO or LENGTH for the setting of each 10/20/30mL
syringe so that an appropriate flow rate is given to the syringe being used.
5. After the setting is complete, press EXIT button to restore the original screen.
NOTE
Setting of Syringe Pump, please refer to Chapter15 Setting of syringe ratio / Setting of syringe
O
length.
N
R
9.7.5. Setting the dialysate solution to be used
Q
TE
Register the dialysate solution to be used in this machine.

SO Y
See Chapter 15.7 Calibrate of dialysate.

IN
R
9.7.6. Setting the Blood Leak Detector override function (For software ver. 06.00 or later)
By activation of the Blood Leak Detector Override function, it is possible to use the
override function.
U

Maintenance screen.
3. Press ALARM  BLOOD LEAK to open the setting screen for the blood leak detector.
4. Be able to change the details of the alarm and override function setting in this page.
The machine counts the blood leak detection that is more than setting value within setting
time. When the count became more than the number of setting times, the override
function become activation.
Be able to use the function in the NURSE mode by changing the setting.
9-13
9.7.7. Setting the function of Rinse of Dialyzer
NOTE)
From software version 7.31, the functions at Risne of Dialyzer were upgraded.
By activation and setting the Blood Pump (BP) override function, it is possible to use the BP
override function when detect blood after connect patient.
 Number of OVERRIDE rotations at Rinse of Dialyzer
By activation and setting the Blood Pump (BP) override function, it is possible to use the BP
override function when detect blood after connect patient.
NOTE)
The OVERRIDE at RINSE of Diayzer setting is different from OVERRIDE (at RETRANS).
O
1. Log in to the Technician or Maker mode.
2. Press MENU button and select TECHNICIAN tab.
3.
N
Press OPTION – SOFTWARE OPTION to open the SOFTWARE OPTION setting
R
screen.
4. Set the number of rotation limit to OVERRIDE COUNT AT RINSE OF DIALYZER.
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R
CAUTION
Please determine the number of OVERRIDE rotation limit based on length of blood circuit from
Venous Clamp to Venous needle.
If set it excessive, may occure outflow of the patient blood.
U
 Dialyzer rinse time and UF setting.
1. Press MENU button and select NURSE tab to open the Nurse setting screen.
2. Press TREATMENT  RINSE OF DIALYZER to open the setting screen for the rinse
of dialyzer.
3. Set each items about Rinse of Dialyzer.
NOTE
Need to log in to TECHNICIAN or MAKER mode just for change the “UF RATE LIMIT”.
9-14
(Settings)
Set whether to use the Rinse of Dialyzer function.

RINSE OF
DIALYZER In case of setting to “UNUSE”, move the process to END OF
DIALYZER RINSE after dialyzer filling.
O
RINSE TIME Dialyzer rinse time setting.
N
UF value at Rinse of Dialyzer process.
R
UF GOAL In case of setting to “0 (L)”, only pass flow the dialysate into
Q
dialyzer.
TE
SO Y
Indication about UF rate at RINSE OF DIALYZER process.

IN
R
This is caliculated based on RINSE TIME SETTING and UF

UF RATE GOAL.
When this value is over the “UF RATE LIMIT”, the letter color
become to red.
UF RATE LIMIT Limitation of UF RATE setting.

U
Set whether to activate the function of Blood leak detection at

ALARM OF RINSE OF DIALYZER process.
BLOOD LEAK
This item is same as in Blood leak alarm setting screen.
9-15
9.8. Changing a PASS I.D.
This system has the factory default PASS I.D. when being shipped. After installing the system,
ensure to change the PASS I.D. by referring to Chapter 14. TECHNICIAN Mode and MAKER
Mode.
DANGER
In TECHNICIAN and MAKER modes, a wrong setting can cause machine malfunction as well as
significant damage in the patient. Be sure to change the PASS I.D. after installing the machine.
Manage the PASS I.D. under strict conditions.
9.9. Verifying operation after installation

When machine installation is complete, operate the system in the following mode to verify normal
operation.
1. Operate the system in WATER RINSE for 30 min and verify the following:
・Drainage flows continuously out of the DRAIN.
O
・The process completes without errors. N
R
2. Connecting to the dialysate solutions, operate the system in PREPARATION for
approximately 30 min. Verify the following:
Q
TE
・The temperature of the prepared dialysate is ±0.5 °C of the preset temperature.

SO Y
・The concentration of the prepared dialysate is ±0.3 mS/cm of the preset

IN
concentration.
R
・The process completes without errors.
DANGER
Please rinse and disinfect the machine enough when all installation procedure complete.
U
9-16
9.10. Disposal of Machine
Following matters should be concerned when disposing the machine. Keep the following
matters in mind and dispose the machine properly in accordance with the local regulation
in your area.
9.10.1.Disposal of main machine

The primary materials composing the machine are electric circuit boards, harness, resins
in rubber, exterior, etc., stainless/steel frames, and ceramics. Dispose these parts as
industrial wastes or in accordance with the local regulation when applicable.
9.10.2.Disposal of LCD display

A fluorescent electrode tube is used in the LCD display. Dispose the display after
checking if a disposal method is specified in your area.
9.10.3. Disposal of backup battery
O
The backup battery used in case of power failure is equipped as an option of this machine.
It is a lead storage battery. Process the backup battery in accordance with the local
N
regulation in your area.
R
Be sure to follow the following points when disposing the battery:
1. Do not throw the battery into fire or apply heat, as it may result in battery leakage, fire
Q
TE
disaster, or explosion.
SO Y
2. Electric energy yet remains in a used battery. Insulate a used battery to avoid
IN
R
interelectrode contact by taping battery terminals, harnesses, etc.

3. Do not apply strong impact on the battery by throwing or dropping.
4. Never disassemble the battery because the battery contains dilute sulfuric acid.
U
DANGER
If a battery damage result in leakage and electrolytic solution spills on skin or clothes, flush with
plenty of water without delay. If the spilled electrolytic solution contacts the eye, flush with plenty
of water and receive treatment from a doctor immediately. Dilute sulfuric acid can cause loss of
sight and skin burn.
9-17
10 FLOWCHART
10.1. Dialysate Flow Chart (TYPE0)
Note) This flowchart is applicable to the models with serial No. A0001* to No. A0207*
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
10-1
Symbol Name Symbol Name
PR1 Pressure regulator FL6 Filter 6
V1 Water inlet solenoid valve V52 Disinfectant solenoid valve (OP)
HEX Heat exchanger FL7 Filter 7 (OP)
T5 Temperature sensor 5 FS1 Flow switch 1
T6 Temperature sensor 6 CHa Chamber A
TS1 Thermostat CHb Chamber B

CHa solenoid valve for filling fresh
BT Heater Tank V21
dialysate solenoid valve
CHa solenoid valve for supplying
H Heater V22
fresh dialysate solenoid valve
CHb solenoid valve for filling fresh
OL3 Orifice 3 V23
CHb solenoid valve for supplying
BT1 Deaeration buffer tank V24
O
CHa solenoid valve for discharging
P1 Deaeration pump V25
N drain solenoid valve
CHa solenoid valve for filling drain
AS1 Deaeration tank V26
R
solenoid valve
CHb solenoid valve for discharging
Q
TE
RV1 Relief valve 1 V27

drain solenoid valve
SO Y
CHb solenoid valve for filling drain

V16 Water inlet solenoid valve V28
solenoid valve
IN
R
V11 Water inlet solenoid valve FS2 Flow switch 2
BT2 Mixing tank T1 Dialysate temperature sensor

Temperature sensor for B
T2 CD1 Dialysate conductivity sensor
concentrate
U
Temperature sensor for B

T4 T3 Dialysate temperature sensor
concentrate
Conductivity sensor for B
CD2 CD3 Dialysate conductivity sensor
concentrate
Conductivity sensor for B
CD4 V31 Bypass solenoid valve
concentrate
BT3 Mixing tank OL1 Orifice 1
P4 B concentrate pump PG3 Dialysate pressure sensor
FL3 Filter 3 ETRF Endotoxin retentive filter (OP)
P5 A concentrate pump V32 Dialysate supply solenoid valve
FL4 Filter 4 C1 Check valve
V13 B drain solenoid valve V51 Disinfectant solenoid valve
V15 A drain solenoid valve P2 Dialysate pump
10-2
RV2 Relief valve 2 PG4a Arterial pressure sensor 1
AS2 Air separator tank TPFL1a Filter 1a
FW Float switch BP1 Blood pump
OL2 Orifice 2 HP Syringe pump

Blood chamber level adjustment
V41 Air separator solenoid valve P6
pump
BLD Blood leak detector V72 Level adjustment solenoid valve
P3 UF pump TPFL2 Filter 2
V2 Re-circulation solenoid valve PG5 Venous pressure sensor
OL5 Orifice 5 ABD Air bubble detector
OL4 Orifice 4 BD Blood detector
O
V42 Pressure exhaust solenoid valve CL2 Venous clamp
N Level adjustment solenoid valve
RV3 Relief valve 3 V73
(OP)
R
Level adjustment solenoid valve
V4 Drain solenoid valve V71
(OP)
Q
TE
Dialyzer inlet pressure sensor

SL Sample port PG4b
(OP)
SO Y
IN
V33 Dialysate return solenoid valve TPFL1b Filter 1b (OP)

R
V3 3-way Solenoid valve (OP)
V34 Powder Exhaust valve (OP)
V35 Drain valve (OP)

U
C13 Check valve (OP)
TPFL8 Filter 8 (OP)
FL1 Filter 1 (OP)
FL2 Filter 2 (OP)
NOTE : (OP)・・・・Options
10-3
10.2. Dialysate Flow Chart (TYPE 1)
Note) This flowchart is applicable to the models with serial No. A0208* or later.
Central System option is applicable to the models with serial No. J8702* or later.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
10-4
B / A2 2nd Central solenoid valve
PR1 Pressure regulator V12
(OP)
V1 Water inlet solenoid valve V17 B / A2 1st Central solenoid valve (OP)
HEX Heat exchanger V14 Intercept solenoid valve (OP)
A / A1 2nd Central solenoid valve
T6 Temperature sensor 6 V18
(OP)
TS1 Thermostat V19 A / A1 1st Central solenoid valve (OP)
BT Heater Tank V15 A drain solenoid valve
H Heater V52 Disinfectant solenoid valve (OP)
OL3 Orifice 3 FL7 Filter 7 (OP)
BT1 Deaeration buffer tank BT3 Buffer tank
P1 Deaeration pump FS1 Flow switch 1
O
AS1 Deaeration tank CHa NChamber A
RV1 Relief valve 1 CHb Chamber B
R
CHa solenoid valve for filling fresh
Q

TE

CHa solenoid valve for supplying
SO Y

IN
R
CHb solenoid valve for filling fresh

BT2 Mixing tank V23
Temperature sensor for B CHb solenoid valve for supplying
T2 V24
concentrate fresh dialysate solenoid valve
Conductivity sensor for B CHa solenoid valve for discharging
CD2 V25
concentrate drain solenoid valve
U
Temperature sensor for B CHa solenoid valve for filling drain

T4 V26
concentrate solenoid valve
Conductivity sensor for B CHb solenoid valve for discharging
CD4 V27
concentrate drain solenoid valve
CHb solenoid valve for filling drain
P4 B concentrate pump V28
solenoid valve
FL3 Filter 3 FS2 Flow switch 2
P5 A concentrate pump T3 Dialysate temperature sensor
FL4 Filter 4 CD3 Dialysate conductivity sensor
V13 B drain solenoid valve T1 Dialysate temperature sensor
V31 Bypass solenoid valve CD1 Dialysate conductivity sensor
V32 Dialysate supply solenoid valve ETRF ETRF retentive filter (OP)
V51 Disinfectant solenoid valve C1 Check valve
FL6 Filter 6 SL Sample port
10-5
FW Float switch PG4a Arterial pressure sensor 1

V41 Air separator solenoid valve TPFL1a Filter 1a
Pressure exhaust solenoid
V42 V71 Level adjustment solenoid valve (OP)
valve
BLD Blood leak detector BP1 Blood pump
P3 UF pump HP Syringe pump
PG3 Dialysate pressure sensor TPFL1b Filter1 (OP)
P2 Dialysate pump PG4b Dialyzer inlet pressure sensor (OP)

V2 Re-circulation solenoid valve V73 Level adjustment solenoid valve (OP)
V4 Drain solenoid valve TPFL4 Filter 4
Blood chamber level adjustment
V3 3-way Solenoid valve (OP) P6
pump
O
V34 Powder Exhaust valve (OP) V72 Level adjustment solenoid valve
V35 Drain valve (OP) TPFL2 NFilter 2
R
C13 Check valve (OP) PG5 Venous pressure sensor
Q
TE
TPFL8 Filter 8 (OP) ABD Air bubble detector

SO Y
FL1 Filter 1 (OP) BD Blood detector

IN
R
FL2 Filter 2 (OP) CL2 Venous clamp

V33 Dialysate return solenoid valve
AS2 Air separator tank
U
RV2 Relief valve 2
NOTE: (OP)・・・・Options
NOTE: Some TYPE 1model have ‘Orifice 2’ and ‘Orifice 4’ in the dialysate flow chart.
Serial No. of these models can confirm in the table below.
Model Type Serial No.

A0208* – A0389*, A0391*
Orifice model B0392* – B0402*, B0458*, B0541*,
A0422* – A0425*, A0512*, A0513*
No Orifice
Other than Type 1 models those above
model
10-6
11 Replacement of Parts
11.1. Replacement Parts List for Maintenance
(Replacement interval: A: Annually, B: Every 2 years, C: Every 4 years, D: At failure)
WARNING
Out warranty does not apply to every damage, failure, negative effect etc., if things other
than the parts which we present are used.

Replacement
Item No. / STD. Interval
Assembly Description Remarks
and Symbol
A B C D
PR1 Pressure regulator ●
Supply / Drainage
HEX ASS’Y ●
part
T different diameter joint ●
AS1 ASS’Y ●
Deaeration tank
O ring ●
AS2 ASS’Y ●
O
Packing ●
Air separator tank
O ring N ●
Float switch ●
R
ASS’Y ●
Mixing Chamber
O ring ●
Q
TE
T1－4(type1) ASS’Y ●
SO Y
Pt 100 probe ● For Type 1 DIAMAX.

IN
O ring ●
R
T1－4(type2) ASS’Y ●
Thermistor with holder For Type 2 or 3
●
Temperature sensor lid DIAMAX.
O ring ●
T5, 6 ASS’Y ●
T5 is not equipped
U
Thermistor with holder

● since 04A0208E Only
lid
T6 is OK
O ring ●
CD1-4 ASS’Y ●
Conductivity sensor
O ring ●
H Heater Assy ●
Heater
O ring ●
Chamber unit Cha/CHb ASS’Y ●
FS1-2 Flow switch ●
Flow Switch
O ring ●
PG3 (type1) ASS’Y ●
Dialysate press. O ring ●
Sensor PG3 (type2) ASS’Y ●
O ring ●
Filters (liquid flow
Filter FL3, 4,6 ●
sections)
Deaeration pump P1 Gear pump ●
Dialysate pump P2 Gear pump ●
P1/P2 Pump head ●
11-1
Replacement
Item No. / STD. Interval
Assembly Description Remarks
and Symbol
A B C D
Hicera pump
UFP ●
(Piston pump)
UF pump Annually or Every
Lip seal ●
3500 hours
Back Sheet ● Replace with Lip seal
Hicera pump
P4 ●
(Piston pump)
Annually or Every
Lip seal ●
3500 hours
Concentrate pump Hicera pump
P5 ●
(Piston pump)
Annually or Every
Lip seal ●
3500 hours
Back Sheet ● Replace with Lip seal
V51/V52 excluded.
V 2-way solenoid valve ● Annually or Every a
million times
(V52 is option)
Valves 2-way solenoid valve
V51/V52 ● Annually or Every a
(Disinfectant port)
O
million times
CV Check valve N ●
RV1-3 Relief valve ●
R
Blood leak detector BLD Blood leak detector unit ●
Coupler (blue) ●
Q
TE
Coupler Coupler (red) ●

SO Y
Check valve(※) ● Duck bill type

IN
●
R
SL Sample port
Sample Port
Packing ●
A conc. Nozzle ASS’Y ●
O ring ●
Concentrate nozzle
B conc. Nozzle ASS’Y ●
O ring ●
U
Silicon tube ● Disinfectant line

Piping part Excluding disinfectant
Silicon tube ●
line
BP ASS’Y ●
Blood pump
Roller Assy ●
Clamp part CL ASS’Y ●
Blood sensor BD ASS’Y ●
Air bubble detector ABD ASS’Y ●
HP ASS’Y ●
Syringe pump
Half nut ●
※) If you don’t use HOT RINSE Program usually, you can replace only in a failure.
If the machine has TYPE 2 Dialyzer coupler holder, there is no Check valve inside of
coupler (Ref. Chapter 11.4.17)
11-2
Item No. / STD. Replacement Interval Remarks
Name Item Name
and Symbol A B C D
Control P.C. board ●
Backup button battery ●
Monitor P.C. board ●
Driver P.C. board ●
Mother P.C. board ●
LCD display P.C. board ●
LED LAMP P.C. board ●
Connector P.C. board ●
LCD connector
●
conversion P.C. board
Pump driver P.C. board ●
Conductivity sensor P.C.

Electrical equipment ●
board
O
(P.C. board)
Dialysate pressure
●
sensor P.C. boardN
Blood pressure sensor
●
R
P.C. board
Q
Sound volume P.C.

TE
●
board
SO Y
Level adjustment switch

●
IN
P.C. board
R
UFP Encoder P.C.

●
board
Air bubble detector P.C.
●
board
Inverter P.C. board ●
U
Syringe pump encorder

●
P.C board
Membrane switch seat ●
Touch panel ●
Liquid crystal display ●
Power supply ●
Electrical equipment
(Excluding P.C. Battery ●
board) Cooling fan ●
Hour meter ●
Level adjustment pump ●
Micro switch ●
Others TPFL TP Filter ●
11-3
11.2. Maintenance of Each Part
11.2.1. Maintenance of bottom part of machine
Service the dialysate line and the rear part of the front door in the following procedures.
11.2.1.1 Method to open the front door and draw out the dialysate line
1. Insert an Allen wrench (8mm) to the hole on the right

side of the front door and turn it in the arrow direction
shown in the right figure.
2. Open the front door.
O
N
R
3. Press the buttons at two latches at
Q
TE
Section A in the left figure simultaneously

to release them.
SO Y
IN
Machines of Serial No. from J9022* to

R
J9033* and J9239* or later have two fixing

brackets at latches at Section A. When
draw out the dialysate line for the first time
only, loosen screws that are located on
the brackets, slides them to inside and
refix the brackets with screws.
U
State of bracket of dialysate line (right side)
Lock Unlock
4. Draw out the dialysate line forward.
11-4
11.2.1.2 Method to remove the backside cover of the dialysate line section
1. Unscrew the 8 screws placed in the

right figure using the Phillips
screwdriver.
2. Disconnect the connector of the fan

mounted at the backside cover of the
dialysate line section.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
11-5
11.2.2. Method to remove the backside cover of the power supply section
1. Unscrew the 7 screws placed in the right

figure.
O
N
R
2. Remove the backside cover at
the power supply section by
Q
TE
carefully sliding it in the arrow

direction so as not to damage
SO Y
the wiring for the color lamp.

IN
R
The earth cable and the

harnesses of the each
component are connected to the
backside cover.
Turn over the backside panel so
as not to damage the power
U
cable and disconnect the

connector of the fan and then
remove the earth cable.
NOTE）This type of Rear cover is equipped

the models with serial No.A0208* or later.
NOTE）This type of Rear cover is equipped

the models with serial No.A0001* ～
No.A0207*
11-6
11.2.3. Method to remove the rear cover at the operating panel
1. Lean the operation panel forward.

Some models are limited tilt angle.
If operation panel could not lean enough,
remove the stopper metals (Part B in the
right figure) mounted at the hinges on
both the right and left sides with the
Phillips screwdriver.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R
2. Unscrew the 6 screws placed in

the right figure to remove the
rear cover of the operating
panel.
U
11-7
11.3. Distinction about types of DIAMAX
 Meaning of Serial No.
There are two types of notation system, as shown below.
“06 A 0001 E” or “A 0001 E”

1
2
3
4
Description Remarks
O
Year of N
1 ‘06’ means manufactured in 2006.
manufacture
R
230V A
No compliance to EMC
Q
TE
110V B
2 Voltage Type
SO Y
230V C, G or J:
IN
R
Compliance to EMC
110V D, H or K:
3 Identification number Four or five digit number
4 Language Type E: English S: Spanish P: Portuguese
U
NOTE
There is a case which some machines does not have “Year of manufacture” depend on
countries or area.
NOTE
The Serial No. will be shown by “Voltage Type” and “Identification number.
And the Language Type (E, S and P) is denoted by an asterisk in this manual.
Serial No.: A 0001*
11-8
TYPE 1 TYPE 2
Serial No.: A0001* - A0207* Serial No.: A0208*
– A(or B) 0609*
Big size Power Supply Unit
(Type 1) Small size Power Supply Unit
(Manufactured by Techno Electric.) (Type 2)
(Manufactured by Voltex.)
O
N
Two Terminals for Heater
(L, N)
R
11-9
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
TYPE 3
Serial No.: C0001*

R TYPE 4, 5 and 6
TYPE4 : Serial No.:

- C(or D) 8301* G8302* - G(or H)8701*
TYPE5 : Serial No.:
U
J8702* - J(or K)10178*
SSR – Box
TYPE6: Serial No,:
EMC Shield Cover J(or K) 10179* or later
Small size Power Supply Unit

Small size Power Supply Unit built - in SSR
(Type 3) (Type 4)
(Manufactured by Voltex.) (Manufactured by Voltex.)
Two Terminals for Heater Four Terminals for Heater

Table 1: Distinction matter of Machines
TYPE 1 TYPE 2 TYPE 3 TYPE 4 TYPE 5 & 6
Item
(Big size PS) (Small size PS) (With SSR-Box) (Built - in SSR) (Built - in SSR)
A0208* – C0001* - G8302* - J(or K)8702*
Serial No. A0001* - A(or B)0207* G(or H) 8701* or later
A(or B) 0609* C(or D) 8301*
Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 4 Type 4
Manufactured by Manufactured by Voltex. Manufactured by Voltex. Manufactured by Voltex. Manufactured by Voltex.
Power Supply Unit
Techno Electric. (Small size PS: (Small size PS: (Small size PS: (Small size PS:
(Big size PS) SSR is integrated) SSR is NOT Integrated) SSR is integrated) SSR is integrated)
O
SSR-Box Not Equipped Not Equipped Equipped Not Equipped Not Equipped
Pressure Regulator Type 1 Type 2
N
PR1 (ER884ZB) (PVS / JX-3839C)
R
Temperature Sensor
Type 1 Type 2
Q
TE
T1-4
11-10
(Pt100) (Thermistor)
(See Table 2)
SO Y
Temperature Sensor
IN
Equipped Not Equipped
T5
Deaeration Pump
P1
RVariable pump
Metering pump
(Joint integrated type)
Dialysate Pump (Joint removable type) Variable pump
P2 (Joint integrated type)
U
UF Pump P3 Type 1 Type 2 Type3
(See Table 2) (Separate Bracket) (Integrated Bracket) (Integrated Bracket)
UFP Encoder Type 1 Type 1 Type 2
(See Table 2) Monitoring volume only Monitoring volume only Monitoring volume and rotate direction
Concentration Pump Type 1
Type 2 Type 2 Type 3
P4 (Separate Bracket)
(Integrated Bracket) (Integrated Bracket) (Integrated Bracket)
Concentration Pump Type 1
(P4 is compatible with P5) (P4 is compatible with P5) (P4 is compatible with P5)
P5 (Separate Bracket)
Item
Relief Valve RV3
(Hydraulic Type: Equipped Not Equipped
See Table 2)
Dialyzer Coupler Type 1 Type 1 Type 2
Holder (Vertical type) (Vertical type) (Horizontal Type)
230V: Double Heater
Heater Single Heater Single Heater (750W+750W)
O
(See Table 2) (1500W) (1500W) 110V: Single Heater
(1500W)
N
Heater Tank Type 1 Type 1 Type 2
R
Type 3
Q
Blood Sensor amp Type 1 Type 2 Type 2
TE
11-11
BD (SUNX (Panasonic) FX-D1) (SUNX (Panasonic) FX-301) (SUNX (Panasonic) FX-301) (SUNX (Panasonic) FX101)
SO Y
Blood Leak Detector
IN
BLD
(See Table 2 below)
Pressure Sensor
Type 1
Type 1
R Type 1 Type 2 Type 3
Before or equal A0389*

Type 2
Bracket A0390, A0403-A0421* A0426*-B0457*,
A0391-B0402*, A0422-A0425*, A0459* or later
PG3
U
B0458*
Type 1 (CKD) Type 2 (KYOWA)
Solenoid Two-way
Before or equal A0389*, A0391*-B0402*, A0390*, A0403*-A0421*,
Valve A0426* -A0457*, A0459* or later
A0422*-A0425*, B0458*
Old Type
Blood Pump Cover before or equal A0101*E or later
A0100E.
Type1
A0001* – A0389*, A0391* – B0402* Type2 Type3 Type 4
Syringe Pump A0422* – A0425*, B0458* E(or F)8301* or before G8302* - G(or H) 8701* J8702* or later
A0512* – A0513*, B0541*
Table 2: Software Type Setting List
Item
A0208* – C0001* -
Serial No. A0001* - A0207* G8302E* - G(or H) 8701* J8702* or later
A(or B) 0609* C(or D) 8301*
Type of Setting on Software: Maker - Information – Machine type – Temperature sensor
Temperature
Sensor T1-4 Type 0 Type 1 Type 1 Type 1
Setting on Software: Maker - Information – Machine type – UFP
O
UFP Encoder
Type 1 Type 1 Type 2 Type 2
N
Setting on Software: Maker - Information – Machine type – Hydraulic
R
Q
TE
Hydraulic Type
11-12
Setting on Software: Technician – Rinse – Parameter Setting – Recirculation Rate
SO Y
600 mL /min 1300 mL /min 1300 mL /min 1300 mL /min 1300 mL /min
IN
Heater
R Setting on Software: Maker - Information – Machine type – Heater
230V: Type 2 230V: Type 2 230V: Type 2
Type 1 Type 1
110V: Type 1 110V: Type 1 110V: Type 1
Blood Leak Setting on Software: Maker - Information – Machine type – BLD

U
Detector Type 0 Type 0 Type 1 Type 1
Setting on Software: Maker - Information – Machine type – ABD

Air Bubble Detector Type 1
(G8426* or later)
Setting on Software: Maker - Information – Machine type – Syringe Pump
Syringe Pump
Type0 Type0 Type0 Type1
Table 3: List of P.C. Board and Machine Types
Machine TYPE TYPE 1 TYPE 2 TYPE 3 TYPE 4 TYPE 5 TYPE 6
Control P.C. board BP02-16B BP05-12A/B/E BP05-12E BP05-12G BP05-12G/H
Monitor P.C. board BP02-17B BP02-17C BP05-13A/B/E BP05-13E BP05-13F BP05-13F/G
Driver P.C. board BP02-18B BP05-14A/D BP05-14D BP05-14E
Mother P.C. board BP02-14A BP05-11A/B/C BP05-11C BP05-11D BP05-11D/E
LCD display P.C. board BP02-15A/B/C BP02-15D/F/H BP02-15H BP02-15J1
O
LED LAMP P.C. board BP01-25 /25A BP01-25A
N
Connector P.C. board BP02-31B/C BP02-31D/E BP02-31F BP02-31F/G
R
LCD connector conversion P.C. board BP02-30A (See NOTE below) BP02-30A/A1/A2
Q
TE
Pump driver P.C. board BP03-10A/B BP03-10B/D BP03-10E
11-13
SO Y
Conductivity sensor P.C. board BP03-16/16A/16B BP03-16B/16D BP03-16D
IN
Dialysate pressure sensor P.C. board
Blood pressure sensor P.C. board R
BP03-01A/B
BP01-19B/C
BP03-01C/D BP03-01D
BP01-19C
Sound volume P.C. board BP01-24
BP01-50B BP01-50B
Level adjustment switch P.C. board
U
(White Key top) (Gray Key top)
26SD-520A
Air bubble detector P.C. board 23SD-543 26SD-520A 35SD-513A
35SD-513A
CXA-P1212B-WJL
Inverter P.C. board CXA-P1212B-WJL CXA-P1212E-WJL ALD-310012PJ125
ALD-310012PJ125
UFP Encoder board BP05-34 /34A BP05-34A
Syringe Pump Encorder P.C. board BP13-11
NOTE: P.C. board “BP02-30A1/A2” have different connectors from BP02-30A. Replacing this P.C. board from 30A to 30A1/A2,
please replace not only P.C. board but also the cable at a time.
Table 4：Compatibility for Different Version of P.C.B
Print Circuit Board (P.C.B) Machine Type
Description (Ref chapter) Ref. chapter Identification No. Order cord 1 2 3 4 5 6
LED LAMP P.C board 13.13 BP-01-25A 0-402-081 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
BP02-30A 0-402-078 ○ ○ ○
LCD connector conversion
13.15 BP02-30A1 0-402-186 △ △ △
P.C. board
BP02-30A2 0-402-187 △ △ △
Sound volume P.C. board 13.12 BP01-24 0-402-057 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
BP03-10A/B/D 0-402-073 ○ ○ ○
O
Pump Driver P.C. board 13.17
BP03-10E 0-402-200 ○ ○ ○
N
BP03-01A/B/C See chapter △ △ △ △ △ △
Dialysate Press. Sensor P.C. board 13.9
R
BP03-01D 13.9. △ △ ○ ○ ○ ○
Blood Press. Sensor P.C. board 13.8 BP01-19B/C 0-402-068 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Q
TE
11-14
23SD-543 ○ ○ △ △ △ △
SO Y
26SD-520A (with Q4) ○ ○ △ △ △ △
IN
0-402-070
Air Bubble detector P.C. board 13.11
R 26SD-520A
(without Q4)
35SD-513A 0-402-201
○
△
○
△
○
△
△
△
△
○
△
○
BP01-50B
0-402-069 ○ ○
(Keytop: white)
U
Level Adjustment Switch P.C. board 13.14
BP01-50B
0-402-147 ○ ○ ○ ○
(Keytop: Gray)
BP02-31B ○ ○ ○
BP02-31C /D 0-402-148 ○ ○ ○
Connector P.C. board 13.16 BP02-31E ○ ○ ○
BP02-31F 0-402-202 ○ ○ △
BP02-31G (*1) 0-402-240 △ △ ○
Description (Ref. chapter) Ref. chapter Identification No. Order cord 1 2 3 4 5 6
BP03-16
(BD-SECM01D) ○ ○
Conductivity sensor P.C. board 13.10 BP03-16A 0-402-149
BP03-16B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
BP03-16D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
BP02-15A/B/C 0-402-077 ○ ○
○ ○ △
O
BP02-15D
0-402-150
BP02-15F ○ ○ △
N
LCD display P.C. board 13.3
BP02-15H 0-402-195 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
R
BP02-15J1 △ △ ○
Q
TE
BP02-15J2 0-402-236 △ △ △ △ △ ○
11-15
BP02-14A 0-402-154 ○ ○
SO Y
○ ○
IN
BP05-11A /B/C 0-402-146
Mother P.C. board 13.7
R BP05-11D
BP05-11E (*1)
0-402-215
0-402-239
○
○
○
○
BP02-16B 0-402-060 ○ ○
BP05-12A/B ○ ○ ○ ○
0-402-151
U
Control P.C. board 13.4 BP05-12E △ △ △ ○
BP05-12G 0-402-216 △ △
BP05-12H (*1) 0-402-237 △ △
BP02-17B 0-402-061 ○
BP02-17C 0-402-064 ○
BP05-13A/B ○ ○ ○
Monitor P.C. board 13.5 0-402-152
BP05-13E △ △ ○
BP05-13F 0-402-217 △ △
BP05-13G (*1) 0-402-238 △ △
Description Ref. chapter Identification No. Order cord 1 2 3 4 5 6
BP02-18B ○ ○
0-402-153
BP05-14A (JP7 Short) ○ ○
Driver P.C. board 13.6 BP05-14A (JP7 Open) ○ ○
0-402-141
BP05-14D △ △ △ ○
BP05-14E 0-402-218 ○ ○
CXA-P1212B-WJL ○ ○ △
0-402-076
Inverter P.C. board 13.18 CXA-P1212E-WJL ○ ○ △
O
ALD-310012PJ125 0-402-194 △ ○ ○
N
UFP Encoder board 13.19 BP05-34/34A 0-402-084 ○ ○ ○ ○
R
Syringe Pump Encoder P.C. board 13.20 BP13-11 0-402-219 ○ ○
Q
TE
11-16
NOTE) The parts with hatched are no longer available. For the inventry information, please contact us.
SO Y
IN
NOTE
R
BP05-12H (Control) and BP05-13G(Monitor) can not be used in combination with previous P.C. Boards.
Check the Identification No. of P.C. board before maintenance.
NOTE
U
The Board have (*1) marked is designed to use by central delivery system option.
NOTE: Figures on the table show condition of compatibility of the machine type.
○ : Compatible
△ : Interact by exchanging some parts or changing the software setting. See each chapter and follow the procedure.
／ : Not compatible
When change P. C. B, check the machine type and P. C. B identification No. For more detail, refer to each chapter.
11.4. The Parts – Parts List and Replacement Procedure
NOTE
The standards and materials described in the table below are based on JIS standard.
11.4.1. Pressure Regulator (PR)

11.4.1.1 Pressure Regulator (Type 1)
NOTE）This type of Pressure Regulator is equipped the models with equal or before serial No.A0207*
O
Standard NIPRO order
No. Description Remarks
/MaterialN Code No.
Compatible with
Pressure Regulator Assy
R
Type2 (0-401-001)
1 Pressure Regulator body ER884ZB
Q
TE
2 Joint (Hose port) PSU

SO Y
3 Nut Stainless Steel 0-401- 004

IN
R
4 PR bracket Stainless Steel
NOTE）The parts with hatched on the list above constitute as an assembly, and cannot be
purchased separately.
U
11.4.1.2 Pressure regulator (Type 2): Non adjustment type

NOTE）This type of Pressure Regulator is equipped the models with serial No.A0208* or later.

/Material Code No.
Pressure Regulator Compatible with
1 PVS/JX-3839C 0-401- 001
Assy Type 1
11-17
11.4.2. Heat exchanger (HEX)
TYPE1
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R
TYPE2 (Half)
U

/Material Code No.
Heat exchanger Assy
0-401- 006 For Type 1 – 4 machine
(Type 1)
Heart exchanger Assy For Type5 machine or
0-401- 319
(Type 2) later
1 T different diameter joint Silicone rubber 0-401- 007
2 Double tube Stainless Steel 0-401- 008
3 Double tube (Half) Stainless Steel 0-401- 320
NOTE) They are not physically compatible.
11-18
11.4.3. Deaeration Buffer tank（AS1）
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R
Type 1 Type 2

No. Description Code No.
Remarks
/Material
Deaeration tank Assy 0-401- 009 Type2
1 Hex. nut M4 0-401- 010
U
2 Upper tank PSU 0-401- 011

Equipped with after or
3 Spacer 4EP 0-401- 012
equal B0218*.
PP
4 Float (for Type1) 0-401- 013
Stainless Steel
G50 silicone
5 O ring 0-401- 014
rubber
Equipped with after or
6 Large Spacer PPS 0-401- 015
equal B0218*.
7 Lower tank PSU 0-401- 016
Cross recessed head Equipped with after or
8 P3 M4×30 0-401- 018
pan screw equal B0218*.
PP
9 Float (for Type2) 0-401- 293
Stainless Steel
Cross recessed head
10 P3 M4×15 0-401- 017
pan screw
NOTE) Type1 AS1 has already out of production. Please select Type2 for use.
The parts with hatched are out of production, while supplies last.
11-19
11.4.4. Air separator tank（AS2）
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R

Remarks
/Material
U
Air separator Assy 0-401- 019

1 Hex. nut M6 0-401- 020 Float switch accessory
2 Hex. nut M4 0-401- 010
3 Upper tank PSU 0-401- 021
4 Hex. nut M6 0-401- 020 Float switch accessory
5 Packing Silicone rubber 0-401- 022
6 Float switch OLV-5S 0-401- 023
G50 silicone
7 O ring 0-401- 014
rubber
Cross recessed P3 M4×15
9 0-401- 017
head pan screw Stainless Steel
11-20
11.4.5. Deaeration chamber (BT1)
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R

Remarks
/Material
U
Deaeration
0-401- 024
chamber Assy
1 Chamber bracket Stainless Steel 0-401- 025
Cross recessed
3 P3 M4×15 0-401- 017
head pan screw
G50 silicone
4 O ring 0-401- 014
rubber
5 Tank cap Stainless Steel 0-401- 026
11-21
11.4.6. Temperature sensor（T1 to 4）
11.4.6.1 Temperature sensor（T1 to 4）（Type 1:Pt 100Ω）
NOTE
Monitor PCB (Slot 3: CPU2 board) version should be BP02-17A or B type (it is equipped with
serial No before or equal A0207*). Not compatible with BP02-17C or later version that is for
Thermistor types (it is equipped with equal or after A0208*)
NOTE
Software setting of temperature sensor that “Maker”>”Machine type”>”Temperature sensor”
should be selected “0”. “1” is for Thermistor type.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R

/Material Code No.
Temperature sensor Pt
Pt100 0-401- 027
100 type Assy
Cross recessed head Stainless Steel

1 0-401- 028
pan screw P3 M3×10
Thermo sensor holder
2 Stainless Steel 0-401- 029
lid
3 Pt 100 probe Pt100 0-401- 030
4 O ring P5 silicone rubber 0-401- 031
5 Thermo sensor holder PSU 0-401- 032
NOTE) The parts with hatched are out of production, while supplies last.
11-22
11.4.6.2 Temperature sensor（T1 to 4）（Type 2:Thermistor）
NOTE
Monitor PCB (Slot 3: CPU2 board) version should be equal or after BP02-17C (This PCB is
equipped the model with serial No. A0208* or later.). Not compatible with BP02-17A or B type
that is for Pt 100 sensor types (it is equipped with serial No. before or equal A0207*)
NOTE
Software setting of temperature sensor that “Maker”>”Machine type”>”Temperature sensor”
should be selected “1”. “0” is for Pt 100 type.
CAUTION
This thermistor does not compatible with Pt 100 type sensor.
This thermistor does not compatible with T5/6 thermistor.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R

/Material Code No.
Temperature sensor
Thermistor (T1 to T4) 0-401- 033
Assy
1 and 2 constitute
1 Thermistor holder lid PSU 0-401- 034
anassembly
1 and 2 constitute an
2 Thermistor EP5G503E2 0-401- 034
assembly
4 Thermistor holder PSU 0-401- 036
NOTE）Since the parts with hatched “No.” on the list above constitute as an assembly, each part
cannot be purchased separately.
11-23
11.4.6.3 Temperature sensor（T5/6）
NOTE
T5 is not equipped the models with serial No.A0208* or later.
CAUTION
This temperature sensor does not compatible with T1 to T4 temperature sensor.
CAUTION
This sensor (Thermistor type) does not compatible with Pt 100 type sensor.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R

/Material Code No.
Thermistor
0-401- 037
(T5 or T6) Assy
1 and 2 constitute as
1 Thermistor holder lid PSU 0-401- 038
an assembly
2 Thermistor EP5H852LT 0-401- 038
an assembly
P3 silicone
3 O ring 0-401- 035
rubber
4 Thermistor holder PSU 0-401- 036
11-24
11.4.7. Conductivity sensor (CD 1 to 4)
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y

IN
/Material Code No.

R
Conductivity
0-401- 039
sensor Assy
1 Case A PSU 0-401- 040
AS568-104 silicone
2 O ring 0-401- 041
rubber
U
3 Electrode Stainless Steel 0-401- 042

Cross recessed Stainless Steel
4 0-401- 043
head pan screw P3 M3×8
11-25
11.4.8. Heater and heater tank
Type 2 Heater Tank
Type 1 Heater Tank
O
N
NOTE
R
Type 2 Heater Tank is equipped the models with serial No.C0001* or later.
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R
CAUTION
Do not use Type1 Heater tank in the models with serial No.C0001* or later.

/Material Code No.
U
Type0: Single Heater

0-401- 294
For TYPE1 machine
0-401- 232
For TYPE2 machine
For 230V
Type2: Double Heater
0-401- 233
For TYPE3 machine
0-401- 304 For Type 4 or later
Heater Assy machine
Type1
0-401- 251
For TYPE2 machine
Type2
For 110V 0-401- 234
For TYPE3 machine
Type3
0-401- 310 For TYPE4 or later
machine
11-26
/Material Code No.
Type1
- -
Compatible with Type 2
1 Heater tank Stainless Steel
0-401- 045 Type 2

0-401- 295
For TYPE1 machine
0-401- 046
For TYPE2 machine
For 230V Type2: Double Heater
0-401- 219
For TYPE3 machine
0-401- 311 For TYPE4 or later
2 Cartridge heater
machine
Type1
0-401- 252
For TYPE2 machine
Type2
0-401- 220
For 110V For TYPE3 machine
O
Type3
N0-401- 312 For TYPE4 or later
machine
R
3 O ring JASO 1033 0-401- 047
Q
TE
4 Thermostat 03PNA100 0-401- 048

SO Y

IN
5 0-401- 028
R
hex. head bolt Stainless Steel

6 0-401- 049
head pan screw Stainless Steel
U
NOTE) Three Types of 110V Cartridge Heater have difference of harness length.
Harness length of Type1 Heater is designed for Small size Power Supply unit (for TYPE2
machine).
Type2 Cartridge Heater (For machine Type3) is be able to use to Machine Type4. But it is too
long for the Type4 machine.
To replace heater unit, please confirm machine TYPE.
Serial No. 110V Model 230V Model

A0001* - A0207*
Single Heater (Type 0)
(TYPE 1)
A0208E –A (or B) 0609* Single Heater (Type 1) Single Heater (Type 1)
(TYPE 2)
C0001S – C(or D)8301* Single Heater (Type 2) Double Heater (Type 2)
(TYPE 3) : Long cable : Long cable
G (H, J or K) 8302* or later Single Heater (Type 3) Double Heater (Type 3)
(TYPE 4 or later) : Short cable : Short cable
11-27
DANGER
Installing different type heater causes a breakdown of machine. To replace heater, confirm
specifications of heater and machine
Reference: Difference of Heater Type
Single Heater
110V Type1, 2 and 3
230V Type1
2 Cables
O Chop mark
N (110V or 230V)
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R
Double Heater
230V Type2 and 3
U
4 cables
11-28
11.4.9. Chamber (CHa, CHb)
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R
CHa / CHb Assy
Chamber Assy
U
Assembling direction of diaphragm
11-29
A: CHa/CHb Assy
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
B: CHa/CHb Assy (Type2) NOTE) The casing internal design was

changed (add gap) from middle of
Type 6 machine. These assemblys
have compatibility but casings does
not have compatibility.
11-30
Type 1
/Material Code No.
Chamber Assy 0-401- 050 Above 1 set
A CHa / CHb Assy 0-401- 051 Only half side Assy
1 Chamber packing FKM 0-401- 052
2 Chamber diaphragm FKM 0-401- 053
3 Casing PPS 0-401- 054
4 Hex. Nut M5 Stainless Steel 0-401- 004
5 Plain washer M5 Stainless Steel 0-401- 055
Cross recessed head
6 P3 M5×25 0-401- 056
pan screw
7 Chamber bracket Stainless Steel 0-401- 057
Cross recessed head
8 P3 M5×16 0-401- 058
pan screw
NOTE: Type1 Chamber Assy and CHa / CHb Assy are out of production, while supplies last.
O
Following Assy / Parts are for Type2 chamber.
No. Description
Standard
/Material
N NIPRO order
Code No.
Remarks
R
Chamber Assy
0-401- 349 Above 1 set
Q
TE
(Type2)
CHa / CHb Assy
SO Y
B 0-401- 350 Only half side Assy

(Type2)
IN
R
Chamber diaphragm
9 FKM 0-401- 351
(For Type2)
10 Casing (For Type2) PPS 0-401- 352
U
NOTE
 Identification of Chamber Type
Type1 chamber casing have Be able to distinguish the type by the

reinforcements on the flange part. presence or absence of packings.
Thickness of Type2 casing is uniform.
Type1 Type2 Type1 Type2
11-31
CAUTION
For Type2 parts (Chamber diaphragm and Casing) cannot be used in combination with Type1
parts.
In addition, CHa and CHb Assy need to use with same Assy type.
(Do not use in combination with )
If not, it is probably cause flow / conductivity fluctuation and/or alarms caused by it.
CAUTION
Need to set the Chamber and Line capacity (Hydraulic volume) correctly for accurate flow and
conductivity control, and assured chemical rinse / disinfection.
After change the chamber, initialize of calibration data caused by software version up, be sure to
check and setting the Chamber and Line capacity setting as following method.
1. Log in to “Maker Mode”.

2. Open “Dialysate Pump Calibration” screen by operate in order of “Menu” button ->
“Technician” Tab -> “Calibration” button -> “Dialysate Pump” button.
3. Enter the correctly Chamber capacity in “Capacity” setting column.
O
Chamber type Capacity (mL)
Type1
N223
R
Type2 248
Q
TE
4. Open “Rinse Parameter” screen by operate in order of “Menu” button -> “Techncian” tab ->
SO Y
“Rinse” button -> “Parameter setting” button.

IN
5. Enter the “Default value + 50 (mL)” to “Line Capacity” setting column.

R
Note) The hydraulic value is difference for each machine type and Chamber type.
Chamber: Type1 Chamber: Type2
Machine type ETRF option
Capacity (mL) Capacity (mL)
U
No 1950 2000
Type1 to Type4
Yes 2190 2240
No 1850 1900
Type5 or later
Yes 2090 2140
CAUTION
Please check and calibrate the following after change the chamber Type 1 to Type2.
- Dialysate flow check (15.1.3 Adjustment of closed line pressure (RV2))

- Accuracy check of UF (15.2. UF)
- Dialysate compounding (15.7 Calibration of dialysate)
11-32
11.4.10. Flow switch
Proximity sensor Type Photoelectric sensor Type
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R
Drip proof cover

U
/Material Code No.

Flow SW Assy (Proximity) 0-401- 059
Flow SW Assy
0-401- 315
(Photoelectric)
Include No.6, 8,
Drip proof cover kit 0-401- 342
and 9
1 Flow SW cap PSU 0-401- 060
P14 silicone
2 O ring 0-401- 061
rubber
3 Body of flow SW PSU 0-401- 062
Stainless Steel
4 Steel ball 0-401- 063
5/16
5 Proximity sensor GX18-MLU 0-401- 064 See NOTE 1)
For Photoelectric
6 Sensor bracket Stainless Steel 0-404- 135
sensor
7 Photoelectric sensor EE-SX461P-11 0-401- 305 See NOTE 2)
11-33
/Material Code No.
8 Drip proof cover 1 PVC 0-401- 343
See NOTE 3)
9 Drip proof cover 2 PVC 0-401- 344
NOTE) Proximity sensor type is not able to use for TYPE4 or later machine.
Photoelectric sensor type is not able to use for Type3 or before machine
NOTE 1) See below the dimension of the Proximity sensor.
Dimension of Proximity sensor
O
Assembling (unit: mm)
N
NOTE 2) The harness is not included in Photo sensor. Refer to chapter 11.5.4.2 about the
R
harness. If the harness is required, order the harness (0-402-203).
Q
TE
NOTE 3) Sensor bracket of Flow Switch is changed for Drip proof bracket attachment from Serial
SO Y
No. 10179* or later.

IN
The Drip proof cover 1 and 2 does not use with Before Type bracket.
U R
Before type For Drip proof cover
CAUTION
Be careful to not spatter liquid on the connector of Photo sensor.
NOTE
The FS of Photoelectric sensor type has cover for drip-proof.
Never remove the cover at the time of the maintenance.
11-34
11.4.11. Dialysate pressure sensor (PG3)
11.4.11.1 Dialysate pressure sensor (Type 1)
NOTE) This type 1 is equipped the models with serial No. before or equal A0389*, A0391*-B0402*,
A0422*-A0425*, B0458*. Other machines are equipped with Type2.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y

IN
R
/Material Code No.

Dialysate pressure sensor
0-401- 065
Type 1 Assy
1 Pressure sensor holder PSU 0-401- 066
AS568-012
2 O ring 0-401- 067
silicone rubber
U
3 Transducer 19C030PV3K
an assembly.
Cross recessed head pan
4 P3 M3×8 0-401- 043
screw
5 P3 M3×6 0-401- 068
screw
Pressure sensor P.C. board
cover
Pressure sensor P.C. board
fixing plate
Dialysate pressure sensor 3 and 8 constitute as
8 BP03-01
board an assembly.
9 P3 M3×10 0-401- 028
screw
CAUTION
To touch sensor diaphragm may cause of sensor trouble.
To replace parts, be careful not to touch diaphragm.
11-35
11.4.11.2 Dialysate pressure sensor (Type 2)
O
N
R
Q
/Material Code No.

TE

0-401- 071
SO Y
type 2 Assy
IN
R
1 Pressure sensor holder PSU 0-401- 066

AS568-012
2 O ring silicone rubber 0-401- 067
3 and 7 constitute as an
3 Transducer 19C030PV3K
assembly. See NOTE2
U
4 PCB spacer Nylon 66 0-401- 072

5 P3 M4×8 0-401- 073
screw
6 screw P3 M3×8 0-401- 043
Dialysate pressure sensor 3 and 7 constitute as an
7 BP03-01
board assembly. See NOTE2
PCB cover
NOTE2) There are soldering type and connector type to connect between Dialysate Pressure
P.C.Board and Pressure sensing module. P.C.Board and sensing module have already calibrated in
pairs at manufacture before the shipment of the machine. Connector type can separate sensing
module from P.C.B, but NEVER use with other Pressure P.C.B. It may cause of measuring incorrect
value
CAUTION
To touch sensor diaphragm may cause of sensor trouble.
To replace parts, be careful not to touch diaphragm.
11-36
11.4.12. Blood pressure sensor (PG4a / PG5)
Base Type 1
O
Base Type 2
N
R
Q
TE
PG4a and PG5 sensor units are compatible except the length of tube.
SO Y
Please see table below and confirm the length of the tube.
IN
The 220 mm tube attached to spare parts, please cut it when use it for PG5.
R
Sensor Unit Length of A (mm)

PG4a 220
PG5 40
U

No. Description Code No. Remarks
/Material
Blood pressure
0-401- 184 For PG4a, PG5
sensor Assy
1 pan screw P3 M3×6 0-401- 068
2 Cover 0-401- 227

Cross recessed head Stainless Steel For Type 1
3 0-401- 228
pan screw P4 M3×6 base
Blood pressure
4 BP01-19 B/C 0-402- 068
sensor board
For Type 2
5 PCB stand 0-401- 072
Base
PCB Stand
6 PCB base (Type2) 0-401- 229
Type
Screw fix
7 PCB base (Type1) 0-401- 230
Type
11-37
11.4.13. Mixing tank
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R

Remarks
/Material
Mixing chamber Assy 0-401- 075
1 Tank bracket Stainless Steel 0-401- 076
3 Cross recessed head pan screw P3 M4×15 0-401- 017
G50 silicone
4 O ring 0-401- 014
rubber
5 Tank lid Stainless Steel 0-401- 026
11-38
11.4.14. Gear pump (P1, P2)
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
11-39
/Material Code No.
Magnet Gear pump MDG-R2BA21-51
0-401- 077 See NOTE )
(Variable pump) MDG-R2BA24S-89
Magnet Gear pump
MDG-R2BA24S-88 0-401- 306 See NOTE )
(Metering pump)
Set of No. 9, 10, 13 to
Gear set
0-401- 078 16, 18, 23
(For Variable pump)
See NOTE )
Set of No. 9, 10, 13 to
Gear set
0-401- 307 16, 18, 23
(For Metering pump)
See NOTE )
Pump head Assy Without 1,31
0-401- 079
(For Variable pump) Pump head: No.17
Pump head Assy Without 1,31
0-401- 308
(For Metering pump) Pump head: No.36
1 Motor (For Variable pump) 0-401- 080 See NOTE )
Motor (For Metering pump) 0-401- 313 See NOTE )
2 Magnet retaining ring Stainless Steel 0-401- 081
O
5 Rear casing Stainless steel
N 0-401- 082
6 Magnet can Stainless steel 0-401- 083
R
7 Mounting plate Stainless Steel 0-401- 084
Q
TE
8 Bracket Stainless Steel 0-401- 085

SO Y
Driven gear
9 PEEK
IN
(For Variable pump)

R
Including Gear set

Driven gear for (For Variable pump)
PPS
(For Metering pump)
Idler gear
10 PEEK
(For Variable pump) Including Gear set
(For metering pump)
U
Idler gear
PPS
(For Metering pump)
11 Gear case Stainless Steel 0-401- 086
12 Straight pin Stainless Steel 0-401- 087
13 Front bearing PPS Including Gear set
14 Rear bearing PPS Including Gear set
15 Front plate Stainless Steel Including Gear set
16 Rear plate Stainless Steel Including Gear set
Not include Joint
17 Pump head GFRPPS 0-401- 088
(No.35)
18 Gasket A FKM 0-401- 089
19 Gasket B FKM 0-401- 090
20 Packing B EPDM 0-401- 091
21 Packing C EPDM 0-401- 092
22 Retainer spring Stainless Steel 0-401- 093
23 O ring FKM 0-401- 094
11-40
/Material Code No.
31 Name plate Polyester
32 0-401- 095
machine screw P3 M3×20
33 0-401- 096
machine screw M3×16
34 0-401- 097
machine screw M3×8
35 Joint PSU 0-401- 098 For MDG-R2BA21-51
Pump head
36 GFRPPS 0-401- 309 Compatible with No.17
(joint integrated type)
※) Since the parts with hatched “No.” on the list above constitute as an assembly, each part cannot
be purchased separately.
NOTE) The confirmation of Machine Type, Pump Type and Pump Driver P.C.B are required before
maintenance and replacement.
O
Magnet Gear Pump MDG-R2BA21-51 MDG-R2BA24S-89 MDG-R2BA24S-88
Pump Type N
Variable Metering
R
Joint form Removable Integrated Integrated
Q
TE
Gear material PEEK PPS

SO Y
Connector 4 pins 2 pins

IN
R
BP03-10A ~ D BP03-10E
Pump Driver P.C.B
BP03-10E (P2 only) (P1 only)
Machine
P1 and P2
Type1 ~ 3
Compatibility
Machine
P2 only P1 only
U
Type4 or later
Make sure the Machine Type, Pump type and Pump Driver P.C.B before order the replacement parts
and maintenance.
CAUTION
Please confirm the Model number and order code well, before order and replace the parts.
When the wrong parts were used at the time of maintenance, it becomes a cause of failure or
malfunction.
NOTE
The Driven and Idler Gear are same figuration, so be careful not to confuse them.
The color of PEEK gear is black, and PPS gear is brown.
About disassembling:
It may easier to access from the rear side of the machine. And also better to remove the BT1 from P1.
11-41
Reference: Disassembling and exchanging gear pump and pump-head parts
CAUTION
The gear pump is a precision part. Take special caution not to contaminate with dust or other
contaminant when assembling. In addition, some parts are in similar forms. Avoid confusing
these parts when assembling.
Disassembling procedure
1. Remove 3 cross-recessed head machine screws (33) and take out the pump part from the
motor.
2. Remove 4 cross-recessed head machine screws (32) to remove the pump head.
3. Remove the gasket A (18).
4. Remove the cross-recessed head machine screw (34). Remove the mounting plate (7),
packing B (20), bracket (8), and gasket B (19) from the pump part.
5. Remove the rear casing (5) while keeping the packing C (21) on the rear casing. (Take
precautions, because fluid may still be inside the rear casing.)
O
When removing the rear casing (5), do so while turning the front bearing (13) and rear casing
(5). If the rear bearing (14) remains inside the rear casing (5), hold the shaft of the driven gear
N
(9) and carefully pull it out.
R
Hitch it to Driven gear
6. Remove the magnet retaining ring (2) and the the magnet
Q
TE
retainer spring (22). retaining ring

SO Y
IN
R
Magnet retaining ring

Forceps
U
CAUTION
Remove the magnet retaining ring gradually and carefully. The magnet retaining ring might
distort if it is pulled forcibly.
7. Remove the magnet can (6) from the driven gear (9). Store the removed magnet can in a place
where no iron filings, etc. would be in contact.
8. Disassemble in the order of rear bearing (14), rear plate (16), driven gear (9), idler gear (10),
gear case (11), 2 straight pins (12), front plate (15), and front bearing (13). Handle parts
carefully so that they will not be damaged. Store them where no dust, etc. would fall on.
11-42
Assembly procedure
1. Install the O ring (23) to the front bearing (13) and rear bearing (14). Be sure to apply a thin
layer of silicon grease on the O ring to prevent a leak.
2. Install the straight pins (12), front plate (15), and gear case (11) on the front bearing (13).
When installing the straight pins

(12), insert them so that the side
with a groove is facing the front
bearing (see the figure below).
Bottom of the
screw hole side
Left side: Larger hole Right side: Smaller hole
Straight pins
O
V-shape groove
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
Front bearing
IN
R
CAUTION
Inserting the straight pins inversely would lower the dialysate suction force, and this can result in
U
discharge failure and damage in the pump part. Make sure the direction of straight pins, when
inserting.
11-43
3. Assemble carefully in the order
of driven gear (9), idler gear (10),
rear plate (16), and rear bearing
(14), so that holes in the parts
align. Be sure to insert the driven Bring this hole
gear (9) and idler gear (10) in the on the left side
direction shown in the figure
below.
Face the notch

side up
Face the longer

side down
Driven gear
Front bearing Rear bearing

side side
O
Idler gear
N
R
Q
TE
4. Insert the magnet can (6) into the

driven gear (9) and fix them with the
SO Y
magnet retaining ring (2).

IN
R
Insert the retainer spring (22), rear

casing (5), and packing C (21).
When installing the magnet can,

check if no dust is present around
the circumference in advance.
U
Assemble after aligning the key

and screw slotting.
Key (internal
diameter portion)
Circumference
Circumference portion
Slot portion
11-44
When installing the magnet retaining ring, do so after
Forceps
squeezing it first, as shown in the figure on the right.
Squeeze in advance
Driven gear
Magnet retaining ring
CAUTION
Loose magnet retaining ring might come off. Be sure to squeeze before insertion. (※Insert the
magnet retaining ring firmly onto the groove of the projecting driven gear)
Do not turn the rear casing itself. Assemble the rear casing by pushing in vertically, until the O ring
of the front bearing is fully covered.
O
5. Install the gasket B (19), N
bracket (8), and gasket A (18)
on the front bearing (13). Align
R
the 2 concave and convex
Q
TE
portions of the parts.

SO Y
IN
R
Convex portion
Convex portion
U
Concave portion
Concave portion
11-45
6. Tack the pump head (17) with 4 Face the arrow on
cross-recessed head machine the right side
screws (32). Fix the packing B
(20) and mounting plate (7) with 4
cross-recessed head machine
screws (34).
Concave portion
Use 0.6Nm fixing torque for the Concave portion
cross recessed head machine
screws(34) to tighten. Gasket A
Convex portion Convex portion

(Bracket) (Bracket)
7. Fix the pump head (17) that has
been tacked.
Use 0.8Nm fixing torque for the

cross recessed head machine
screws(32) to tighten.
Tighten gradually and evenly in
the diagonal order shown below. In
O
the end, bring it to the regulation
torque.
N ○ mark indicates
R
a tapped hole
The order of fixing screws (Others are
Q
TE
penetrating holes)
SO Y
Pump head
IN
R
Cross recessed head machine screw

U
CAUTION
When the pump head is installed with higher torque than regulation or only one side is being
tightened, the screw part of the front bearing may be damaged.
8. Install the assembled pump head part to the motor using 3 cross recessed heard machine
screws (33).
Use 0.6 Nm fixing torque for the cross recessed head machine screws (34).
11-46
11.4.15. Piston pump
11.4.15.1 UF pump (P3) (Type1)
NOTE) This type of UF pump is equipped the models with serial No.A0001* to No.A0207*.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
Pump head ASSY
11-47
Remarks
/Material
Compatible with
UF pump Assy
Type2 (0-401-099)
Drive joint and Stepping motor
0-401- 291 Set of No. 4 to 9
Assy
0-401- 101 Set of No. 11 to 15
1 Pump head Assy
0-401- 323 (See NOTE 1.)
2 Pump rack SCS13 or ADC12 0-401- 102
3 Fixing plate with bracket SUS304. 0-401- 103
4 Sphered ball bearing Rod end HB6
5 Sphered ball bearing cap POM
6 Drive joint Aluminum
7 Rotation detection board Aluminum
Compatible with
8 Pump frame Stainless Steel
Type2
9 Stepping motor KT56JM4-009
10 Photo sensor EE-SX672A 0-401- 105
O
11 Plunger N
12 Hex cap nut 0-401- 106
R
13 Back seat 0-401- 107
Q
TE
14 Lip seal 0-401- 108

SO Y
15 Cylinder
IN
R
NOTE 1) Pump head Assy added Disk spring (0-401-323) is compatible with 0-401-101.
U
11-48
11.4.15.2 UF pump (P3) (Type2)
NOTE) This type of UF pump is equipped the models with serial No.A0208* or later.
Type 1 Encoder
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
Pump head ASSY
11-49
NOTE
The models with serial Number C0001* or later equip Type 2 Encoder to monitor rotation and
direction of stepping motor. (Type 1 Encoder monitors rotation only.)
Type 2 Encoder
O
No. Description
N
Remarks
R
/Material Code No.
Q
TE
Compatible with
Type 1(0-401-099)
SO Y
UF pump Assy V-10AMM-P1 0-401- 099 Without encoder

IN
and parts (No.16,

R
17 and 18).
Drive joint and Stepping
0-401- 291 Set of No. 4 to 9
motor Assy
0-401- 101 Set of No. 11 to 15
1 Pump head Assy
U
0-401- 323 (See NOTE 1.)

3 Fixing plate with bracket Stainless Steel 0-401- 103
10 Photo sensor EE-SX672A 0-401- 105 Type 1
11 Plunger
12 Hex cap nut 0-401- 106
13 Back seat 0-401- 107
14 Lip seal 0-401- 108
15 Cylinder
11-50
/Material Code No.
16 Cover Stainless Steel 0-401- 221
17 Spacer EP-8 0-401- 204
18 UFP Encoder P. C.board BP05-34 0-402- 084 Type 2
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
11-51
11.4.15.3 UF pump (P3) (Type3)
NOTE）This type of UF pump is equipped the models with serial No. serial No.J8712* or later.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
Pump head ASSY (Type3)
11-52
/Material Code No.
Without encoder
UF pump Assy (Type 3) V-10AFP06-XP-51 0-401- 321 and parts (No.10,
11 and 12).
0-401- 322 Set of No. 4 to 9
motor Assy (Type 3)
1 Pump head Assy (Type 3) 0-401- 323 Set of No. 13 to 18
9 Stepping motor A23KMK241B
10 UFP Encoder P. C.board BP05-34* 0-402- 084 Type2
O
11 Cover Stainless Steel 0-401- 221
12 Spacer EP-8
N 0-401- 204
R
13 Plunger
Q
TE
14 Hex cap nut 0-401- 324

SO Y
15 Disk spring 0-401- 336

IN
16 Back seat 0-401- 107

R
17 Lip seal 0-401- 108

18 Cylinder
NOTE) * mark is alphabet (A, B …), it means the board type.

U
11-53
11.4.15.4 Concentration pump (For B liquid; P4) (Type1)
NOTE）This type of Concentration pump is equipped the models with equal or before serial
No.A0207*.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
Pump head ASSY
11-54
/Material Code No.
Compatible with
P4 type 1 Assy
0-401-110(See Note1)
0-401- 291 Set of No. 4 to 8
motor Assy
0-401- 101 Set of No. 9 to 13
1 Pump head Assy
0-401- 323 (See NOTE 1)
9 Plunger
10 Hex cap nut 0-401- 106
O
11 Back seat N 0-401- 107
12 Lip seal 0-401- 108
R
13 Cylinder
Q
TE
SO Y

IN
R
U
11-55
11.4.15.5 Concentration pump (For A liquid; P5) (Type1)
NOTE）This type of Concentration pump is equipped the models with serial No.A0001* to No.A0207*.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
Pump head ASSY
11-56
/Material Code No.
Compatible with
P5 type 1 pump
Type2 (0-401-110)
Drive joint Assy 0-401- 292 Set of No. 4 to 8
0-401- 112
1 Pump head Assy Set of No. 9 to 13
0-401- 327
Compatible with
Type2
9 Plunger
O
10 Hex cap nut 0-401- 106
11 Back seat N 0-401- 107
R
12 Lip seal 0-401- 108
Q
13 Cylinder
TE
SO Y
IN
R
cannot be purchased separately
U
11-57
11.4.15.6 Concentration pump (For A/B liquid) (Type2)
NOTE）This type of UF pump is equipped the models with serial No.A0208* or later.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
Pump head ASSY
11-58
/Material Code No.
Compatible with
Concentration pump V-10AMM-P2 0-401- 110
Type1
0-401- 292 Set of No. 4 to 8
motor Assy
0-401- 112
1 Pump head Assy Set of No. 9 to 13
0-401- 327
Compatible with
Type1
O
9 Plunger
10
11
Hex cap nut
Back seat
N 0-401-
0-401-
106
107
R
12 Lip seal 0-401- 108
Q
TE
13 Cylinder -
SO Y
IN
R
U
11-59
11.4.15.7 Concentration pump (For A/B liquid) (Type3)
NOTE）This type of Concentration pump is equipped the models with serial No.J8712* or later.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
Pump head ASSY
11-60
/Material Code No.
Concentration pump
V-0AFP06-XP-52 0-401- 325
(Type 3)
0-401- 326 Set of No. 4 to 8
motor Assy (Type 3)
1 Pump head Assy 0-401- 327 Set of No. 9 to 14
Compatible with
Type1
8 Stepping motor A23KMK241B
9 Plunger
10 Hex cap nut 0-401- 324
O
11 Disk spring 0-401- 336
12 Back seat
N 0-401- 107
R
13 Lip seal 0-401- 108
Q
TE
14 Cylinder -
SO Y
IN
R

U
11-61
Reference 1: UF pump & concentrate pumps - Method to replace lip seal
CAUTION
Each head parts of the UF pump and the A/B concentrate pumps are not compatible. If
assembled incorrectly, it may cause a failure of the pump. Therefore, take special caution not to
mix the parts of each pump when disassembling these pumps.
1. Unscrew Part A (M6 cap screw) shown in

the right figure from the bottom of the
pump (metering pump) with an Allen
wrench (5 mm).
2. Pull out the shaft engaged in the

sphered ball bearing, moving the head in
the arrow direction in the right figure.
Pump head is removed.
Take caution not to wipe off the grease

attached to the sphered bearing section.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R
3. Rotate
Part B (hex. cap nut) shown in the left figure to CCW carefully until
it loosen.
U
4. Pull out Part F (plunger) carefully with D in

the right figure.
5. Remove Parts H (lip seal) and G (back
seat). Type3 pump have Disk spring
between F (plunger) and G (back seat).
Remove it too.
6. Insert the Disk spring (in case of Type3),
new parts G and H through part F in the
order shown in the right figure. Take
caution that Parts H are correctly oriented.
When inserting Parts H, carefully insert
them with special care.
7. After Parts H are assembled, wipe foreign
matter or oil out from surface.
8. Assemble the parts according to the
procedures opposite to the disassembly.
The tightening torque of Part B should be
3.0 Nm.
11-62
9. Perform the hot rinse process at 85C after installing the pump to the machine and connecting the
tubes and harness correctly.
10. Confirm that there is no leak from pump head and tubes in the hot rinse process at 85C.
Tighten Part B (Hex. cap nut) until the leak stops if some leak was observed from pump head.
WARNING
The temperature of each part rises up to around 80C in the hot rinse process. Take sufficient
caution and appropriate protection not to get burnt by when retightening Part B (Hex. cap nut).
WARNING
There is a possibility that water leaks from the pump head when the hot rinse process is
executed after Part B (Hex. cap nut) is reassembled. Once Part B (Hex. cap nut) is removed for
some reason such as replacement of the lip seal, etc., be sure to execute the hot rinse process
and no water leak was observed under high temp condition.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
11-63
Reference 2： How different between each Piston pumps.
UF pump and Concentration pump looks similar but there are no compatible. Please pay attention to
those parts are not compatible as well. Different between those pumps are described as below table.
Degree of head
Piston head A°
Type Serial No. of machine Bracket
Assy type （and 1shot
volume）
Separate
1 Equal or before A0207*
20°（approx. 0.7 type
UF Pump A0208* mL）
2 Big port Integrate type
(P3) ~ G8701* (Normal tube size
After or equal 5 x 11mm) Integrate
3 (High quality ceramic)
J8702* type
Separate
1 Equal or before A0207*
type
B conc.
A0208*
Pump 2 Integrate type
~ G8701*
(P4)
After or equal 10°（approx 0.35 Integrated
3
J8702* mL） type
O
Small port2
(Small tube size Separate
1 Equal or before A0207* N
2.5 x 5 mm)
(Normal quality
type
A conc. ceramic)
R
A0208*
Pump 2 Integrate type
~ G8701*
Q
(P5)
TE
After or equal Integrated

3
SO Y
J8702* type
IN
U R
Piston head Assy type Degree of head
11-64
11.4.16. Two-way solenoid valve
NOTE）This type of valves is equipped the models with serial No. before or equal A0389*,
A0391*-B0402*, A0422-A0425*, B0458*. Other machines are equipped with Type2 valve.
The label color is:

- Blue :KF2-3421A
- Orange :KF2-3421B
O
Type 1 N Type 2
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
Diaphragm Assy

Description Code No.
Remarks
/Material
Compatible with Type2
2 way valve MJB3 MJB3
(0-401-114)
2 way valve
KF2-3421A 0-401- 114 Compatible with Type 1
KF2-3421A
Intended for exclusive
2 way valve for V02
KF2-3421B 0-401- 303 use of V02.
KF2-3421B
(See NOTE 1)
With 2 screws.
Special Bracket 0-401- 226
(See NOTE 2)
Diaphragm Assy Set of No.1 to 4
0-401- 290
KF2-3421A (See NOTE 3)
Diaphragm Assy Set of No.1 to 4
0-401- 353
KF2-3421B (See NOTE 3)
11-65
Description Code No.
Remarks
/Material
1 Silencing rubber Urethane rubber
2 Movable core Stainless steal
3 Ground Stainless steal
4 Diaphragm Fluorine rubber (See NOTE 3)
NOTE) Since the parts with hatched “No.” on the list above constitute as an assembly, each part
NOTE 1) “KF2-3241B” is equipped the models with serial No. after or equal C(or D)7560*.
NOTE 2) Type 1 two-way valve production is stopped. Please use type 2 valve.
But regarding of compatibility from type 1 to Type 2, replacing V11, V22, V24, V51 and V52
with Type1 to Type 2 required special bracket.
NOTE3) The diaphragm for KF2-3421A is different from for KF2-3421B, but it can be installing for
each other. However when used in different combinations, the machine performance is not
guarantee.
O
NOTE N
“KF2-3421B” is for the exclusive use of two way solenoid valve “V02”.
R
This valve can be used all TYPE3 machine.
But when you use for other than V02, we would be unable to guarantee of machine performance.
Q
TE
SO Y
NOTE
IN
R
Two-way solenoid valve specifies flow direction and shown on the valve body. Confirm the
direction when replacing these valves.
Just for your information:

U
It may easier access to V51 if you remove the FS bracket and tube.
11-66
11.4.17. Check valve
11.4.17.1 Check valve (Type1)
O
N
R
Q
TE
/Material Code No.

Compatible with Type 2
SO Y
Check valve
(0-401-115)
IN
R
Stopper 0-401- 119 Set of No. 5 and 6

1 Casing B PPS
3 Nut PPS 0-401- 117
U
4 Compression spring Stainless Steel 0-401- 118

5 Stopper casing See and order
6 Rubber stopper description “Stopper”.
7 Casing A PPS 0-401- 120
NOTE) This Type 1 check valve production is stopped. Please use type 2 check valve.
11-67
11.4.17.2 Check valve (Type2)
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y

/Material Code No.
IN
R
Check valve 0-401- 115 Compatible with Type 1

Stopper 0-401- 119 Set of No.5 and 6
1 Cashing B PPS 0-401- 116
U
3 Nut PPS 0-401- 117

4 Compression spring Stainless Steel 0-401- 218
6 Rubber stopper description “Stopper”.
NOTE) The Check Valve is not necessary for TYPE5 machine.
11-68
11.4.17.3 Relief valve (RV1, 2 and 3) (Type1)
NOTE）RV3 is NOT equipped the models with serial No.A0208* or later.
O
N
R
Q
TE

SO Y
/Material Code No.

IN
R
Relief valve See NOTE2)
Stopper 0-401 119 Set of No.5 and 6

1 Casing B PPS
U
3 Nut PPS 0-401- 117

4 Compression spring Stainless Steel 0-401- 122 For RV1
4 Compression spring Stainless Steel 0-401- 123 For RV2 / 3
description of
6 Rubber stopper “Stopper”.
NOTE1) Since the parts with hatched “No.” on the list above constitute as an assembly, each part
NOTE2) This Type 1 Relief valve production is stopped. Please use type 2 or type3 Relief valve.
NOTE3) Relief valve types does not have a fully compatibility. Confirm table below.
11-69
11.4.17.4 Relief valve (RV1, 2 and 3) (Type2/3)
NOTE）RV3 is NOT equipped the models with serial No.A0208* or later.
O
N
R
Q
TE

Remarks
/Material
SO Y
Relief valve RV2 for old machine

IN
0-401- 301
R
(Type2) Confirm table below

Relief valve Compatible with RV1 to
0-401- 121
(Type3) 3. See NOTE2 below
Stopper 0-401- 119 Set of No.5 and 6

U
1 Casing B PPS 0-401- 116

3 Nut PPS 0-401- 117
Compression
4 Stainless Steel 0-401- 302 For Relief valve Type2
spring
Compression
4 Stainless Steel 0-401- 124 For Relief valve Type3
spring
description of
6 Rubber stopper “Stopper”.
NOTE1) Since the parts with hatched “No.” on the list above constitute as an assembly, each part
NOTE2) RV1, RV2 and RV3 are same equipment however there are different adjustment. Please
adjust it for each purpose when you install it to machine.
11-70
NOTE
Relief valve that existing model is Type3. Adjusting for each purpose, type3 relief valve can
perform as all positions of relief valves (RV1 to RV3).
But installing Type3 relief valve as RV2 into the old types of machine (TYPE1 and TYPE2
machine) have possible cause of inadequate flow of P2.
So replacing RV2 of the TYPE1 and TYPE2 machine, install type2 Relief valve.
Table: Compatibility of Relief valve types

Machine TYPE TYPE1 Machine TYPE2 Machine TYPE3 Machine or later
Type2 (0-401-301) Type2 (0-401-301) Type2 (0-401-301)

RV1
Type3 (0-401-121) Type3 (0-401-121) Type3 (0-401-121)
Type2 (0-401-301)
RV2 Type2 (0-401-301) Type2 (0-401-301)
Type3 (0-401-121)
Type2 (0-401-301)
RV3 Unused Unused
Type3 (0-401-121)
※ Type 1 Relief valve production has already stopped.
O
Way to distinguish of Relief valves: N
R
Type3 relief valve marks label with a dot.
Q
TE
Type2 Relief valve RV1 ↑

SO Y
IN
R
Type3 Relief valve ●RV1 ↑

U
11-71
11.4.18. Dialyzer coupler holder
11.4.18.1 Dialyzer coupler holder (Type 1)
NOTE）This type of coupler holder is equipped the models with serial No. before or equal A0208*.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
11-72
/Material Code No.
Coupler holder Assy 0-404- 001
1 Coupler fastening device (A) Stainless Steel 0-404- 002
2 Fixing bush (Red) NBR 0-404- 003
3 Holder body ABS 0-404- 004
Stainless Steel
4 Cross recessed flat head screw 0-401- 125
M4×6
5 Back cover Stainless Steel 0-404- 005
Cross recessed head pan Stainless Steel
6 0-401- 028
screw P3 M3×10
7 Coupler fastening device (B) Stainless Steel 0-404- 006
8 Fixing bush (Blue) NBR 0-404- 007
9 Check valve FDB-003 0-404- 008
10 Packing gland SCS14 0-404- 009
11 Silicon tube 5×11 L=135 0-404- 010
12 0-401- 127
O
screw P3 M3×12
13 Sensor pin Stainless Steel
N 0-404- 011
14 Spring SA065-03 0-404- 012
R
15 Oil less bush 80-0305 0-404- 013
Q
TE

16 P2 M3×20 0-401- 128
screw
SO Y

IN
17 P3 M3×10 0-401- 028

R
screw
18 Limit switch D2HW-C233M 0-404- 014
19 Sensor bracket Stainless Steel 0-404- 015
20 Packing NBR (white) 0-401- 200
U
21 Dialyzer Coupler (RED) POM 0-201- 058

22 Dialyzer Coupler (BULE) POM 0-201- 062
11-73
11.4.18.2 Dialyzer coupler holder (Type 2)
NOTE）This type of coupler holder is equipped the models with serial No. C0001* or later.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
(The Bracket of machine Type 4 or later)
11-74
No Description Remarks
/Material Code No.
Coupler holder Assy 0-404- 117
1 Coupler fastening device (A) Stainless Steel 0-404- 002
2 Fixing bush (Red) NBR 0-404- 003
3 Holder body ABS 0-404- 004

Cross recessed flat head Stainless Steel
4 0-401- 125
screw M4×6
5 Bracket Stainless Steel 0-404- 108
6 0-401- 028
screw P3 M3×10
8 Fixing bush (Blue) NBR 0-404- 007
11 Silicon tube 5×11 L=130 0-404- 109
13 Sensor pin Stainless Steel 0-404- 011
O
14 Spring SA065-03 0-404- 012
15 Oil less bush 80-0305

N 0-404- 013
R
16 0-401- 128
screw P2 M3×20
Q
TE

17 0-401- 028
SO Y
screw P3 M3×10
IN
R
18 Limit switch D2HW-C233M 0-404- 118

Stainless Steel
19 Sensor bracket 0-404- 015
(Sheet metal)
20 Packing (Square) NBR (white) 0-401- 200
U
21 Packing (Oval) NBR (white) 0-404- 110
22 Fixing Bracket Stainless Steel 0-404- 111 Pair

Stainless Steel
23 Sensor bracket (Machining - - See NOTE
Parts)
24 0-401- 068 See NOTE
screw P3 M3×6
25 Dialyzer Coupler (RED) POM 0-201- 058
26 Dialyzer Coupler (BULE) POM 0-201- 062
NOTE) No.23 Sensor bracket (Machining Parts) have been discontinued.

Sheet metal type (No.19) has compatible with machining parts type (No.23), but the length of
screws to fix it is different. Replacing this bracket from Machining parts type (No23) to Sheet
Metal type (No.19), replace screws No.16 to No.24 at a time.
11-75
11.4.19. Blood leak detector
NOTE
Software setting of BLD that “Maker” > ”Information” >”Machine type”>”BLD” should be
selected as below table.
Table. Combinations of Machine Type, BLD Type and Software setting

Machine Type Type 1 to 4 Type5 and 6
Type 2 (NOTE)
O
BLD Type
N
R
Type 1 (NOTE) Type3
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R
Type3 with Conversion

unit
Type setting Nothing

“0” “1”
(Software) (Automatic recognition)
U
NOTE) The Type1 and Type2 Blood leak detector are discontinued.
11-76
11.4.19.1 Type1 & 2
NOTE) The Type1 and Type2 Blood leak detector is discontinued.
Type3 with BLD Conversion Unit was supplied after the present stock has run out.
Please refer to Chapter 14.4.19.3.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R
Standard & NIPRO order

No. Name Remarks
Material Code No.
Blood leak sensor Assy Assembly of 1, 2,
0-401- 231
(Type2) 3,4 and 6
U
3 and 4 constitute
BLD Body 0-401- 132
as an assembly
Finish machine
1 Stop screw 0-401- 130
screw M3
2 Cover plate 0-401- 131
3 BLD Dialysate flow pass See and order
description of “BLD
4 Body Body”
5 Cross recessed head screw P3 M4×16 0-401- 133
6 Water proof cover 0-401- 134
7 Bracket 0-401- 135
NOTE) The Type1 and Type2 Blood leak detector are discontinued.
11-77
CAUTION
The window of BLD dialysate flow pass is made of glass, and it cracks easily. When cleaning
BLD dialysate flow pass, rinse with disinfectant without disassembling the machine.
NOTE
Blood Leak Detector (Serial No. 0663 or later) equips Analog Voltage test function. You can
apply this function by selecting to “1” though “Maker”>”Machine type”>”BLD” .
Nameplate
O
N
R
Old Type (Type 1) New Type (Type 2)
Q
TE
Serial No. 0662 or before Serial No. 0663 or later

SO Y
NOTE: Type 1 has three LED (Green, Blue and Red), But Type 2 has two LED (Blue and Red)
IN
R
 Cleaning Procedure
For supporting of Blood leak detector (BLD) cleaning procedure, you can operate special procedure
as bellowing.
U
1. BLD drain/priming function button at BLD calibration screen (Software ver. 05.20 or before) or
Blood Leak Alarm screen (Ver.06.00 or later) for easier cleaning of BLD.
How to use:
1. Remove Red coupler from dialyzer coupler holder.
2. Press DRAIN button at BLD calibration screen or Blood leak Alarm screen.
3. Machine drain water from BLD automatically by suck air from red coupler by UFP.
(In the mean time, slant the “BLD hydraulic part” to remove the water from BLD unit)
4. After confirmation of water removed from BLD, please remove BLD and clean it.
NOTE: When you clean the BLD, please note that if finger mark (Fingerprint) should not be
remained at glass.
For cleaning process, do not open the screws that fixing the Glass because it might be
damaged the glass during you tighten the screw during re-assembling. And also, in case
these screws are not enough tighten, it will be leakage and it makes damaging the P.C.B.
5. After cleaning the BLD, please return (re-assembling) BLD to machine and connect back to red
coupler to receiver.
6. Press PRIMING button at BLD calibration screen or Blood leak Alarm.
7. Give some water rinse to confirm air should be removed from BLD completely.
CAUTION: You should do PRIMING function after DRAIN for prevent P2 driving by dry
condition (P2 may get damaged if it is operated with much air condition.).
Error messages that “0113 DIRTY BLOOD LEAK SENSOR (ZEROLIZE ERROR)” and same time
11-78
“1003 POWER OFF & CLEAN BLD”. These errors occur when DIAMAX could not zerolize BLD due
to too much dirt of BLD. If you face this problem, you should "CLEAN BLD", press BLD "Auto
zerolize" button and "POWER OFF" and ON machine for initializing this error.
NOTE (IMPORTANT): Some kinds of grease or oil from patient are remain and increase that
INVISIBLE at BLD also makes this ZEROLIZE ERROR problem. Even if you can not find any dirt of
BLD, please follow above procedure that clean and power off. It might be easy to occur in case
hospital did not give proper disinfection like Sodium hypochlorite, Hot citric etc. even hospital give
Acetic acid rinse for decalcification. (It can not removed by Acetic acid rinse)
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
11-79
11.4.19.2 Type3
NOTE) This type of coupler holder is equipped the models with serial No.J8702*or later.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R

No. Name Remarks
Material Code No.
Blood leak sensor Assy
0-401- 328 Assembly of 1 to 4
(Type3)
U
1 Stop screw 0-401- 329
2 Fixing plate 0-401- 330
3 BLD Dialysate flow pass

4 Body
5 Base Plate Stainless steel
CAUTION
The window of BLD dialysate flow pass is made of glass, and it cracks easily. When cleaning
BLD dialysate flow pass, rinse with disinfectant without disassembling the machine.
11-80
11.4.19.3 BLD Conversion Unit
For BLD Type1 and Type2 are discontinued, this Conversion Unit is released for Type4 or before
machines.
NOTE) The silicone tube include in BLD Conversion Unit and BLD Type Converter.
O
N
R
Q
TE
No.6
SO Y
BLD Conversion
IN
P.C.Board From
R
Mother P.C. Board

No. Name Remarks
Material Code No.
No.1 to 12 and
U
BLD Conversion Unit 0-401- 345

Silicone tube
No.1 to 6, 8 to 12
A BLD Type Converter 0-401- 346 and Silicone tube
(Not include No.7)
1 BLD fixing plate Stainless steel
2 Connector fixing bracket Stainless steel
3 BLD fixing bracket Stainless steel
4 BLD fixing cover Stainless steel
5 Lined grommet GEE62F-A-C
6 BLD Conversion P.C.Board BP14-14
Blood leak sensor Assy
7 0-401- 328
(Type3)
Cross recessed pan head Fe Ni
8
screw P3 M3×5
Cross recessed pan head Stainless Steel
9
screw P3 M3×6
11-81
No. Name Remarks
Material Code No.
Cross recessed pan head Stainless Steel
10
screw P3 M4×8
Cross recessed binding head Stainless Steel
11
screw M4×8
12 Harness for BLD Converter
φ5mm*φ11mm
Silicone tube
L = 250
Replace the BLD and Silicone tube of only BLD Inlet side.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R
Before replacing After replacing

U
CAUTION
Do not pull the every silicone tubes and wirings strongly when replace it.
It is possible that it caused by kink in some tubes and wire damages.
11-82
11.4.20. Sample port

/Material Code No.
Sample port 0-401- 136
O
1 Sample port lid PSU 0-401- 137
2 Packing
N
Silicone rubber 0-401- 138
R
3 Rod PSU 0-401- 139
Q
TE
4 Spring Stainless Steel 0-401- 140

SO Y
5 Sample port body PSU 0-401- 141

IN
U R
11-83
11.4.21. Concentrate sheath
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
A Concentrate B Concentrate
Side Side
11-84
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R

/Material Code No.
Set of No. 1, 2, 4, 5, 14,
A concentrate nozzle Assy 0-401- 142
17, 18, 19, 21, 23
Set of No. 1, 3, 4, 5, 14,
U
B concentrate nozzle Assy 0-401- 143

17, 18, 20,21,23
Set of No.
Sheath Assy 0-401- 144
11,12,13,16,26
A concentrate sheath door
0-401- 145 Set of No. 6,8,9,15,22
Assy
B concentrate sheath door
0-401- 146 Set of No. 7,8,10,15,22
Assy
1 Tube joint -
Set of No.4 (Red), 17,
2 A liquid nozzle (only top) 0-401- 205
18 and 21
Set of No.4 (Blue), 17,
3 B liquid nozzle (only top) 0-401- 206
18 and 21
4 Stopper(Red) 0-401- 236
4 Stopper(Blue) 0-401- 237
5 Tube for nozzle PE 0-401- 147
6 A concentrate sheath door -
11-85
/Material Code No.
7 B concentrate sheath door -
8 Shaft -
9 A concentrate table cover -
10 B concentrate table cover -
11 Rinse chamber A -
12 Rinse chamber B -
13 Rinse chamber C -
14 Nozzle handle -
15 Packing -
16 Micro-switch D2HW-C233 0-401- 148
17 Spring pin 0-401- 267
O
P8 silicone rubber 0-401- 149
18 O-ring N
P8 fluororubber 0-401- 341
R
19 Red color ring 0-401- 150
Q
TE
20 Blue color ring 0-401- 151

SO Y
IN
R
21 Torsion spring 0-401- 268
22 Torsion spring -
23 Silicone tube φ5×7 0-401- 152

Stainless Steel
U
24 Hex. socket head bolt 0-401- 153

M4×6
Cap for hex. socket head
25 BTCSW4 0-401- 154
bolt
26 Cross recessed head screw P3 M3×12 0-401- 127
φ2.5×11
27 Silicone Tube 0-401- 224
Double tube
28 Filter (FL6 or 7) 0-401- 176
11-86
11.4.22. Blood pump
NOTE) The Blood Pump of this type is equipped the models with serial No. equal or after A0101*.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R
No.01 Casing Aluminum (silver) type

U
No.01 Casing Plastic (white) type
11-87
O
N
R
Rotor ASSY
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
Clamp ASSY
Cover ASSY
11-88
/Material Code No.
This unit is included
Blood pump ASSY 0-404- 016
adapter harness.
Set of No. 2 to 11, 15, 21, 24,
Rotor ASSY 0-404- 017
25, 26, 32, 33, 35, 36 and 38
Clamp ASSY 0-404- 018 Set of No. 12,13,14,16

Cover ASSY 0-404- 037 Set of No. 19,28
Casing AC7A Aluminum type (Silver)
Plastic type (White)
1 Casing PPS 0-404- 116 Compatible with Aluminum
Type
2 Rotor body AC7A -
3 Rotor bracket AC7A -
4 Shaft A Stainless Steel -
5 Roller A Stainless Steel -
6 Roller B POM -
7 Roller C POM 0-404- 021
O
8 Shaft B Stainless Steel 0-404- 022
9 Pin A Stainless Steel N
0-404- 023
10 Handle POM -
R
11 Handle plate Stainless Steel -
Q
TE
12 Clamp base POM -

SO Y
13 Clamp POM -
IN
R
14 Clamp shaft Stainless Steel -

15 Spring Stainless Steel 0-404- 024
16 Torsion spring Stainless Steel -
17 Rubber cover NBR 0-404- 025
18 Shaft Stainless Steel 0-404- 038
U
19 Cover PSU -
20 Packing NBR 0-404- 027
21 Urethane washer Urethane 0-404- 028
22 E ring stopper Stainless Steel 0-404- 039
23 Brush-less DC motor 24V, 20W 0-404- 030
24 Bearing 625ZZ -
25 Bush 80F-0505 -
26 Ball plunger BSX4 0-404- 031
27 Safety magnetic SW BNS120-11z 0-404- 032
φ8×2
28 Magnet -
φ12×2
29 Plain washer SS400 M6 0-404- 033
Stainless Steel
31 Spring pin 0-404- 034
φ3×L12
Stainless Steel
32 Spring pin 0-404- 128
φ2×L10
11-89
/Material Code No.
33 0-401- 155
binding screw M2.5×4
34 0-401- 156
pan screw M4×10
Stainless Steel
35 Hex. socket set screw 0-401- 157
M3×12
36 Wave washer Stainless Steel
Stainless Steel
38 U-nut 0-404- 035
M4
39 0-401- 017
screw P3 M4×16
40 Plastic washer 0-404- 036
45 BP shield panel (L) Stainless Steel 0-404- 113
BP sensor shield
panel
47 0-401- 228
screw P4 M3×6
48 BP shield panel (R) Stainless Steel 0-404- 115
O
49 0-401- 018
screw P3 M4×30
50
Cross recessed head
screw
Stainless Steel
P3 M3×6
N
0-401- 068
R
51 Safety magnetic SW HR-505 0-404- 152 Include two nuts
Q
TE
BP sensor shield
52 Stainless steel 0-404- 153 For HR-505
bracket
SO Y
IN
R
U
11-90
NOTE) The cover Assy of BP rotor (No. 41, 42, 43, 44 see below) is equipped the models with serial
No. before or equal A0100E.

/Material Code No.
41 Shaft (Old Type) Stainless Steel 0-404- 026
42 Shaft Cover PP 0-404- 029
43 Hex. socket set screw Stainless Steel M3×3 0-401- 158
Compatible with present
44 Cover (Old Type) PSU 0-404- 019
model (No.18, 19, 22)
NOTE) These parts (No.41 to 44) has been discontinued.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
Cover ASSY (Old Type)
11-91
11.4.23. Venous clamp
11.4.23.1 Type1
NOTE) This Venous clamp type is equipped the models with serial No. equal or before J9305* and
from J9307* to J9311*.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
11-92
/Material Code No.
Venous clamp Assy
0-404- 041
(Type1)
Cross-recessed head hex. Stainless Steel
1 0-401- 159
head bolt P3 M4×12
2 Hex. nut M6 0-401- 020
3 Bracket C Stainless Steel 0-404- 042
Cross-recessed hex. head Stainless Steel
4 0-401- 159
bolt P3 M4×12
5 Solenoid 7SC 0-404- 043
6 O ring C0 7771 0-404- 044
7 Bush 80F-1610 0-404- 045
8 0-401- 159
bolt P3 M4×12
9 0-401- 207
screw P3 M3×5
10 Sensor detection plate Stainless Steel 0-404- 046
O
11 0-401- 159
bolt P3 M4×12
12 Spring pin φ4×18
N 0-404- 047
R
Q
14 Compression spring A22-01 0-404- 049

TE

SO Y
16 O ring P10 NBR 0-404- 051

IN
R
17 Bush 80F-1006 0-404- 052

18 Sensor bracket SUS304 0-404- 053
19 Photo sensor EE-SX671 0-404- 054
20 0-401- 215
U
screw P2 M3×10
21 0-401- 207
screw P3 M3×5
22 0-401- 162
bolt P3 M4×18
23 Bracket A Stainless Steel 0-404- 055
24 Hex. socket set screw Stainless Steel M3×8 0-404- 056
25 Pusher POM 0-404- 057
Used TYPE 3
26 Tooth lock washer M6 0-404- 112
machine only
11-93
11.4.23.2 Type2
NOTE) This Venous clamp type is equipped the models with serial No. J9306* and equal or after
J9312*.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
11-94
/Material Code No.
Venous clamp Assy
0-404- 162
(Type2)
Cross-recessed head pan Stainless Steel
1 0-404- 142
screw P3 M4×10
2 Hex. nut M5 SUS 0-401- 004 (For Type 2)
3 Tooth lock washer Stainless Steel 0-404- 112 (For Type 2)
5 Solenoid 6EC 0-404- 163 (For Type 2)
6 O ring C0 7771 0-404- 044
Cross-recessed head pan Stainless Steel
7 0-401- 073
screw P3 M4×8
8 0-401- 207
screw P3 M3×5
9 Sensor detection plate Stainless Steel 0-404- 164 (For Type 2)
10 Bracket C Stainless Steel 0-404- 165 (For Type 2)
11 Compression spring Stainless Steel 0-404- 166 (For Type 2)
O
12 Shaft Stainless Steel 0-404- 167 (For Type 2)
13 O ring P10 NBR
N 0-404- 051
R
14 Bush 80F-1006 0-404- 052
Q
TE
15 Sensor bracket SUS304 0-404- 053

16 Photo sensor EE-SX671 0-404- 054
SO Y

IN
R
17 0-401- 215
screw P2 M3×10
18 0-401- 207
screw P3 M3×5
19 0-401- 162
bolt P3 M4×18
U
20 Bracket A Stainless Steel 0-404- 168 (For Type 2)

21 Pusher POM 0-404- 057
Stainless Steel
22 Hex. socket set screw 0-404- 056
M3×8
11-95
11.4.24. Air bubble and Blood color detector unit
O
Standard
N NIPRO order
/Material Code No.
R
Bubble/blood color detector unit 0-401- 163
Q
TE
ABS No.2 (0-401-165)

1 Bubble detector unit ASSY 0-401- 164
Stainless Steel not include
SO Y
2 Blood color detector optical fiber 0-401- 165

IN
R
3 Cross-recessed head screw P2 M3×15 0-401- 166
NOTE
Bubble detector unit ASSY assembled as TYPE 3 or later machine is measure for EMC.
U
CAUTION
Don’t install the unit for the machines, TYPE 1 or TYPE 2 to the machine of TYPE 3 or later.
Bulge
For TYPE 3 or later Machines For TYPE 1 or 2 Machines

(Measures for EMC) (No bulge)
11-96
11.4.25. Syringe pump
11.4.25.1 Syringe pump (Type 1 & 2)
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
11-97
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R

/Material Code No.
Syringe pump Assy 0-404- 058
Set of No.13 and
Syringe stopper 0-404 071
14
1 Syringe bracket Stainless Steel 0-404- 059
2 Motor mounting bracket Stainless Steel 0-404- 060
3 Syringe drive screw 0-404- 061
4 Shaft (for type1) Stainless Steel 0-404- 130 See NOTE2
4 Shaft (for type 2) Stainless Steel 0-404- 062 See NOTE2
11-98
/Material Code No.
5 Connection bracket SCS13 0-404- 063
Stainless Steel
6 Positioning bracket 0-404- 064
(Machining Parts)
7 Half nut (for type 1) Stainless Steel 0-404- 132 See NOTE2
7 Half nut (for type 2) Stainless Steel 0-404- 065 See NOTE2
9 Spring holder POM 0-404- 067
10 Guide Aluminum 0-404- 068
11 Spring case Stainless Steel 0-404- 069
12 Guide shaft Stainless Steel 0-404- 070
13 Syringe fixing lever ABS See and order
description of
14 Syringe fixing shaft Stainless Steel ”Syringe Stopper”
15 Pusher guide Aluminum 0-404- 073
O
16 Pusher (upper part) ABS 0-404- 074
17 Pusher (lower side) ABS N 0-404- 075
R
18 Pusher POM 0-404- 076
Q
TE
19 Slide bracket POM 0-404- 077

SO Y
20 Handle ABS 0-404- 078

IN
R
21 Rotating shaft Stainless Steel 0-404- 079

22 Pushing rod Stainless Steel 0-404- 080
23 Actuator cover Stainless Steel 0-404- 081
24 Spring (A) Stainless Steel 0-404- 082
U
25 Spring (B) Stainless Steel 0-404- 083

26 Spring (C) Stainless Steel 0-404- 084
27 Spring (D) Stainless Steel 0-404- 085
28 Pulley (A) 0-404- 086
29 Pulley (B) 0-404- 087
30 3-phase stepping motor KT42JM06-551 0-404- 088
HES-10-2HC
31 Rotary encoder 0-404- 089
38H-1000-2MC
32 Micro-switch D2HW-C202M 0-404- 090
33 Timing belt (U type) 70×L037E 0-404- 091
34 Flanged radial ball bearing FL605ZZ 0-404- 092
35 Flanged radial ball bearing FL698ZZ 0-404- 093
36 Oil-less bush 80F-0808 0-404- 094
11-99
/Material Code No.
37 Oil-less bush 80F-0505 0-404- 095
38 Oil-less bush 80B-0508 0-404- 096
39 Spring pin φ2×10L 0-404- 097
40 Spring pin φ2×20L 0-404- 098
41 Spring pin φ2×14L 0-404- 099
42 E-shaped retaining ring: 6 0-404- 100
44 Washer M6 0-404- 102
45 Cross-recessed hex. head bolt M4×10L 0-401- 167
Cross-recessed head pan
46 P3 M4×6L 0-401- 168
screw
47 P2 M4×6L 0-401- 169
screw
48 P3 M3×14L 0-401- 170
screw
O
49 P2 M2×6L 0-401- 171
screw N
50 P3 M3×10L 0-401- 028
R
screw
Q
TE
51 P3 M3×6L 0-401- 068

screw
SO Y
53 Hex. socket set screw M3×5L 0-401- 172

IN
R
55 Metal washer WSSS8-4-3 0-404- 103

58 Hex. nut M4 0-401- 010
59 Screw cover plate (A) 0-404- 104
U
60 Screw cover plate (B) 0-404- 105

Stainless Steel
(Sheet Metal)
11-100
NOTE2) There are two types of syringe pump unit (type 1 and type 2).
These models are different only two parts that have no compatibility with each other. To replace parts
of syringe pump unit, confirm Serial No. of the machine and check table below
Syringe pump type Type1 Type2
Shaft (for type1) Shaft (for type2)

No.04 Shaft
0-404-130 0-404-062
Half nut (for type 1) Half nut (for type 2)
No.07 Half nut
0-404-132 0-404-065
A0001*-A0389*
A0391*-B0402* Other
Model Serial No.
A0422*-A0425*, B0458* (~ C8301*)
A0512*-A0513*, B0541*
NOTE) When a software version is Ver.06.00 or later, the syringe pump of Type 1 and 2 were not able
to use when the syringe pump type setting is 1 (Refer to .11.3).
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
11-101
11.4.25.2 Syringe Pump (Type 3)
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
11-102
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R

/Material Code No.
U
Syringe pump Assy (Type3) 0-404- 136 For Type4 machine

Set of No.13 and
Syringe stopper 0-404 071
14
1 Syringe bracket (For Type3) Stainless Steel 0-404- 137
Motor mounting bracket
(For Type3)
Syringe drive screw
3 SS400 0-404- 148
(For Type3)
Stainless Steel
(Sheet Metal)
7 Half nut Stainless Steels 0-404- 261
11-103
/Material Code No.
13 Syringe fixing lever ABS See and order
description of
14 Syringe fixing shaft Stainless Steel ”Syringe Stopper”
17 Pusher (lower side) ABS 0-404- 075
18 Pusher POM 0-404- 076
20 Handle ABS 0-404- 078
21 Rotating shaft (For Type3) Stainless Steel 0-404- 139
O
24 Spring (A) Stainless Steel
N 0-404- 082
R
Q
26 Spring (C) Stainless Steel 0-404- 084

TE

SO Y
IN
Encoder mounting bracket

R

(For Type3)
29 Shaft coupling MOR-12-5*5 0-404- 140
30 3-phase stepping motor KT42JM06-551 0-404- 088
HES-10-2HC
31 Rotary encoder 0-404- 089
U
38H-1000-2MC
34 Flanged radial ball bearing RF1450ZZ 0-404- 092
36 Oil-less bush 80F-0808 0-404- 094
37 Oil-less bush 80F-0505 0-404- 095
38 Oil-less bush 80B-0508 0-404- 096
39 Oil-less bush 80F-1612 0-404- 141
40 Spring pin φ2×10L 0-404- 097
41 Spring pin φ2×20L 0-404- 098
42 Spring pin φ2×14L 0-404- 099
11-104
/Material Code No.
45 Washer M6 0-404- 102
46 P3 M4×10L 0-404- 142
screw
47 P2 M3×8L 0-401- 168
screw
48 P3 M3×14L 0-401- 170
screw
49 P2 M2×6L 0-401- 171
screw
50 P3 M3×10L 0-401- 028
screw
51 P3 M3×6L 0-401- 068
screw
Cross-recessed head truss
52 M3×6L 0-404- 143
screw
53 P2 M3×5L 0-404- 144
screw
54 Hex. nut M4 0-401- 010
O
56 Metal washer TK-403
N 0-404- 103
R
57 Cross recessed hex. head bolt P3 M3×6L 0-404- 145
Q
TE
58 Washer M4 0-404- 146

SO Y

IN
R
NOTE) In the following cases, the syringe pump of Type 3 cannot be used.
・Software version is Ver.05.20 or before.
・The Syringe Type was set to “0”. (Refer to .11.3)
U
11-105
11.4.25.3 Syringe Pump (Type 4)
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
11-106
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R

/Material Code No.
U
Syringe pump Assy (Type4) 0-404- 154 For Type5 machine

1 Syringe bracket (For Type4) Stainless Steel 0-404- 155
Motor mounting bracket
(For Type4)
Syringe drive screw
3 SS400 0-404- 157
(For Type4)
Stainless Steel
(Sheet Metal)
7 Half nut Stainless Steels 0-404- 261
11-107
/Material Code No.
13 Syringe stopper ABS / Stainless Steel 0-404- 071
16 Pusher (lower side) ABS 0-404- 075
17 Pusher POM 0-404- 076
19 Handle ABS 0-404- 078
20 Rotating shaft (For Type3/4) Stainless Steel 0-404- 139
22 Encoder cover Stainless Steel 0-404- 158
23 Spring (A) Stainless Steel 0-404- 082
O
25 Spring (C) Stainless Steel
N 0-404- 084
R
Encoder mounting bracket
Q
TE

(For Type4)
SO Y
28 Spacer A 0-404- 160

IN
R
29 Spacer B 0-404- 161

30 Shaft coupling MOR-12-5*5 0-404- 140
31 2-phase stepping motor 103H5208 0-404- 264
Syringe Pump encoder
32 BP13-11 0-402- 219
U
Board
33 Encoder Disk 0-404- 150
37 Oil-less bush 80F-0808 0-404- 094
38 Oil-less bush 80F-0505 0-404- 095
39 Oil-less bush 80B-0508 0-404- 096
40 Oil-less bush 80F-1612 0-404- 141
41 Spring pin φ2×10L 0-404- 097
42 Spring pin φ2×20L 0-404- 098
43 Spring pin φ2×14L 0-404- 099
11-108
/Material Code No.
46 Washer M6 0-404- 102
47 Upper Bracket Stainless steel 0-404- 151
48 P2 M2×6L 0-401- 171
screw
49 P3 M2×6L 0-401- 316
screw
50 P2 M3×5L 0-404- 144
screw
51 P2 M3×8L 0-401- 168
screw
52 P3 M3×6L 0-401- 068
screw
53 P3 M3x 8L 0-401- 317
screw
54 P3 M3×10L 0-401- 028
screw
55 P3 M3×14L 0-401- 170
screw
O
Cross-recessed head truss
56 M3×6L 0-404- 143
screw N
R
Q
TE
Cross recessed hex. head

59 P3 M3×6L 0-404- 145
SO Y
bolt
IN
R
60 Hex. nut M4 0-401- 010

63 Washer M4 0-404- 146
U
11-109
11.5. Maintenance Parts - Harness
11.5.1. Machine type 1
NOTE) This harness drawing is applicable the models with serial No. A0001* – A0207*.
11.5.1.1 Power supply section
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
11-110
11.5.1.2 Dialysate line section and around operation panel
NOTE) This harness drawing is applicable the models with serial No. A0001* – A0207*.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
11-111
NOTE) This harness drawing is applicable the models with serial No. A0208* - A0609*.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
11-112
11.5.2.2 Dialysate line section and operation panel
NOTE) This harness drawing is applicable the models with serial No. A0208* - A0609*.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
11-113
NOTE) This harness drawing is applicable the models with serial No. C0001* - C8301*
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
11-114
Operation panel: Type2 Operation panel: Type1
U R
SO Y
Q
IN
11-115
TE
R
N
Associated code No.

0-402- A B C D
BP02-30A 093 094 095
LCD P. C. BOARD
BP02-30A1/A2 188 189 190
NOTE) This harness drawing is applicable the models with Serial No.: C0001* - C8301*
LCD-DISPLAY BP02-15A to 15E

014
P.C. BOARD BP02-15F
Dialysate line section
U R
SO Y
Q
IN
11-116
TE
R
N
O
11.5.3.3 SSR-Box
NOTE) This harness drawing is applicable the models with Serial No.: C0001* - C8301*
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
11-117
11.5.4. Machine Type4
NOTE) This harness drawing is applicable the models with serial No. equal or after G8302*.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
11-118
NOTE) This harness drawing is applicable the models with serial No. equal or after G8302*
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
11-119
11.5.5. Machine Type5 and 6
NOTE) This harness drawing is applicable the models with serial No. equal or after J8702*
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
11-120
NOTE) For Type 5 harness drawing is applicable the models with serial No. from J8702* to J(or K) 10178*,
and For Type 6 is serial No. equal or after J10179*
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
11-121
U R
SO Y
Q
IN
11-122
TE
R
N
O
11.6. Other Parts
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
11-123
/Material Code No.
1 Hanger 0-401- 248 L=710mm
2 Hanger stopper knob 0-401- 190
3 Dialyzer coupler (Red) 0-201- 058
4 Dialyzer coupler (Blue) 0-201- 062
Tube holder for Blood line
5 0-401- 191
(Red)
Tube holder for Blood line
6 0-401- 192
(Blue)
7 Caster （Free） 0-401- 193
8 Caster （Fix） 0-401- 194
See Chapter
9 Disinfection nozzle (Option)
11.7.2.
10 Disinfection nozzle 0-401- 195 With yellow cap
Disinfection nozzle and Filter
PTFE 0-401- 235 (0-401-176)
(Chemical proof)
O
Disinfection nozzle
11 0-401- 196
holder N Including Washer
12 Wall joint 0-401- 223
R
and Nut
Q
TE
13 Disinfection tank tray 0-401- 197

Including Washer
SO Y
14 A/V luer pressure port 0-401- 225

and Nut
IN
R
Use concentrate
nozzle and
15 Filter 0-401- 176
Disinfection
nozzle
Hexagonal key
0-401- 198
wrench （8mm）
U
Dialyzer holder 0-401- 199

Silicone tube 5-11mm 0-401- 201 L=100mm
Different diameter joint 5mm to 2.5mm 0-401- 202
Silicone tube 2.5-5 mm 0-401- 203 L=900 mm
T-joint 0-401- 222
Filter for Air. Not for
TP-Filter 0-401- 183
liquid.
Orifice (ID= 1.7mm ) 0-401- 175 For OL1 or OL3.
See Note below
For OL2, 4,and 5.
Orifice (ID= 1.2mm ) 0-401- 179
See Note below
NOTE: OL1: Between V31 and PG3 OL2: Between AS2 and V41
OL3: Between Heater and P1 OL4: Between PG3 and V42
OL5: Pump flushing Line
Some models have ‘Orifice 2’ ‘Orifice 4’ and ‘Orifice 5’ in the dialysate flow chart.
Please confirm Dialysate Flow chart (Chapter 10).
11-124
11.7. Options
11.7.1. BPM (Blood Pressure Manometer)
Follow the procedure below to install this device to the machine.

Included items and assembling procedures depend on the serial number. Check the serial number of
the machine and follow the respective installation procedure.
Serial number Device type

No.A0001* to No.A00207* TYPE 0
No.A0208* or later TYPE 1
11.7.1.1 BPM (Type 0)
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R

/Material Code No.
BPM Option (Type 0) 0-407- 001 Include No.1 to 7
Blood pressure manometer
1 M2500 0-407- 004
(BPM) main unit
2 Cuff (adult size) HBP-CUFF-NO3C 0-407- 005
3 Cuff hose HPB-CUFF-NO1PC 0-407- 022 Extension hose
4 Harness 0-407- 006
5 Connection hose 0-407- 007 With Air Filter
6 Rear panel of control 0-407- 008
Small fixing screw for BPM
7 P3 M3×8 0-401- 216
main unit
8 BPM Option Instruction Manual
11-125
11.7.1.2 BPM (Type 1)
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R

/Material Code No.
BPM Option (Type 1) 0-407- 002 Include No.1 to 7
Blood pressure manometer
1 M2500 0-407- 004
(BPM) main unit
2 Cuff (adult size) HBP-CUFF-NO3C 0-407- 005
3 Cuff hose HPB-CUFF-NO1PC 0-407- 022 Extension hose
4 BPM Power supply P.C.B BP05-32 0-407- 014
5 BPM bracket 0-407- 015
6 Connection hose 0-407- 007 With Air Filter
7 Hose joint 0-407 009
8 Harness (BPM1) 0-407- 010
9 Harness (BPM2) 0-407- 011
10 Harness (BPM3) 0-407- 012
11-126
/Material Code No.
11 P3 M3 x 6 0-401- 068
screw for BPM main unit
12 P2 M3 x 8
screw for BPM bracket
13 P3 M3 x 10 0-401- 028
screw for the volume bracket
14 BPM Option Instruction Manual
11.7.2. 2nd. Chemical Rinse Port
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R

/Material Code No.
2nd.Rinse Port Option 0-407- 003 Include No.1 to 10
1 Filter 0-401- 176
2 Disinfection nozzle PTFE With orange cap
3 Silicon Tube 2.5 – 5mm
4 Joint with different diameter 0-401- 202
5 Silicon Tube 5 – 11mm
6 2-way solenoid valve M3 screw x 2 0-401- 114
7 T-joint 0-401- 222
8 Grommet (small)
Harness (without connector For V52
9
housing on one end) extension
2nd. Rinse port Option
10
Instruction manual
11-127
11.7.3. ETRF (Endotoxin Retentive Filter) Option
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R

/Material Code No.
ETRF Option 0-407- 023
Include No.1 to 12
ETRF Factory Option 0-407- 024
1 Spacer
2 Filter holder
3 Thumb Screw M4
11-128
/Material Code No.
4 Phillips screw M4×10
5 Nut M4
6 Cable tie
7 Grommet
Silicone tube 5 - 11mm,
8
(with blue coupler) L=1000mm
Silicone tube 5 – 11mm,
9
(with blue coupler) L=750mm
Silicone tube 5 – 11mm,
10
(with red coupler) L=800mm
11 Cover
ETRF Option
12
Instruction Manual
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
11-129
11.7.4. Bicarb Cartridge Option
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
11-130
/Material Code No.
Bicarb Cartridge Option Include No.1 to 21
Bicarb Cartridge Factory
0-407- 025
Option
1 Bicarb cartridge holder 0-407- 026
Include Solenoid
valves, Filter,
2 Valve Bracket (V03 & V34) 0-407- 027
TP-Filter and Check
valve
Include Filter and
3 Valve Bracket (V35) 0-407- 028
solenoid valves
4 Harness (For Switches) 0-402- 229
Harnesses (For V03, V34,
5
V35)
6 Flat head machine screw M6×20 0-401- 334
7 Cross recessed head bolt M6×15 0-401- 335
Cross recessed pan head
8 P3 M4×10 0-401- 073
screw
O
9 Washer M6 0-401- 102
10 Spring washer M6 N 0-401- 338
11 Hex. nut M6 0-401- 020
R
12 Cable Tie
Q
TE
Bicarb Cartridge Option

13 0-401- 340
SO Y
Instruction Manual
IN
U R
11-131
U R
SO Y
Q
IN
11-132
TE
R
N
O
U R
SO Y
Q
IN
11-133
TE
R
N
O
U R
SO Y
Q
IN
11-134
TE
R
N
O
U R
SO Y
Q
IN
11-135
TE
R
N
O
/Material Code No.
14 Instruction sticker (A) 0-407- 042
15 Sticker 0-407- 043
Cross recessed flat head "Stainless steel
16 0-407- 044
screw M3*9"
17 Latch POM 0-407- 045
18 Hex. nut M3 0-407- 046
19 Upper arm cover (A) 0-407- 047 With No.14
20 Guide (Left) Stainless steel 0-407- 048
21 Guide (Right) Stainless steel 0-407- 049
Cross recessed pan head "Stainless steel
22 0-401- 228
screw P4 M3*6"
23 Upper arm cover (B) 0-407- 050
24 P4 M3*8 0-407- 051
screw
25 P4 M3*15 0-407- 052
screw
O
26 Bearing bush 0-407- 053
27 Upper arm shaft N 0-407- 054
28 O-ring (A) P16 0-407- 029
R
29 O-ring (B) P10A 0-407- 030
Q
TE
30 Needle 0-407- 031

SO Y
31 Insertion port (A) 0-407- 034

IN
R
32 Insertion port (B) 0-407- 035

33 Insertion port (C) 0-407- 036
34 Fixing bracket (A) Stainless steel 0-407- 037
Cross recessed pan head “Stainless steel
35 0-401- 049
screw P3 M3*6”
U
36 Under arm cover (A) 0-407- 038

37 Under arm cover (B) 0-407- 039
38 Under arm shaft Stainless steel 0-407- 040
Cross recessed truss head
39 M6*8 0-401- 041
screw
40 Fixing bracket (B) 0-407- 055
41 Spring (A) 0-407- 056
42 P3 M3*8 0-401- 043
screw
For Bicarb cartridge
43 Limit SW 0-407- 057
holder
44 Limit switch bracket 0-407- 058
45 Spring (B) 0-407- 059
46 Main body of upper arm 0-407- 060
47 Fixing bracket (C) 0-407- 061
48 Insertion port holder 0-407- 062 For upper arm
11-136
/Material Code No.
Cross recessed flat head Stainless steel
49 0-407- 063
screw M3*6
50 Latch receiver 0-407- 064
51 Rubber seal 0-407- 065
52 Cap Polyamide resin 0-407- 067
Cross recessed pan head Stainless steel
53 0-401- 133
screw P3 M4*16
54 Main body 0-407- 068
55 Fixing bracket (E) Stainless steel 0-407- 069
56 Proximity sensor 0-407- 070
57 Proximity sensor bracket Stainless steel 0-407- 071
58 Rubber sheet NBR 0-407- 072
59 Instruction sticker (B) 0-407- 073
60 Silicon rubber string silicone 0-407- 074
61 Main bracket 0-407- 075
62 O-ring ( C) P22 0-407- 076
O
63 Insertion port socket (B) PPS+G30 0-407- 077
64 Insertion port socket (A) PPS+G30
N 0-407- 078
R
65 Fixing bracket (D) Stainless steel 0-407- 079
Q
66 Spring (C) Stainless steel 0-407- 080

TE
67 O-ring (D) P11 0-407- 081

SO Y
68 Hex. nut M3 0-407- 082

IN
R
69 T-Joint PSU 0-401- 222

70 Silicon tube 5 - 11mm L = 70
71 2-way solenoid valve KF2-3421A 0-401- 114
U

75 Different diameter joint 0-401- 202
Silicon tube (medium
76 3 - 6mm L = 55 0-407- 083
diameter)
77 Filter 0-401- 354
78 Fixing bracket (V35) Stainless steel 0-407- 084
Cross recessed pan head Stainless steel
79 0-404- 142
screw P3 M4*10
80 3-way solenoid valve 0-407- 033 For V03
Filter for Air. Not for
81 TP-Filter 0-401- 183
liquid.
82 Luer fitting 0-407- 085
Silicon tube (small
83 2.5 - 5mm L = 55
diameter)
84 Check valve 0-407- 032
11-137
/Material Code No.
86 Fixing bracket (V34, V03) Stainless steel
89 P4 M3*6 0-401- 228
screw
90 P3 M3*10 0-401- 028
screw
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
11-138
11.7.5. Central Delivery System Option
11.7.5.1 Factory option and kit
NIPRO order Code

No.
- Central Delivery System Option (A / B) 0-407- 086 Factory option
- Central Delivery System Option (A1 / A2) 0-407- 087 Factory option
Central Delivery System Option Kit 1
- 0-407- 088 See NOTE)
(With P.C. Boards)
Central Delivery System Option Kit 2
- 0-407- 089 See NOTE)
(Without P.C. Boards)
NOTE)
The Type 4 or before machine can not install the Central delivery system option, because the P.C.
board does not have compatibility with some electric components.
Please check them before order.
Central Option Kit 1
- For machine with central option incompatible P.C. Boards.

The Control, Mother, Monitor and Connector P.C. Board for central delivery option are included in
Central delivery system option kit 1.
O
[Contents] N
Valve Manifold (2pcs), Labels, a Flat cable, Two type of Harnesses, Earth cables (2pcs), Silicone tube,
R
P.C. Boards (Control, Monitoring, Mother and Connector) and EMC shield cover.
Q
TE
Central Option Kit 2

SO Y
IN
R
- For machine with central option compatible P.C. Boards.

Central option kit 2 is for machine has P.C. Board for support the central delivery system option.
[Contents]
Valve Manifold (2pcs), Labels, Flat cable, Cable, Two type of Harnesses, Earth cables (2pcs) and
Silicone tube
U
11.7.5.2 Parts
11-139
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y

/Material Code No.
IN
R
1 Valve manifold B399-H803A 0-401- 348

2 Solenoid valve KF2-3421A 0-401- 114
3 Control P.C. Board BP05-12H 0-402- 237
4 Monitor P.C. Board BP05-12G 0-402- 238
U
5 Mother P.C. Board BP05-11E 0-402- 239

6 Connector P.C. Board BP02-31G 0-402- 240
7 EMC cover Stainless steel 0-401- 347 (Narrow groove)
Cable for central valve
8 0-402- 242
control
Flat cable for central delivery Between Control and
9 0-402- 243
system Monitor
10 Harness for valve manifold 0-402- 244
11 Harness for solenoid valve 0-402- 245 For V14
(A1/A2, A/B, Red and
12 Labels one Blue Circle
labels)
Between Mother and
Flat cable for BP02-31G 0-402- 241 Connector P.C.B
For BP02-31G
Earth cables
5 - 11mm
Silicone tubes
L = 920mm
11-140
12 COMPOSITION OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
12.1. Electrical Parts at Rear Side of Machine
12.1.1. Rear side (Type1)
NOTE）This rear side electrical parts are equipped the models with equal or before serial No.A0207*
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R

U
/Material Code No.
1 Power unit (Type 1) BPS-02B -
Conversion kit to install

PSU (Type 2 or Type4)
PSU Conversion kit 0-402-158
to the machine TYPE1.
See NOTE
2 Sound volume P.C. board BP01-24 0-402-057
3 Speaker F52A32-1 0-402-058
4 Driver P.C. board BP02-18B 0-402-153 SLOT1
SLOT2
5 Control P.C. board BP02-16B 0-402-060
See NOTE 1, 2, and 4
Monitoring P.C. SLOT3 (for Pt100Ω). See
6 BP02-17B 0-402-061
board (Type 1) NOTE 3 and 4
12-1
/Material Code No.
7 Hour meter ATH3631 0-402-062
NOTE) When use the PSU Conversion Kit that is installed the Type4 Power supply unit, connect the
heater harness to TB1 as below.
TB1 of Type4 Power Supply
Do not use L2 and N2
Not specified
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
CAUTION
IN
R
Do not connect the harnesses to L2 and N2 of TB1.

Cannot control the heating in this case..
NOTE
U
Can not replace only power code.
NOTE 1) Control P.C. board for TYPE3 and 4 (0-402-151) is designed to work with the machine
TYPE1 or 2. Please purchase Control P.C. board for TYPE3 and 4 (0-402-151). But the P.C.board for
TYPE5 (0-402-216) does not work with the machine Type4 or before.
NOTE 2) Control P.C. board for TYPE1 or 2 (0-402-060) does not work with the machine TYPE 3, 4
and 5.
NOTE 3) No.6 Monitor P.C. board (0-402-061) does not compatible with TYPE2 (0-402-064), TYPE3
and 4 (0-402-152) and TYPE5 (0-402-217).
NOTE 4) Installed software is the most recent version at the time of placement of order.
12-2
NOTE）This rear side electrical parts are equipped the models with equal or after serial No. A0208*
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y

IN
R
/Material Code No.

Power unit (Type 2) D2950A 0-402-063 For 230V (See NOTE)
Power unit (Type 2) D2950A 0-402-156 For 110V (See NOTE)
D2950C &
U
0-402-231
Power Unit (TYPE4) D2951
(For 110V) D2950C &
0-402-232 (For Brazil)
D2955
D2950C &
0-402-233
1
(For 230V) D2950C &
D2956
Common to both Types
Power Supply main unit D2950C 0-402-258
Without Breaker module
D2951 0-402-254
Breaker Module (For 110V)
D2955 0-402-255 (For Brazil)
D2952 0-402-256
D2956 0-402-257 (For Brazil)
12-3
/Material Code No.
3 Speaker F52A32-1 0-402-058
4 Driver P.C. board BP02-18B 0-402-153 SLOT1
SLOT2
5 Control P.C. board BP02-16B 0-402-060
See NOTE 1, 2, and 5
SLOT3 (for thermistor)
6 Monitoring P.C. board BP02-17C 0-402-064
See NOTE3, 4, and 5
7 Hour meter ATH3631 0-402-062
NOTE) Type4 power unit is supplied as soon as the stock of the power unit Type 2 has run out.
See below about the connection of the heater harness, when replaces the power supply Type 2 with
Type 4.
O
TB1 of Type4 Power Supply
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
Do not use L2 and N2

IN
R
Not specified
U
CAUTION
Do not connect the harnesses to L2 and N2 of TB1.
Cannot control the heating in this case..
NOTE
NOTE 1) Control P.C. board for TYPE3 and 4 (0-402-151) is designed to work with the machine
TYPE1 or 2. Please purchase Control P.C. board for TYPE3 and 4 (0-402-151). But the P.C. board for
TYPE5 does not work with the machine TYPE4 or before.
12-4
and 5.
NOTE 3) No.6 Monitoring P.C. board (0-402-064) does not compatible with TYPE1 (0-402-061).
NOTE 4) Monitoring P.C. board for TYPE 3 and 4 (0-402-152) is designed to work with the machine
TYPE2. Please purchase Monitoring P.C. board for TYPE 3 and 4 (0-402-152). But the P.C. board for
TYPE5 does not work with the machine TYPE4 or before.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
12-5
12.1.3.1 Rear side 1
NOTE）This rear side electrical parts are equipped the models with equal or after serial No.C0001*
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R

/Material Code No.
Power unit (Type 3) D2950B 0-402-140 For 230V
Power unit (Type 3) D2950B 0-402-157 For 110V
U
D2950C &
0-402-250
Compatible Power Unit for D2951
Type 3 machine D2950C &
(For 110V) D2955 0-402-251
(For Brazil) Include conversion
D2950C & harness (0-402-212)
1 0-402-252
Compatible Power Unit for D2952
Type 3 machine D2950C &
(For 230V) D2956 0-402-253
(For Brazil)
D2951 0-402-254
D2955 0-402-255 (For Brazil)
12-6
/Material Code No.
D2952 0-402-256
D2956 0-402-257 (For Brazil)
Conversion Harness 0-402-212
2 SSR - Box See Chapter 12.1.3.2.
3 Speaker F52A32-1 0-402-058
SLOT1
5 Driver P.C. board BP05-14A/D 0-402-141
See NOTE 1 and 4.
SLOT2
6 Control P.C. board BP05-12A/B/E 0-402-151
See NOTE 2 and 4.
7 Monitoring P.C. board BP05-13A/B/E 0-402-152
See NOTE 3 and 4.
O
8 EMC Cover SUS 430 0-401-209
9 Hour meter ATH3631

N 0-402-062
R
Q
TE
10 Connector Cover Stainless Steel 0-401-210

SO Y
IN
R
NOTE) If use Type4 power supply in place of Type3, it is necessary to change and disconnect the
electric wiring.
Type3 Power Supply Unit

U
Type4 Power Supply Unit
0-402-121
0-402-111
12-7
Connection of the heater harness
110V 230V
NOTE
O
NOTE 1) Driver P.C board for TYPE1 or 2 (0-402-153) does not work with machine TYPE3, 4 and 5.
N
And the P.C board for TYPE3 or 4 (0-402-141) does not work with machine TYPE5.
R
Q
TE
and 5. And the P.C. board for TYPE3 and 4 (0-402-151) does not work with machine TYPE5.
SO Y
NOTE 3) Monitoring P.C. board for TYPE 2 (0-402-064) is designed to work with the machine TYPE3,
IN
R
4 and 5. And the P.C. board for TYPE3 and 4 (0-402-152) does not work with machine TYPE5.
U
12-8
12.1.3.2 Rear side 2 (SSR Box)
O
N
R
230V Model 110V Model
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R

/Material Code No.
1 SSR Box Cover Stainless Steel 0-401-211

U
2 SSR Box Base Stainless Steel 0-401-212
AQR272
3 SSR 0-402-142 230V Model only
AQA211VL
4 0-401-213
5 0-401-073
6 SSR AQN311 0-402-143 110V Model only
7 Terminal Block W508BC 0-402-144
8 Fuse Holder FH-B02 0-402-145
SSR Box
9 Stainless Steel 0-401-214
Bracket
12-9
/Material Code No.
10 0-401-073
head pan screw P3 M4×8L
11 0-401-043
head pan screw P3 M3×8L
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
12-10
NOTE）This rear side electrical parts are equipped the models with equal or after serial No. G8302*
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R

/Material Code No.
D2950C &
0-402-231
U

(For 110V) D2950C &
D2955
D2950C &
0-402-233
(For 230V) D2950C &
1 D2956
D2951 0-402-254
D2955 0-402-255 (For Brazil)
D2952 0-402-256
D2956 0-402-257 (For Brazil)
12-11
/Material Code No.
2 Speaker F52A32-1 0-402-058
SLOT1
For TYPE3 and 4
4 Driver P.C.board BP05-14A/D 0-402-141
Machine
See NOTE 1
SLOT2
For TYPE3 and 4
5 Control P.C.board BP05-12A/B/E 0-402-151
Machine
See NOTE 2 and 4.
For TYPE3 and 4
6 Monitoring P.C.board BP05-13A/B/E 0-402-152
Machine
O
See NOTE 3 and 4.
7 EMC Cover SUS 430

N 0-401-209
R
Q
TE

SO Y
IN
R
NOTE
NOTE 1) Driver P.C board for TYPE1 or 2 (0-402-153) does not work with machine TYPE3, 4 and 5.
U
And the P.C. board for TYPE3 and 4 (0-402-141) does not work with machine TYPE5.
and 5. And the P.C board for TYPE3 and 4 (0-402-151) does not work with machine TYPE5.
NOTE 3) Monitoring P.C. board for TYPE 2 (0-402-064) is designed to work with the machine TYPE3,
4 and 5. And the P.C. board for TYPE3 and 4 (0-402-152) does not work with machine TYPE5.
NOTE
The Type4 or later machines are without the “Hourmater”.
Please confirm the operating time in the Maintenance Data screen.
( MENU -> (each mode) -> MONITOR -> MAINTENANCE DATA)
12-12
12.1.5. Rear side (Type5 and 6)
NOTE）This rear side electrical parts are equipped the models with equal or after serial No. G8702*
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R

/Material Code No.
D2950C &
0-402-231
D2951
Power Unit (For 110V)
U
D2950C &
D2955
D2950C &
0-402-233
D2952
Power Unit (For 230V)
D2950C &
1 0-402-234 (For Brazil)
D2956
D2951 0-402-254
D2955 0-402-255 (For Brazil)
D2952 0-402-256
D2956 0-402-257 (For Brazil)
2 Speaker F52A32-1 0-402-058
12-13
/Material Code No.
SLOT 1
For TYPE5 and 6
4 Driver P.C.board BP05-14E 0-402-218
Machine
See NOTE 1
SLOT 2
For TYPE5 and 6
BP05-12G 0-402-216
Machine
See NOTE 2)
5 Control P.C.board
SLOT 2
Available to Central
BP05-12H 0-402-237
delivery system option
See NOTE 4, 5)
SLOT 3
For TYPE5 and 6
O
BP05-13F 0-402-217
N Machine
See NOTE 3)
R
6 Monitoring P.C.board
SLOT 3
Q
TE
BP05-13G 0-402-238
SO Y

IN
R
See NOTE 4, 5)
0-401-209
7 EMC Cover SUS 430 Narrow groove
0-401-347
See NOTE 4)
U
NOTE
NOTE 1) Driver P.C board for TYPE1 (0-402-057), TYPE2 (0-402-153), TYPE3 and 4 (0-402-141)
does not work with the machine TYPE 5.
NOTE 2) Control P.C. board for TYPE1 and 2 (0-402-060), TYPE3 and 4 (0-402-151) does not work
with the machine TYPE 5.
NOTE 3) Monitoring P.C. board for TYPE1 (0-402-061), TYPE2 (0-402-064), TYPE3 and 4
(0-402-152) does not work with machine TYPE5.
NOTE 4) BP05-12H and BP05-13G does not have compatibility with previous boards. Please refer to
Chapter 11.
12-14
NOTE 5) The Type 5 and 6 machine become available to Central delivery system option by
replacement of some P.C.Boards, cables and parts. Please refer to Chapter 11.
NOTE
The Type4 or later machines are without the “Hourmater”.
Please confirm the operating time in the Maintenance Data screen.
( MENU -> (each mode) -> MONITOR -> MAINTENANCE DATA)
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
12-15
12.1.6. Rear Cover
12.1.6.1 Fan for “Power box” (Upper position Fan)
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R

/Material Code No.
1 0-401-274
U
screw P1 M4×35
2 Fan filter 6450-M 0-401-186
Fan MFF-12B24DH
3 0-402-083
(for Power Box) 9G1224H402
4 Flange nut FN4 0-401-187
12-16
12.1.6.2 Fan for “Hydraulic part” (lower position Fan)
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R

/Material Code No.
1 0-401-245
U
screw P1 M4×35
2 Finger guard 8130 0-401-188
3 Fan filter 6450-M 0-401-186
MD1225-24 0-402-155 Use for 230V model only

Fan
4 Common to 230V and
(for Hydraulic) 9G1224H402 0-402-083
110V
MFF-12B24DH 0-402-083 Use for 110V model only
Fan
4 Common to 230V and
(for Hydraulic) 9G1224H402 0-402-083
110V
5 Finger guard 8130 0-401-188
Stainless Steel
6 Nut 0-401-010
M4
12-17
12.2. Electrical Parts at Inner Side of Front Door around the Hydraulic.
The following is the electrical parts furnished around the hydraulic
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
12-18
Rear side
Front side
Top View A

/Material Code No.
1 4 color lamp APDC1380S 0-402-065
O
For TYPE 1 and 2
BP02-14A 0-402-154
N (See NOTE 1)
For TYPE 3 and 4
R
BP05-11B/C 0-402-146
(See NOTE 1)
Q
TE
Mother P.C. For TYPE5 and 6

SO Y
2 BP05-11D 0-402-215
board (See NOTE1)
IN
R
For TYPE 5 and 6

BP05-11E 0-402-239
(See NOTE 1 and 5)
U
Dialysate pressure BP03-01A

3 See chapter 11.4.11
sensor P.C. board /B/C/D
Blood pressure
4 BP01-19B/C 0-402-068 PG5 (Venous side)
sensor P.C. board
Blood pressure
5 BP01-19B/C 0-402-068 PG4a (Arterial side)
sensor P.C. board
BP01-50B For TYPE 1 or 2
0-402-069
Level adjustment (White Keytop) (See NOTE 1)
6
switch P.C. board BP01-50B For TYPE 3
0-402-147
(Gray Keytop) (See NOTE 1)
Pump for level RP-M04F-140B
7 0-404-106 For drip chamber
adjuster RP-M04N-140B
Valve for level VDW11
8 0-404-107 For drip chamber
adjuster VDW12JA
12-19
/Material Code No.
Air bubble detector 26SD-520A 0-402-070
9 See chapter 13.11
P.C. board 35SD-513A 0-402-201
Blood color sensor Compatible with FX-D1
FX-301 0-402-071
amplifier type (See NOTE 2)
A
Harness of Blood color sensor
(FX-301) 0-402-159 Harness for FX-301
amplifier
Compatible with FX-D1
Blood color sensor
10 FX-101 0-402-210 and FX-301
amplifier
(See NOTE 2 and 3)
B Harness of Blood color sensor
(FX-101) 0-402-208 Harness for FX-101
amplifier
For compatibility with
Bracket (FX-101) 0-401-314
FX-301 (See NOTE3)
O
11 Blood leak sensor Assy AN7727 0-401-231 See Chapter 11.4.19
NP7-12N 0-402-072 Compatible battery
12 Battery
WP-7.2-12 0-402-211
R
BP03-10A/B/D 0-402-073 For P1 and P2.
Q
TE
13 Pump driver P.C.board

BP03-10E 0-402-200 See Chapter 13.7
SO Y
BP02-31C/D/E 0-402-148
IN
R
See chapter 13.16

BP02-31F 0-402-202
For Type 5 and 6
14 Connector P.C.board
BP02-31G 0-402-240
U
(See NOTE 5)
Compatible with Previous
Conductivity sensor P.C.
15 BP03-16 B/D 0-402-149 type (BP03-16/16A:
board
0-402-075)
NOTE 1) DIAMAX have 5 Types. Please confirm the TYPE of Machine in the Tables of Chapter 11.
NOTE 2) The wiring harness of Blood color sensor amplifier (FX-301) (0-402-071) does not attach to
FX-101. If you need harness with this sensor, please order the harness (0-402-208)
NOTE 3) FX-101 cannot attach to TYPE3 Machine directly. If use it to Type3 Machine, need to attach
the fixing bracket (0-401-314) to it.
NOTE 4) FX-101 is supplied as soon as the stock of the FX-301 has run out. If use FX-301, FX-101 is
supplied along with bracket and harness for compatibility. Please order FX-301 (0-402-071).
See NOTE 2) and 3)
NOTE 5) The Type 5 and 6 machine become available to Central delivery system option by
replacement of some P.C. boards, cables and parts. Please refer to Chapter 11.
12-20
CAUTION
Be sure to calibrate it after replacement of the Blood color sensor amplifier, or it might cause
false detection.
CAUTION
LCD Display P.C. board, Control P.C. board, and Monitoring P.C. board are installed software.
The software versions of these boards need compatibility with each other. To replace these
boards, confirm versions of these softwares. The machine cannot work if the boards that
different software versions are installed to the machine.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
12-21
12.3. Electrical parts at Operation Panel
The following is the electrical parts furnished at the operating sections.
The new Operation Panel unit was equipped the models with equal or after serial No. C7883*.
Use of the LCD panel “TCG121SVLPB” requires the right combination of a new chassis and parts.
LCD Display
Description Standard/Material
LQ121S1DG* TCG121SVLPB*
Chassis of Type 1 ○
Operation Panel Type 2 ○
Ver. 05.02 or before ○
Software
Ver. 05.10 or later ○ ○
BP02-15A - F ○
LCD Display BP02-15H ○ ○
P.C. Board BP02-15J1 ○
O
BP02-15J2 ○ ○
CXA-P1212* N ○
Inverter P.C. Board
ALD-310012PJ125 ○
R
LCD Connector
Q
TE
BP02-30A* ○
Conversion P.C. Board
SO Y
LED Lamp P.C. Board BP01-25# ○ ○

IN
R
Membrane key
C03-3018 ○ ○
switch sheet
G-26-7D ○ ○
G121-02-1D ○ ○
U
Touch Panel
MENC-01-1D ○ ○
TP-3983S2F0 ○ ○
 Please refer to Chapter 11.5, about the changes of the harnesses.

 The LCD Display P.C. Board “BP02-15H” is compatible with both LCD Display “LQ121S1DG*”
and “TCG121SVLPB”.
However,
- Use the Software Version 05.10 or later with BP02-15H (or later), and need to Touch Calibration
(See Chapter 16.2).
- When replaced the LCD Display P.C. Board, the display LCD panel sometimes shows low
brightness or black.
In this time, tune the brightness by VR1 of LCD Display P.C. Board (See Chapter 13.X).
12-22
12.3.1. Operation Panel (Type1)
NOTE) This parts are equipped the models with equal or before serial No.A 0609*.
O
N
R
Upper side
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
Lower side
(Connecting to the machine side)
12-23
/Material Code No.
This parts is equipped
LCD display LQ121S1DG31 - the models with equal or
before serial No. A0207*
the models with serial
LCD display LQ121S1DG41 -
1 No. from A0208* to
C5825*
the models with serial
LCD display LQ121S1DG42 0-402-191
No. from C5826* to
C7882*.
G-26-7D
Touch panel - See NOTE 6.
G121-02-1D
2
O
MENC-01-1D With bracket (For Type1)
Touch panel 0-402-162
TP-3983S2F0 N See NOTE 7
LED Lamp P.C.
R
3 BP01-25A 0-402-081
board
Q
TE
Membrane key
SO Y
4 C03-3018 0-402-082
switch sheet
IN
R
Inverter P.C. CXA-P1212B-WJL This parts cannot use for

5 0-402-076
board CXA-P1212E-WJL Operation panel Type 2.
For TYPE 1 or 2
BP02-15A/B/C 0-402-077
LCD display (See NOTE 1)
U
P.C. board For TYPE 3

6 BP02-15D/F/H 0-402-150
(See NOTE 1)
LCD display
BP02-15J2 0-402-236 See NOTE 8
P.C. board
LCD connector
BP02-30A - See NOTE 2 and 3
conversion P.C.
7 BP02-30A1 0-402-186 See NOTE 2 and 3
LCD connector
conversion P.C. BP02-30A2 0-402-187 See NOTE 2 and 3
NOTE
The parts that the column was shown in grayout has finished production.
The sale will end when all the stock is sold out.
12-24
NOTE1) DIAMAX have three Types. Please confirm the TYPE of Machine by the Tables of Chapter
11.
NOTE2) P.C. board “BP02-30A1/A2” have different connectors from BP02-30A. Replacing this P.C.
board from 30A to 30A1/A2, please replace not only P.C. board but also the cable at a
time.
NOTE3) BP02-30A2 is designed for LCD Display “LQ121S1DG42”. Replacing LCD display, please
replace this P.C. Board at a time.
Associated LCD connector

LCD Display Type Harnesses
CN1: D04-6343
BP02-30A CN2: D04-6342
LQ121S1DG31 CN3: D04-6341
LQ121S1DG41 CN1: D11-6207
BP02-30A1 CN2: D11-6208
O
CN3: D11-6209
N CN1: D04-6343
R
BP02-30A
CN2: D04-6342
(Need to remove a capacitor)
Q
TE
CN3: D04-6341
SO Y
LQ121S1DG42 BP02-30A1 CN1: D11-6207

IN
R
(Need to remove a capacitor) CN2: D11-6208

BP02-30A2 CN3: D11-6209
NOTE
U
Harnesses does not include LCD connector conversion P.C. board.
NOTE4) LCD display (LQ121S1DG31, and LQ121S1DG41) has already stopped the production.
NOTE5) LCD connector Board BP02-30A2 is designed for LCD Display “LQ121S1DG42”. Replacing
LCD display, please replace this P.C. Board at a time.
NOTE6) Touch panel (G-26-7D, G121-02-1D) has already stopped the production.
NOTE7) These Touch Panels, “MENC-01-1D (Cable color is orange.)” and “TP-3983S2F0 (Cable
color is green.)” are compatible with each other.
But the bracket of the touch panel is difference between for Type1 and Type2.
NOTE 8) The LCD Display P.C. Board “BP02-15J2” can be used in combination with Type1 Operation
Panel and Software Version 7.10 or later.
NOTE
Please do not combine different combinations. It may cause of display defect.
12-25
NOTE) This parts are equipped the models with serial No. from C7883* to J (or K) 10178*.
O
N
R
Upper side
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
Lower side
12-26
/Material Code No.
Include the No.1 to 6,
Operation Panel Unit (Type2) 0-402-192 harnesses and .EMC
cover etc.
the models with equal or
1 LCD display TCG121SVLPB* 0-402-193
after serial No.C7883*.
See NOTE.
With bracket (For Type2)
2 Touch panel TP-3983S2F0 0-402-235
See NOTE1
LED Lamp P.C.
3 BP01-25A 0-402-081
board
Membrane key
4 C03-3018 0-402-082
O
switch sheet
Inverter P.C. N This parts cannot use for
5 ALD-310012PJ125 0-402-194
board Operation panel Type 1.
R
LCD display BP02-15H 0-402-195
Q
TE
6
P.C. board BP02-15J2 0-402-236 See Note 2
SO Y
IN
R
NOTE) LCD Display “LQ121S1DG*” for Type1 Operation Panel cannot use Type2 Operation Panel.
And, harnesses are also different in Type1 and Type2 (See Chapter 11.5.3.2).
NOTE1) Touch Panel “TP-3983S2F0” can be used to all Operation panel Type.
But the bracket of the touch panel is difference between “for Type1” and “for Type2 and 3”.
U
NOTE 2) The LCD Display P.C. Board “BP02-15J2” can be used in combination with Type1 Operation
Panel and Software Version 7.10 or later.
NOTE
12-27
NOTE) This parts are equipped the models with equal or after serial No. J10179*.
O
N
Upper side
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
Lower side
12-28
/Material Code No.
Include the No.1 to 6,
Operation Panel Unit (Type3) 0-402-192 harnesses and .EMC
cover etc.
1 LCD display TCG121SVLPB* 0-402-193 the models with equal or
after serial No.C7883*.
With bracket (For Type2
2 Touch panel TP-3983S2F0 0-402-235 and 3)
See NOTE1
LED Lamp P.C.
3 BP01-25A 0-402-081
Board
Membrane key
4 C03-3018 0-402-082
O
switch sheet
N Not for sale
LCD display BP02-15J1
5 See Note 2
R
P.C. board
BP02-15J2 0-402-236 See Note 2
Q
TE
SO Y
NOTE1) Touch Panel “TP-3983S2F0” can be used to Operation Panel Types.

IN
R
But the bracket of the touch panel is difference between “for Type1” and “for Type2 and 3”.
NOTE 2) The LCD Display P.C. Board “BP02-15J1” is not able to use for other Operation Panel
Types..
“BP02-15J2” can be used in combination with Software Version 7.10 or later.
U
NOTE
12-29
13 CONNECTION AND REPLACEMENT OF P.C. BOARD
13.1. The Cautions on Replacement / Connection Work of a P.C. Board
Please read the following directions, in order to ensure a worker's safety and to prevent damage to the
machine by static electricity, before performing the procedure of this chapter.
Cautions for ensuring a worker's safety and protecting a machine Please perform the next operation as turn
before starting work.
1. The power switch of a machine is turned off.
2. The breaker of a Power supply unit is turned off.
3. In order to prevent damage to a P.C.Board, please work after turning off the breaker of a Power
supply unit and waiting for 10 to 20 seconds.
4. It equips, when the wristband for static electricity prevention can be used, and a clip is stopped to a
part for the metal department by which the surface inside a machine is not painted.
When the wristband for static electricity prevention cannot be used, please touch a part for the
metal department by which the surfaces, such as an inside of a machine or a Power supply unit,
O
are not painted, and remove the static electricity of the body, before touching a P.C.Board.
N
Also during work, the surface of the metal inside a machine, which is not painted, is touched
R
periodically, and the static electricity, which has a bad influence on a P.C.Board, is missed.
Q
TE
SO Y
13.2. Cautions of This Chapter

IN
R
・ The variable resistor on a P.C.Board is adjusted beforehand at the factory. Please do not adjust a
variable resistor, as long as there is no special description, since a highly precise measuring
instrument is needed in order to adjust.
・ When you exchange P.C.Board, please check the Type of machine or the type of P.C.Board in use,
U
and exchange for a suitable P.C.Board.
CAUTION
LCD Display P.C. board, Control P.C. board, and Monitor P.C. Board are installed software.
The software versions of these boards need compatibility with each other. To replace these
boards, confirm versions of these software. The machine cannot work if the boards that
different software versions are installed to the machine.
13-1
13.3. LCD Display P.C. Board
13.3.1. Part allocation of BP02-15A/B/C/D
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R
13.3.2. Part allocation of BP02-15F

U
13-2
13.3.3. Part allocation of BP02-15H
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R
13.3.4. Part allocation of BP02-15J1

U
13-3
13.3.5. Part allocation of BP02-15J2
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
13.3.6. General
IN
R
This is the P.C. board mounted inside the operating section and has the functions to display on the LCD
panel, input to the touch panel, and read the Compact Flash card and USB Flash Drives.
The machine of TYPE 1 and TYPE 2 uses BP02-15A, BP02-15B and BP02-15C.
The machine of TYPE 3 uses BP02-15D or later.
U
The machine of TYPE 4 and 5 uses BP02-15H or later.

The machine of Type 6 uses BP02-15J* or later.
The Operation Panel of Type 2 uses BP02-15H or later. (Cannot use BP02-15A - F.)
The Operation Panel of Type 3 uses BP02-15J* or later.
13-4
13.3.7. Function of each part
BP02-15A-D BP02-15F BP02-15H BP02-15J1 BP02-15J2 Function

V1 V18 ← V11 ← +24 V (power input) voltage check terminal (24V3)
V2 V1 ← V2 ← Ground voltage check terminal (24V3GND)
V3 V15 ← V4 ← +5 V (for various logics) voltage check terminal
V5 V9 ← V1 ← +12 V (for inverter circuit) voltage check terminal
V6 V13 ← V3 ← +1.8 V (for CPU) voltage check terminal
O
V7 V14 ← V8 ← +3.3 V (for CPU and peripheral logics) voltage check terminal
N
LD1 LD6 ← LD5 ← Power LED (ON when +24 V power supply is ON.)
R
LD6 LD5 ← Access lamp of Compact Flash card
Q
TE
13-5
VR1 VR1 ← VR1 Variable resistor for LCD panel brightness control
SO Y
CN1 ← ← ← ← Membrane switch input connector
IN
CN2 ← ←
R CN2
Signal output connector for LCD panel “LQ121S1DG*”
(To LCD Connector Conversion P.C. Board - CN1)
CN3 ← ← CN3
U
CN4 ← ← CN4
CN8 ← ← Signal output connector for LCD panel “TCG121SVLPB”
CN6 ← ← CN5 ← Connector for hardware debugging (Not used.)
CN7 ← ← ← ← Touch panel input connector
BP02-15A-D BP02-15F BP02-15H BP02-15J1 BP02-15J2 Function
Power output connector for inverter P.C. board
CN9 ← ← CN9
(To Inverter P.C. Board - CN1)
CN10 ← ← Compact Flash card connector
CN11 ← ← ← ← Connector for hardware debugging (Not used.)
Connector for power input, I/O with other P.C. boards, and through signal
CN12 ← ← ← ←
(to Mother P.C. board - CN9)
Operation panel LED lamp signal output connector
O
CN13 ← ← ← ← (To LED Lamp P.C. Board - CN1)
(Equal or later BP02-15D, Pin 7 is cut due to the coding-Pin.)
N
CN14 ← USB port for USB Flash Drives
R
SW1 SW1 ← ← ← DIP switch for function setting. See NOTE below
Q
TE
13-6
SW2 ← Brightness control of LCD panel
SO Y
IN
NOTE) DIP switch functions
・ DIP Switch 1
R
LCD Display: BP02-15H
SW1-1: Program download mode switch (Download mode: ON)
(Normal location)
If this switch is set ON starting up the machine, it enters Program.
U
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Download mode to load a program from a Compact Flash card or USB
Flash Drives. SW1 ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
In this mode, programs and bitmap data can be updated. [↓] means off. [↑] means on.
SW1-2, SW1-5 to SW1-8: Do not change without special instruction.
SW1-3: Customizable operator for Profile initial setting switch (Nurse available: ON)
SW1-4: Touch Calibration mode switch (Calibration mode: ON). See Chapter 16.2.
Combination condition: Software: Ver.05.10 or later
・ DIP Switch 2
BP02-15H or before does not have this switch.
LCD Display: BP02-15J1/J2
(Normal location)
SW2-1: Brightness control ON/OFF switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
By turn ON this switch, change of brightness control of LCD panel is
SW2 ↓ ↓ ↓ ↑ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
made possible.
[↓] means off. [↑] means on.
SW2-2 to 5: Brightness control switch
When SW2-1 is ON, the brightness was can be set according to
O
sixteen levels by these switches.
N
The factory setting is Level 12.
For more details on setting, refer to chapter 16.X in this manual.
R
Q
TE
13-7
Brightness levels SW 2-2 SW 2-3 SW 2-4 SW 2-5
SO Y
Level 16 (light) OFF OFF OFF OFF
IN
Level 15
Level 14
R ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
. . . . .
. . . . .
U
. . . . .
Level 3 ON OFF ON ON
Level 2 OFF ON ON ON
Level 1 (dark) ON ON ON ON
SW2-6 to 8: Do not change these switches.

13.3.8. Replacement
NOTE: Read and check the chapter “13.3.10. Precautions” before operate following.
・ Open the rear cover of the operation section and replace the P.C. board when the abnormality
has occurred with this P.C. board.
・ Equal or later of TYPE 3 model, there is EMC Shield cover in the operation section. This cover
is fixed with just inserted 9 positions of slide guides. 3 slide guides are top position of panel and
only the center slide guide is inserted to inside of frame and other 2 slide guides are outside of
frame. Other 6 slide guides that 2 for each right/left side and 2 for bottom are inserted to inside
of frame.
・ In order to disconnect the membrane panel switch cable of CN1, slide the CN1 lever horizontally
and lift it obliquely. When connecting the cable, insert the cable to the depth and lean down the
lever and slide it to the depth horizontally.
・ Pull CN7 connector straight grabbing the rigid part (reinforcing plate) of the flexible cable at the
touch panel. When connecting CN7 connector, insert it to the depth of the connector, grabbing
the reinforcing plate of the flexible cable.
・ As to CN12 and CN13, the cable connector comes off by opening the lever. To connect the
cable connector, push in the connector to the depth and close the lever.
・ To disconnect or connect other cables, push in or pull out the cable, with grabbing the
O
connector.
N
・ Set SW1 to the settings before replacing the P.C. board.
・ Confirm that each connector is correctly connected before turning ON the power supply after the
R
P.C. board is replaced.
Q
TE
・ After turning ON the machine, confirm that the lamp indication and LCD display are output, the
SO Y
touch panel is operative, the buzzer sounds when operation is made and check all switches of
IN
R
membrane key switch sheet.

・ When replace the BP02-15F or later from BP02-15D of machine TYPE 3, need to rearrange the
ferrite core. See diagram below and correctly fixed the ferrite core.
U
BP02-15D
BP02-15F or later
13-8
・ The Software Ver.05.02 or before was not displayed in Program Load screen which the software
5.10 or later was written to BP02-15H of LCD P.C. Board.
・ BP02-15J* has 2Types; J1 is for factory shipping machine. J2 is for maintenance and parts
sales.
・ BP02-15J1 can not use in place of BP02-15H or befor. But BP02-15J2 can use in place of
BP02-15H or before.
・ BP02-15J* can only use with Software Ver. 7.10 or later. If the software version before
replacement is used Ver. 7.03 or later, also upgrade the software of Control P.C. Board and
Monitoring P.C. Board.
・ When replaced the LCD Display P.C. Board, the display LCD panel sometimes shows low
brightness or black. In this time, tune the brightness by VR1 or DIP SW2 (BP02-15H or before
does not have DIP SW2.)
・ Use of in place of BP02-15A - F
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
13-9
・ Use of in place of BP02-15H
(NOTE)
O
The BP02-15J2 have inverter function, so Backlight of LCD Display connect to BP02-15J2 directly.
N
If use with Inverter P.C. Board, control the brightness of LCD by VR1.
R
On the other hands, control it by DIP switch.
Q
TE
・
SO Y
Use of in place of BP02-15J*

IN
U R
13-10
13.3.9. Adjustment
No adjustment is required. If necessary, turn VR1 to adjust the brightness of the LCD panel. (Too
much brightness setting would shorten the service life of the panel.)
13.3.10. Precautions
・ When it is replaced by some reasons, confirm whether new P.C.B can be compatible with
machine TYPE or not. Because some types of P.C.B can not be used (no compatible) with
specific TYPE of machine. In case of this P.C.B, BP02-15D - H are compatible with the machine
of TYPE 1 and TYPE 2. But BP02-15A/B/C does not have a compatibility with the machine of
TYPE 3 or later.
BP02-15J1 does not have a compatibility with BP02-15A – H, but BP02-15J2 has a compatibility
with all types.
・ CN13 of BP02-15D or later has coding-pin that means Pin No.7 is cut at CN13 of LCD board
and also harness side of same Pin No.7 position hole is blocked. Due to this coding-pin,
BP02-15A/B/C cannot be used as replacement of BP02-15D or later (Physically, impossible to
connect). However, BP02-15D or later can be used as replacement of BP02-15A/B/C.
・ Confirm whether the software version of new P.C.B has compatible with present software
O
version of machine. If those softwares are mismatched, machine does not work properly (May got
N
CPU error when turn on the machine). In this case, install the right software with Compact Flash
R
by software installation procedure.
Q
・ Carefully handle the membrane panel cable connected to CN1 and the touch panel cable
TE
connected to CN7 since they are flexible cables that can be easily folded and damaged. Grab the
SO Y
reinforcing plate when inserting or pulling out these cables.

IN
R
・ Also, insert or pull out other cables with grabbing the cable connector. Pulling out or inserting a
cable, grabbing the cable itself may break the wires inside.
・ Activate DIP switch before turning on the machine. The function is not activated if the switch is
activated after turning on the machine. The function will activate after restarting (once turn off and
U
on) the machine.

・ Prepare the USB Flash Drives before software installation in BP02-15J* or later. For details,
refer to Chapter 16.X in this manual.
・ Be sure to turn OFF the power supply when inserting a Compact Flash card to CN10. CN10 is
not of the live-line insertion specification, hence inserting the card may be broken during the
power supply is ON.
・ Be sure to urn OFF the power supply when inserting a USB Flash Drives, too.
・ Some reasons, if you have to touch this P.C.B or around this P.C.B even during turn on the
power switch, never touch the Inverter P.C. board which is long and slender P.C. board located in
the side of LCD Display P.C. board. There is a possibility of an electric shock since high voltage
(1700 V) is impressed on it. (It is recommended to cover the P.C. board with isolating material.)
・ The life of the backlight of the LCD panel (It is not LCD P.C. board) is about 50000h.
・ P.C.Board number "BP02-15#" is printed (marked) in the P.C.Board back.
13-11
13.4. Control P.C. Board (BP02-16B, BP05-12#): CPU1 CPU1 CONTROL
13.4.1. Part allocation of BP02-16B, BP05-12A, B, B1 SLOT2 SLOT2
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R
13.4.2. Part allocation of BP05-12E

U
13-12
13.4.3. Part allocation of BP05-12G
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R
13.4.4. Part allocatioin of BP05-12H

U
13-13
13.4.5. General
This P.C. board controls various pumps, valves, and color lamps, measures temperatures,
conductivities, pressures, air bubbles, blood leakage, rotating speed of pump, and rotating
direction, manages the internal clock and various set values, and outputs alarms. This P.C. board
is mounted in the Mother P.C. board at SLOT2 inside the upper case of the machine.
The machine of TYPE 1 and TYPE 2 uses BP02-16B.

The machine of TYPE 3 uses BP05-12A - E.
The machine of TYPE 4 uses BP05-12E.
The machine of TYPE 5 uses BP05-12G
The machine of TYPE 6 uses BP05-12G or later.
BP05-12H is available for use Central delivery system option.

BP02-16B/
O
BP05-12A- BP05-12B1 BP05-12E BP05-12G BP05-12H Function
B
N
R
+24 V line ground voltage check
CP1 ← CP5 CP2 ←
Q
TE
terminal (+24V1GND)
SO Y
+24 V voltage check terminal

CP2 ← CP3 CP1 ←
IN
R
(+24V1)
CP5 ← CP6 CP6 ←
terminal (GND)
+1.8 V voltage check terminal (+1.8
CP8 ← CP12 CP10 ←
U
V)
+1.8 V voltage check terminal for
CP9 ←
CPLD (+1.8 V)
+3.3 V voltage check terminal (+3.3
CP9 ← CP13 CP12 ←
V)
+3.3 V voltage check terminal for
CP14 ←
Melody IC (+3.3V)
CP10 ← CP15 CP19 ← +5 V voltage check terminal (+5 V)

±15 V line analog ground voltage
CP11 ← CP10 CP17 ←
check terminal (AGND)
CP12 ← CP2 CP15 ← +12V voltage check terminal (+12 V)
-15 V line analog voltage check

CP13 ← CP16 ← ←
terminal (-15 V)
13-14
BP02-16B/
B
+15 V line analog voltage check
CP14 ← CP17 CP18 ←
terminal (+15 V)
Check terminal for adjusting analog
CP15 ← CP4
line reference voltage (+2.500 V)

CP4 ←

CP13 ←
Check terminal for adjusting CPU

CP16 ← CP11 built-in analog circuit reference
voltage (+3.410V)
O
Check terminal for adjusting A/D
CP17 ← CP7 CP7 N
← converter reference voltage (+5.120
R
V)
Q
TE
+5V (for Melody output) voltage

CP18 ← CP14 CP11 ←
SO Y
check terminal
IN
R
P.C. board reset jumper

JP1 ← ← ← ← (Short-circuit = Reset: Open
normally.)
←
U
JP2 - - - (OFF = Open normally.)
JP3 ← - - - (OFF = Open normally.)
For hardware debugging (OFF =

JP4 ← JP2 ← ←
Open normally.)
External I/O connector (to rear

CN1 ← ← ← ←
connector panel.)
Connector for NIBP

CN2 ← ← ← ← (Manufactured by Omron Colin Co.,
Ltd.: Option)
Connector for external serial

CN3 ← ← CN3 ← communication
(To rear connector panel.)
13-15
BP02-16B/
B
Connector for monitoring (to Monitor

CN4 ← ← ← ←
P.C. Board - CN1)
Mother board connector lower block

CN7 ← ← ← ← control line input (to Mother P.C.
board - CN35)
Mother board connector upper block
control line input (to Mother P.C.
CN8 ← ← ← ← board - CN36)
(Equal or later BP05-12#, there is
the slit as coding-key.)
Connector for monitoring
CN11
(For Central delivery system option)
O
Button type battery for backup of
BT1 ← ← ← N←
clock (CR2450)
R
U18 ← ← U18 ← IC1 to hold set value
Q
TE
U30 ← U19 U17 ← IC2 to hold set value

SO Y
DIP switch for function setting [Do

IN
R
SW2 ← ← ← ← not change without special

instruction. Normally all OFF]
DIP switch for function setting. See
SW3 ← ← ← ←
NOTE below
U

SW4 ← ← not change without special
instruction. Normally all OFF]
SW1 on not change without special
SW5 SW5 SW4 ←
BP08-03 instruction. Normally all OFF]
See NOTE2 below.
NOTE) Function of DIP switch 3

SW3-1: P.C. board type BP02-16B is set OFF.
P.C. board type BP05-12A or later are set ON.
SW3-2: setting of HP minimum flow rate

OFF = 0.1 mL/h, ON = 1.0 mL/h
13-16
SW3-3 to SW3-8: Do not change without special instruction.
(Normal location)
BP02-16B BP05-12A or later
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SW3 ↓ ↓ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↑ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
[↓] means off. [↑] means on.
NOTE2) BP05-12B1 mounts another P.C. Board (Melody IC Board (BP08-03)). SW5 corresponds to
SW1 on BP08-03.
13.4.7. Replacement
・ Open the rear cover of the upper section of the machine and replace this P.C. board when some
trouble related with this P.C. board, such as the cases when the machine does not start up, the
movement of a pump or a valve is abnormal, etc. has occurred
O
・ To pull out the P.C. board, push up and down both the white card pullers at the top and bottom of
N
the P.C. board. Then, the P.C. board will come off forward.
R
・ For the usual replacement of the P.C. board, put ICs (U18 and U30, U18 and U19, U17 and
Q
TE
U18) mounted on the old P.C. board (mounted on respective socket) onto the new P.C. board,
SO Y
taking caution not to mix up them. By doing so, there is no need to set the set values again since
IN
R
both the ICs hold the specified set values. (NOTE: But it works only in case of replace to the
same software version’s P.C.B, otherwise it may be required the initializing of data.)
・ If set values are abnormal or the values return to original values when the machine is restarted
even after the values are changed, the battery is included in the inside of a chip, and if this
U
battery is running out, since a value is lost, exchange IC’s (U18 and U30, U18 and U19, or U17
and U18) for a new chip.
In such a case, the set values must be manually set in the TECHNICIAN mode after starting the
machine.
・ If the clock is reset every time the machine is started, the button type battery for the backup of
the clock has discharged and it must be replaced. (Button-type battery: CR2450) Service life of
the battery is five years. (The service life may be shorter than this period when the battery set on
the shipment of the machine from manufacture is still used.) After replacing the battery and
mounting the P.C. board to the machine, start up the machine and set the date and time by
proceeding to OPTION→CLOCK SETTING in the TECHNICIAN mode.
・ When inserting the P.C. board, set it to SLOT2 with its parts mounted surface faced to the right
and push it along the guide rail groove. At first, lightly insert the P.C. board so that CN8 (upper
connector) and CN7 (lower connector) are engaged with the connectors of the mother P.C.
board, and then forcibly push the white card puller sections at the upper and lower sections so
that the P.C. board is inserted to the depth.
13-17
・ After replacement of the P.C. board, actually operate the machine and confirm there is no
problem with the P.C. board.
13.4.8. Adjustment
No adjustment is required since it is already adjusted at manufacture before the shipment of the
machine.
13.4.9. Precautions
machine TYPE or not. Because some types of P.C.B cannot be used (no compatible) with
specific TYPE of machine. In case of this P.C.B, BP05-12A - E has a compatibility with the
machine of TYPE 1 and TYPE 2 (Need to loaded a program of software Ver.04.01 or later.).
BP02-16B does not have a compatibility with the machine of TYPE 3 or later. (Melodies are
changed from BP05-12B1).
BP05-12G and H does not have a compatibility with the machine of TYPE 1 - 4.
BP05-12G can be used with machine TYPE 5 and 6. However, it can not be used with Central
O
delivery system option, because it does not have a connector for central delivery system option.
N
BP05-12H can be used only in combination with BP05-13G (Monitoring P.C. Board).
R
・ Certainly, flip on a Dip-SW in the following tables, before load the program of software Ver.05.02
Q
TE
or later from Ver.05.01 or before. After loaded a program, turn back the DIP-SW.
SO Y
(See chapter 13.5.8 about Monitoring P. C. Board.)

IN
R
BP02-16B, BP05-12A/B/B1 DIPSW2 – Bit3 is ON

BP05-12E DIPSW3 – Bit3
U
・ Do not select No.6 (Chime) at “Melody at Treatment End” in case of BP05-12B1 is used.
Because this Chime is rung only once but other melodies are repeating at treatment end. Only
once chime of treatment end may be possible to miss by nurse.
・ CN8 of BP05-12A - E has coding-key that means there is the slit at CN8 of it and also there is
the marking point at other connector side CN36 of Mother board for TYPE3 or later. Due to this
coding-key, BP02-16B cannot be used as replacement of BP05-12A - E (Physically, impossible
to connect). However, BP05-12A -E can be used as replacement of BP02-16B.
BP05-12G does not have coding-key. It is not the compatibility with previous P.C. Boards.
・ Equal or later of TYPE 3 model, there is EMC Shield cover. For access to the inside, remove
this cover first. However, due to the ferrite core of the lamp, it may not easy to open this cover. In
this case, slightly pull the Lamp fixing bracket to the left and push this ferrite core into the space
between the bracket and body of machine for temporally (Do as carefully for not make damage
the ferrite core). It may help you to do the smooth maintenance for this area. Reinstate to the
original condition after the maintenance.
version of machine. If those softwares are mismatched, machine does not work properly (May
13-18
got CPU error when turn on the machine). In this case, install the right software with Compact
Flash by software installation procedure
・ Be sure to insert the P.C. board to SLOT2 when inserting it. If inserted into a different slot, not
only this P.C. board but other P.C. board may be damaged.
・ Do not try to forcibly push the P.C. board if CN7 and CN8 are not properly engaged with the
connectors of the mother P.C. board. Otherwise, the connectors will be damaged.
・ Fully insert the P.C. board to the depth since incomplete insertion may cause a trouble.
・ Since a button type battery (CR2450) is mounted for the backup of the clock, do not place the
P.C. board on any electrically conductive item for the storage or replacement. If placed on such
an item, the battery will be discharged, advancing the time of replacement or malfunctioning the
clock.
・ Do not touch any variable resistor.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
13-19
13.5. Monitor P.C. Board (BP02-17B, BP02-17C, BP05-13#): CPU2
13.5.1. Part allocation of BP02-17B/C CPU2 MONITOR
SLOT3 SLOT3
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R
13.5.2. Part allocation of BP05-13A/B

U
13-20
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y

IN
U R
13-21
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
13.5.6. General
IN
R
The Monitor P.C. Board monitors the conditions of the pulse outputs, shuts down the pulse outputs,
monitors temperatures, conductivities, pressures, air bubbles, blood leak, rotating speed of pumps, rotating
direction of pumps, and conditions of various switches. This P.C. board is inserted into SLOT3 of the Mother
P.C. board inside the upper case of the machine.
U
The machine of TYPE 1 uses BP02-17B.The machine of TYPE 2 uses BP02-17C.

The machine of TYPE 3 uses BP05-13A, BP05-13B - E.
The machine of TYPE 4 uses BP05-13E.
The machine of TYPE 5 uses BP05-13F
The machine of TYPE 6 uses BP05-13F or later
BP05-13G is available for use Central delivery system option.
BP02-17B/C BP05-13A/B BP05-13E BP05-13F BP05-13G Function
CPU built-in analog circuit reference

- CP3 CP9 - -
voltage (+3.300 V) check terminal
- - - CP9 ←
voltage (+3.333 V) check terminal
13-22
Analog circuit photo coupler control

- CP4 CP1 ← ←
voltage (+24 V) check terminal
CP19 ← - - - +5 V voltage check terminal (+5 V)

CP21 - - - -
line reference voltage (+5.700V)
Check terminal for adjusting A/D
CP22 ← CP6 CP5 ←
converter reference voltage (+5.120 V)
Analog ground voltage check terminal
CP23 ← CP4 CP4 ←
(AGND)
-15 V line analog voltage check
CP24 ← CP10 CP11 ←
terminal (-15 V)
±15V line analog ground voltage check
CP25 ← CP11 CP13 ←
terminal (AGND)
O
CP26 ← CP5 - -
N line reference voltage (+2.500 V)
R
- - - CP6 ←
line reference voltage (+5 V)
Q
TE
+15 V line analog voltage check

SO Y
CP27 ← CP12 ← ←
terminal (+15 V)
IN
R

CP28 - - - - voltage (+3.300 V) check terminal
(BP02-17B only)
Analog circuit voltage check terminal
U
- CP28 CP7 ← ←
(+3.3 V)
CP29 ← CP8 ← ← +1.8 V voltage check terminal (+1.8 V)
CP30 ← CP17 CP15 ← +5 V voltage check terminal (+5 V)
CP31 ← CP16 ← ← +24 V voltage check terminal (+24V1)
CP32 ← CP13 CP14 ← +3.3 V voltage check terminal (+3.3 V)

CP33 ← CP18 CP17 ←
terminal (GND)
CP34 ← CP19 CP18 ←
terminal (+24V1GND)
JP1 ← - - - (ON = Short-circuit normally.)
13-23
JP2 ← JP1 - - (OFF = Open-circuit normally.)
JP3 ← JP2 JP1 ← (OFF = Open-circuit normally.)
Jumper for resetting P.C. board

JP4 ← ← JP3 ←
(Open-circuit normally.)
JP5 ← JP5 JP4 ← (OFF = Open-circuit normally.)
Jumper for Hardware debug

JP6 ← JP6 JP5 ←
(Open-circuit normally.)
Connector for monitoring (to Control
CN1 ← ← CN2 ←
P.C. Board - CN4)
Mother board connector upper block
CN2 ← ← CN5 ← control line input
(To Mother P.C. board - CN38)
Mother board connector lower block
O
control line input
CN4 ← ← CN6
N
← (To Mother P.C. board - CN37)
(Equal or later BP05-13#, there is the
R
slit as coding-key.)
Q
TE
External serial communication

SO Y
CN5 ← ← - -
connector
IN
R
Connector for monitoring (For Central

CN7
delivery system option)
DIP switch for function setting See
SW2 ← ← ← ←
NOTE below
U
DIP switch for function setting

SW3 ← ← ← ← [Do not change without special
instruction.]
NOTE) Function of DIP switch 2

SW2-1: P.C. board types BP02-17B and BP02-17C are set OFF.
P.C. board type BP05-13A and BP05-13B or later are set ON.
SW2-2 to SW2-8: Do not change without special instruction.

(Normal location)
BP02-17B BP02-17C BP05-13A,13B or later
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SW2 ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↑ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
NC：verification unnecessary [↓] means off. [↑] means on.
13-24
13.5.8. Replacement
trouble related with this P.C. board, such as the case when the machine does not start up, etc.
has occurred.
and push it along the guide rail groove. At first, lightly insert the P.C. board so that CN2 (upper
connector) and CN4 (lower connector) are engaged with the connectors of the Mother P.C.
board, and then forcibly push the white card puller sections at the upper and lower sections so
that the P.C. board is inserted to the depth.
problem.
O
13.5.9. Adjustment
N
R
machine.
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R
specific TYPE of machine. In case of this P.C.B, BP05-13A - E has a compatibility with the
machine of TYPE 2 (Need to load a program of software Ver.04.01 or later.) but not TYPE1.
BP02-17B does not have a compatibility with the machine of TYPE 2 or later. BP02-17C does
U
not have a compatibility with the machine of TYPE 1 and 3 or later.

BP05-13F and G does not have a compatibility with the machine of TYPE 1 - 4.
BP05-13F can be used with machine TYPE 5 and 6. However, it can not be used with machine
with Central delivery system option, because it does not have a connector for central delivery
system option.
BP05-13F can be used only in combination with BP05-12H (Control P.C. Board).
・ Certainly, flip on a Bit3 of Dip-SW3, before load the program of software Ver.05.02 from
Ver.05.01 or before. After loaded a program, turn back the DIP-SW.
(See chapter 13.4.7 about Control P. C. Board.)
・ CN4 of BP05-13A - E has coding-key that means there is the slit at CN4 of it and also there is
the marking point at other connector side CN37 of Mother board for TYPE3. Due to this
coding-key, BP02-17B/C cannot be used as replacement of BP05-13A - E (Physically,
impossible to connect). However, BP05-13A - E can be used as replacement of BP02-17B/C.
(BP05-13F and G does not have coding-key. It can not be used as replacement of
13-25
BP02-17B/C.)
version of machine. If those softwares are mismatched, machine does not work properly (May
got CPU error when turn on the machine). In this case, install the right software with Compact
Flash by software installation procedure
・ Be sure to insert the P.C. board to SLOT3 when inserting it. If inserted into a different slot, not
connectors of the mother P.C. board. Otherwise, the connectors will be damaged.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
13-26
13.6. Driver P.C. Board (BP02-18B, BP05-14#): DRIVER DRIVER DRIVER
SLOT 1 SLOT 1
13.6.1. Part allocation of BP02-18B, BP05-14A
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R
13.6.2. Part allocation of BP05-14D

U
13-27
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
13.6.4. General
IN
R
The driver P.C. board incorporates the drive circuits for A concentrate pump (P5), B concentrate
pump (P4), UF pump (UFP), syringe pump (HP), Level adjust pump (P6), clamp (CL1/2) and blood
pump (BP1) and also the capacitor for outputting alarm at the time of blackout. It is inserted into
SLOT1 of the Mother P.C. board inside the upper case of the machine.
U

The machine of TYPE 3 uses BP05-14A - D
The machine of TYPE 4 uses BP05-14D.
The machine of TYPE 5 and Type 6 uses BP05-14E or later.
BP02-18B BP05-14A BP05-14D BP05-14E Function
Voltage check terminal for adjusting pump drive

CP1 ← CP5 CP9
current (P4)
CP8 ← CP6 CP6
current (P5)
CP12 ← CP7 CP14
current (UFP)
13-28
BP02-18B BP05-14A BP05-14D BP05-14E Function

CP16 ← CP8 CP16
current (HP)
CP19 ← CP4 ← +5 V line ground voltage check terminal (GND)
CP20 ← CP3 ← +5 V voltage check terminal (+5V)
+24 V line ground voltage check terminal

CP21 ← CP2 ←
(+24V1GND)
CP22 ← CP1 ← +24 V voltage check terminal (+24V1)
VR1 ← ← - Variable resistor for adjusting pump drive current (P4)
VR2 ← ← - Variable resistor for adjusting pump drive current (P5)
Variable resistor for adjusting pump drive current

VR3 ← ← -
(UFP)
O
VR4 ← ← - Variable resistor for adjusting pump drive current (HP)
CN1 ← ← ←
N
Mother P.C. board connector upper block – control
R
line input (To Mother P.C. board - CN34)
Q
TE
Mother P.C. board connector upper block – drive line

SO Y
input (To Mother P.C. board - CN33)

CN2 ← ← ←
IN
R
(Equal or later BP05-14#, there is the slit as

coding-key.)
Jumper Pin (or DIP switch) to ensure the compatibility
- JP7 SW1 -
with BP02-18 and BP05-14. See NOTE below.
U
NOTE) BP05-14A equips Jumper Pin (JP7), and BP05-14B equips DIP switch1 (SW1) to ensure the
compatibility with old type P.C.Board (BP02-18).
BP05-14A can work as BP02-18 by connecting Jumper Pin (JP7). Also, BP05-14B can work by
turning on DIP switch 1-1.
You can use BP05-14A/D as replacement for BP02-18B by changing configuration of boards
described above.
(Status)
BP02-18B BP05-14A BP05-14D BP05-14E
Open Short
JP7 Not equipped. Not equipped. Not equipped
(Normal) (Modified)
SW1-1 Not equipped. ← ← OFF ON Not equipped
Machine TYPE 1 / 2 TYPE 3 / 4 TYPE 1 / 2 TYPE 3 / 4 TYPE 1 / 2 TYPE 5
(DIP switch1-2 on BP05-14D has no function.)
13-29
13.6.6. Replacement
trouble related with this P.C. board, such as the case when a pump does not rotate, etc. has
occurred.
・ Turn OFF the power breaker and take measures against the static electricity when replacing the
P.C. board.
・ Since electric double-layer capacitors (Super Capacitor) is mounted to output alarm in case of
blackout, do not contact with a conductor and other P.C. boards when pulling out or inserting
this P.C. board or placing it on the table temporarily. Besides, discharge the residual electricity in
the capacitor when only the P.C. board is stored just in case for preventing if this part touches by
mistake to other IC of the P.C.B to made damaging. (Regarding of the procedure for how to
discharge it, For example, discharge the electricity by short-circuiting both ends of a capacitor
O
around a few seconds or output an alarm by shutting down the power supply with the breaker,
etc.)
N
R
Q
TE
and push it along the guide rail groove. At first, lightly insert the P.C. board so that CN1 and CN2
are engaged with the connectors of the mother P.C. board, and then push the white card puller
SO Y
IN
sections at the upper and lower sections strongly so that the P.C. board is inserted to the depth.
R
problem.
13.6.7. Adjustment
U
machine.
13.6.8. Precautions
specific TYPE of machine. In case of this P.C.B, There is no compatible with BP02-18B and
BP05-14A and D or later in case without any modification (Please refer to the explanation of
JP7/SW1).
・ CN2 of BP05-14A and D has coding-key that means there is the slit at CN2 of it and also there is
the marking point at other connector side CN33 of Mother board for equal or later of TYPE 3.
Due to this coding-key, BP02-18B cannot be used as replacement of BP05-14A and D
(Physically, impossible to connect).
BP05-14E does not have coding-key. It is not the compatibility with previous P.C. Boards.
13-30
・ Physically, BP05-14A - D can be connected with previous model that TYPE 1 and 2. (with
BP02-14A Mother P.C. board) even no compatible. If service engineer does it by mistake, level
adjuster pump does not work. However in this case, you should bring the modified BP05-14A -
D (See 13.6.4 Function of each part above), it can be worked as replacement for TYPE1 and 2
without level adjuster pump problem.
・ Be sure to insert this P.C. board to SLOT1 when inserting it. If inserted into a different slot, not
connectors on the mother P.C. board. Otherwise, the connectors will be damaged.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
13-31
13.7. Mother P.C. board (BP02-14A, BP05-11#) (“#” can be replaced with capital alphabets like A, B, C, etc)
13.7.1. Part allocation of BP02-14A
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
13-32
13.7.2. Part allocation of BP05-11A-C
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
13-33
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
13-34
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
13.7.5. General
The control P.C. board, the Monitor P.C. Board, and the driver P.C. board are inserted into this
mother P.C. board and this P.C. board relays and branches the signals of various sensors, pumps,
valves, etc. and supplies power to each P.C. board. The mother P.C. board is positioned at the
depth inside the upper case of the machine.
The machine of TYPE 1 and TYPE 2 uses BP02-14A.
The machine of TYPE 3 and 4 uses BP05-11A - C.
The machine of TYPE 5 uses BP05-11D.
The machine of TYPE6 uses BP05-11D or later.
BP05-11E is available for use Central delivery system option.
13-35
BP05-11A -
BP02-14A BP05-11D BP05-11E Function
C
BZ1 ← ← ← Buzzer activated when key-in operation is made
+24V power input (24V1) connector for pumps

CN1 ← ← ←
and valves (from power supply unit CN4)
CN2 ← ← ← Blood pump BP1 output connector (to BP1)
CN3 ← ← ← Blood pump BP2 output connector (to BP2)
CN4 ← ← ← Syringe pump HP output connector (to HP)
Power supply control signal input connector

CN5 ← ← ←
(From power supply unit CN8)
O
CN6 ← ← ← Color lamps output connector (to color lamps)
N
Speaker output connector (to Sound Volume P.C.
← ← ←
R
CN7
board - CN1)
Q
TE
Power supply control signal output connector

CN8 ← ← ←
SO Y

IN
R
LCD display P.C. board I/O connector

CN9 ← ← ←
(To LCD Display P.C. Board - CN12)
Power supply input (+12V, ±15V, +24V2, +24V3)
CN10 ← ← ← connector
U
CN11 ← ← ← Valve signal output connector (to V71-V74)
Level adjustment switch input connector (from

CN12 ← ← ← Level Adjustment Switch P.C.Board -CN1: 4 P.C.
boards at maximum)
Clamp (CL1, CL2) and pump (P6) output
CN13 ← ← ← connector
(To CL1, CL2, P6)
Pump (P2) drive control output connector (to
CN14 ← ← ←
Pump Driver P.C.Board - CN2)
Switch, blood leak detector, and rotation sensor
CN15 ← ← ← signal input connector (from SW12-19, BD, RP2,
RC1, RC2)
13-36
BP05-11A -
C
Air bubble detector (ABD) analog input, control,
and power supply output connector (from Air
CN16 ← ← ←
Bubble Detector P.C.Board – CN1/JP1 and
CN3/JP3)
Blood pressure sensor (PG4-PG6) analog input
CN17 ← ← ← and signal power supply output connector
(From Blood Pressure Sensor P.C.Board - CN1)
Valve (V01-V64) signal output connector
CN18 ← ← ←
(To Connector P.C.Board - CN13)
Switch (SW1-11, FW, FS1-3) and rotation sensor
CN19 ← ← ← (RP1) signal input connector (from Connector
P.C.Board - CN2)
Conductivity sensor (CD1-CD4) analog input and
CN20 signal power supply output connector
O
(From Conductivity Sensor P.C.Board - CN5)
N
Valves (For Central delivery system option)
R
CN20 signal output connector. (To Connector P.C.
Q
TE
Board – CN22)
SO Y
Pump (P1) drive control output connector

← ← ←
IN
CN21
R
(To Pump Driver P.C.Board - CN1)
CN22 ← ← ← Pump (UFP) drive output connector (to UFP)
CN23 ← ← ← Pump (P5) drive switch output connector (to P5)

U
CN24 ← ← ← Pump (P4) drive switch output connector (to P4)
Dialysate pressure sensor (PG1-3) analog input

and signal power supply output connector
CN25 ← ← ←
(From Dialysate Pressure Sensor P.C.Board -
CN2)
Blood leak detector (BLD) analog input, control,
CN26 ← ← ← and power supply output connector (from blood
leak detector)
Temperature sensor (T6) input connector (from
CN27 ← ← ←
T6)
CN28 ← - -
T5) (not usable)
CN29 ← ← ←
T4)
13-37
BP05-11A -
C
CN30 ← ← ←
T3)
CN31 ← ← ←
T2)
CN32 ← ← ←
T1)
Driver P.C. board I/O connector lower block
SLOT1 (to Driver P.C.Board - CN2)
CN33 ← ← ←
(Equal or later BP05-11#, there is the Mark
point as coding-key.)
Driver P.C. board I/O connector upper block
CN34 ← ← ←
SLOT1 (To Driver P.C.Board - CN1)
Control P.C. board I/O connector lower block
CN35 ← ← ←
SLOT2 (To Control P.C.Board - CN7)
O
Control P.C. board I/O connector upper block
CN36 ← ← ←
N
SLOT2 (To Control P.C.Board - CN8)
R
(Equal or later BP05-11#, there is the Mark point
Q
TE
as coding-key.)
Monitor P.C. Board I/O connector lower block
SO Y
SLOT3 (to Monitor P.C. Board - CN4)

IN
R
CN37 ← ← ←
(Equal or later BP05-11#, there is the Mark point
as coding-key.)
Monitor P.C. Board I/O connector upper block
CN38 ← ← ←
SLOT3 (To Monitor P.C. Board - CN2)
U
Extension P.C. board I/O connector lower block

CN39 ← ← ←
SLOT4 (Not usable)
Extension P.C. board I/O connector upper block
CN40 ← ← ←
SLOT4 (Not usable)
- CN41 ← ← NIBP power supply output (Not usable)
Heater control signal output connector (to
- CN42 ← ←
SSR-BOX)
Conductivity sensor (CD1-CD4), analog input
- CN43 ← ← and signal power supply output connector
(From Conductivity Sensor P.C.Board - CN5)
13-38
13.7.7. Replacement
・ Remove the front panel of the upper case that is located on the rear side of the operating
section and it is fixed with 4 screws. Then disconnect all the harnesses connected to the Mother
P.C. board. After that, remove the rear cover at the upper case, and pull out the driver P.C.
board, the control P.C. board, the Monitor P.C. Board (Refer the explanation of replacement for
each P.C.B). Since Mother P.C. board is fixed on the steel plate with six screws, unscrew these
screws and remove the mother P.C. board.
・ When mounting the Mother P.C. board to the machine, take caution not to mix up the top and
bottom (not upside down) and also the front and rear. Besides, correctly wire the cables.
problem.
13.7.8. Adjustment
No adjustment is required.
13.7.9. Precautions
O
N
machine TYPE or not. Because some types of P.C.B can not be used (no compatible) with
R
specific TYPE of machine. In case of this P.C.B, There is no compatibility between BP02-14A,
BP05-11A - C and BP05-11D. CN20 of BP02-14A and CN43 of BP05-11# are located similar
Q
TE
position of connector that is connected to Conductivity sensor board. However those pin
SO Y
number is different and physically, it is not able to connect even if the engineer replaced
IN
R
incorrect version of this P.C.B by mistake. And also, CN33, 36 and 37 of BP05-11A - C has
coding-key that is marking points. Due to this coding-key, it is not able to insert the previous
version of Slot 1, 2 and 3 to BP05-11A-C. And also, CN41 and CN42 are not existed on the
BP02-14A. For this reason even if the engineer try to use BP02-14A as replacement of
BP05-11# by mistake, they cannot connect the harness from SSR box that is suppose to
U
connect on the CN42.

BP05-11D - E does not have coding-key, but the positions of from CN33 to CN40 of BP05-11D -
E are different from the BP02-14A and BP05-11A-C.
BP05-11E can be compatible with machine TYPE 5 and 6. However, it can not be compatible
with them with Central delivery system option, because it does not have a connector for option
valve signal output.
・ When inserting the driver P.C. board, the control P.C. board, and the Monitor P.C. Board, be
sure to insert them to the correct positions. Otherwise, the P.C. boards will be damaged.
・ Take sufficient caution when handling the harness. Hold the connector housing when inserting
or pulling out the harness.
13-39
13.8. Blood Pressure Sensor P.C. Board (BP01-19#) (“#” can be replaced with capital alphabets like A, B, C, etc)
O
13.8.1. General
N
R
The blood pressure sensor P.C. board is mounted as the metal unit at the rear side of the front
Q
TE
door and outputs the analog signal in proportion to the pressure in the bloodline measured through
SO Y
the transducer.
IN
R
Item Function
U
CP1 +15V line ground voltage check terminal
CP2 Check terminal for adjusting reference voltage (+1.230V)
CP3 0V adjustment check terminal (- side)
CP6 Blood pressure analog output check terminal
CP8 Check terminal for 0V adjustment (+ side)

Blood pressure analog output and test input connector (to
CN1
Mother P.C. board - CN17)
SN1 Transducer
13-40
13.8.3. Replacement
・ In order to replace this P.C. board, remove full assembly from the machine first for easier
disassembling to access the P.C.B. Besides, hold the connector housing when connecting or
disconnecting the cable. Also, make sure the connector direction when connecting the cable.
The tubing must be fixed by tie band to the transducer for prevent removing of the tube by high
pressure.
・ After replacement, calibrate it as follow the Blood pressure (Ven/Art etc) calibration procedure
(Chapter 15). After then, operate the machine and confirm there is no problem with the new one
for pass the start up test, preparation and simulation of treatment mode.
13.8.4. Adjustment
No adjustment is required for the P.C.B. since it is already adjusted at manufacture before the
shipment of the machine. However, there is calibration procedure for fine adjustment by software
as follow the Blood Pressure (Ven/Art) calibration procedure (Chapter 15).
O
13.8.5. Precautions
N
R
・ Note that the tube connected with the pressure sensor comes off easily. The tubing must be
Q
TE
fixed by tie band to the transducer for prevent removing of the tube by high pressure.
・ Do not give a mechanical shock to the transducer. (The transducer will be damaged.)
SO Y
IN

R
・ P.C.Board number is printed (marked) in the P.C.Board back.

U
13-41
13.9. Dialysate Pressure Sensor P.C. Board (BP03-01#)
(“#” can be replaced with capital alphabets like A, B, C, etc)
13.9.1. General
This is the P.C. board that directly measures the pressure of the dialysate line and outputs the
O
analog output in proportion to the pressure.
N
R
Q
TE
Item Function
SO Y
IN
CN1 Connector for transducer of Dialysate pressure sensor

R
Hydraulic pressure analog output and test input connector

CN2
U
13.9.3. Replacement
・ For the replacement, open the front door and draw out the dialysate hydraulic unit, disconnect
the tube connected to the dialysate pressure sensor Assembly, and then remove the cover of
the dialysate pressure sensor Assembly and remove the cable connected to CN2.
・ After replacement, calibrate it as follow the DP calibration procedure (Chapter 15). After then,
operate the machine and confirm there is no problem with the new one for pass the start up test,
preparation and simulation of treatment mode.
13.9.4. Adjustment
No adjustment is required for the P.C.B. since it is already adjusted at manufacture before the
shipment of the machine. However, there is calibration procedure for fine adjustment by software
as follow the DP calibration procedure (Chapter 15).
13-42
13.9.5. Precautions
・ There are soldering type and connector type to connect between Dialysate Pressure P.C.Board
and Pressure sensing module. P.C.Board and sensing module have already calibrated in pairs
at manufacture before the shipment of the machine. Connector type can separate sensing
module from P.C.B, but NEVER use with other Pressure P.C.B. It may cause of measuring
incorrect value
・ You should purchase and replace full DP Assy. But there are 2 types of non compatible DP Assy
that TYPE 1 and TYPE 2 due to different shapes of bracket even P.C.B itself is compatible. (See
explanation of DP Assy section of Chapter 11)
・ Note that CN1 for connecting the previous dialysate pressure sensor element easily comes off.
・ When disconnecting the tube, block the tube with a clamp so as not to splash the residual
dialysate inside the tube. Besides, prevent dialysate from splashing since it also remains inside
(the resin of) the dialysate pressure sensor element. Especially, take caution not to splash
dialysate to the electrical equipment, and if splashed on it, immediately wipe it off.
O
・ P.C.Board number is printed (marked) in the P.C.Board back
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
13-43
13.10. Conductivity Sensor P.C. Board (BP03-16#) (“#” can be replaced with capital alphabets like A, B, etc)
13.10.1. Part allocation of BP03-16 /A
O
N
R
13.10.2. Part allocation of BP03-16B
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
13-44
O
13.10.4. General
N
R
The conductivity sensor P.C. board is mounted at the top of the hydraulic unit inside the lower case
Q
TE
of the machine and outputs the analog signal in proportion to the conductivity of the dialysate line,
SO Y
the conductivity cell connected to it.

IN
R
The machine of TYPE 1 and TYPE 2 uses BP03-16 or BP03-16A.

The machine of TYPE 3 and uses BP03-16B or later.
The machine of TYPE 4 and uses BP03-16D or later.
U

BP03-16/A BP03-16B BP03-16D Function
0V ← CP51/52 Ground voltage check terminal
15V ← - +15V voltage check pad
-8V ← - -8V voltage check pad (BP03-16B has pads for each channel)
-15V ← - -15V voltage check pad
- - CP50 +12V voltage check terminal
- - CP49 -12V voltage check terminal
- - CP1 -2.5V voltage check terminal for 1ch

13-45
BP03-16/A BP03-16B BP03-16D Function
OUT1 ← CP8 Conductivity analog output check terminal (CD1)
CN1 ← ← Conductivity cell connector (to conductivity cell CD1)
O
N
Conductivity analog output and test signal input connector
R
(To Mother P.C. board – CN20 at BP03-16/16A, to Mother P.C.
Q
TE
CN5 ← ←
board – CN43 at BP03-16B or later)
SO Y
(Equal or later BP03-16B, Pin 9 is cut due to the coding-Pin.)

IN
R
13.10.6. Replacement
・ To replace the P.C. board, open the front door of the lower case and draw out the hydraulic unit
U
and then remove its top plate. Then, pull out the cables and remove the screws.
・ Be sure to connect the cables correctly at the replacement. Also, actually operate the machine
and confirm that there is no problem with the P.C. board. After the replacement of the P.C. board
・ Take sufficient caution when inserting or pulling out the cables, always grabbing their connector
housing.
・ Take care not to drop the removed screw to other parts.
13.10.7. Adjustment
machine.
13-46
specific TYPE of machine. In case of this P.C.B, BP03-16B or later has a compatibility with the
machine of TYPE 1 and TYPE 2. But BP03-16 and BP03-16A does not have a compatibility with
the machine of TYPE 3 and 4.
・ CN5 of BP03-16B or later has coding-pin that means Pin No.9 is cut at CN5 of Conductivity
board and also harness side of same Pin No.9 position hole is blocked. Due to this coding-pin,
BP02-16/16A cannot be used as replacement of BP03-16B or later (Physically, impossible to
connect). However, BP03-16B or later can be used as replacement of BP02-16/16A.
・ Take sufficient caution when handling the connection cables.
・ Also, take caution not to splash dialysate to other parts during the maintenance of the dialysate
line.
・ Take caution not to splash dialysate to this P.C.Board, and if splashed on it, immediately wipe it
O
off.
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
13-47
13.11. Air Bubble Detector P.C. Board
13.11.1. Part allocation of 23SD-543, 26SD-520#
VR1
TP2
TP1
R14
TP2
JP1
(CN1)
VR3 VR4
VR2
D2
TP3
R18
R19
JP2
R30
D4
TP4
JP3
TP5
(CN2)
TP6
(CN3)
23SD-543
TP0
P.C.B Type
(26SD520A)
VR6
display position VR5
O
TP7
N
R
13.11.2. Part allocation of 35SD-513A
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
P.C.B Type
display position
13.11.3. General
The air bubble detector P.C. board is mounted with cover at the lower part on the rear side of the
front door and outputs the analog signal in proportion to the size of the air bubbles inside the
bloodline, with the ultrasonic sensor element connected to it.
23SD-543 and 26SD-520A or later are the same P.C. Board functionally.
By changing of jumper JP6 settings, 35SD-513A is compatible with 23SD-543 and 26SD520A.
13-48
23SD-543 26SD-520A 35SD-513A Function
Power supply input connector
CN1/JP1 ← ←
(to Mother P.C. board - CN16)
Ultrasonic sensor element connector
CN2/JP2 ← ←
(To ultrasonic sensor element)
Analog signal output and test signal input
CN3/JP3 ← JP4
TP2 TP0 JP10 Air bubble detector analog ground check terminal
D4 (Jumper) TP2 JP18 Air bubble detector output check terminal
JP6 Test signal type changing jumper block
・ When replacing this P.C. board, open the front door and remove the cover. Also, grab the
connector housing when disconnecting the cables.
O
N
13.11.6. Adjustment
R
Q
TE
machine.
SO Y
IN
R
・ “23SD-435” and a part of “26SD-520A” are equipped the P. C. B with Q4 transistor.
Before use these P. C. B, need to remove Q4 transistor.
・ When replace the P.C. Board, need to confirm and change the jumper setting and software
U
setting. When wrong these settings, the machine alarms the “Sensor fault”,“Find air bubble” or
“Total bubble over” continuously during detecting the saline or blood.
Air Bubble P.C Software setting

Software Version Jumper setting
Board (Machine Type: ABD)
23SD-543 Ver. 5.20 or before
26SD-520# Ver. 6.00 or later 0
Ver. 5.20 or before B-C
35SD-513A Ver. 6.00 0 B-C
Ver. 6.01 or later 1 A-C
The jumper pin of the 35D-513A
13-49
13.12. Sound Volume P.C. Board (BP01-24)
13.12.1. General
The sound Volume P.C. board is mounted with the buzzer to the buzzer fixing bracket of the upper
case and incorporates the variable resistor (VR) to adjust the volume of the alarm and melody
sounds.
O
Item
N
Function
R
VR1 Variable resistor for volume adjustment
Q
TE
CN1 Buzzer connector

SO Y
CN2 Aural signal input connector (to Mother P.C. board - CN7)
IN
R
・ Remove the fixing bracket and replace the P.C. board. At this time, take caution not to pull the
cables.
U
13.12.4. Adjustment
Adjust the variable resistor to its maximum volume. (Volume increases when the VR is turned
counterclockwise.)
No special precaution is required.
13-50
13.13. LED Lamp P.C. Board (BP01-25#) (“#” can be replaced with capital alphabets like A, B, C, etc)
O
N
R
Q
TE
13.13.1. General
SO Y
The LED lamp P.C. board is mounted inside the case at the membrane panel switch section and
IN
R
performs the lamp ON/OFF indication.

Item Function
U
LD1 Power ON lamp (red and green)

LD2 AC power supply lamp (yellow)
LD3 Battery charge lamp (when equipped with battery: red and green)
LD4 Alarm lamp (red and green)
LD5 Blood pump (BP1) operation lamp (green)
CN1 (To LCD Display P.C. Board - CN13)
・ To replace this P.C. board, remove the rear cover at the operating section, the cover, and the
LCD display P.C. board in advance. At that time, take sufficient caution when pulling out or
inserting the cables.
・ When removing the cover, remove the screws supporting it with hand so that the cover does not
fall. Also, take caution on the handling of the cover since the touch panel and the LCD panel are
attached to it.
13-51
13.13.4. Adjustment
Take caution not to bend the LED pins.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
13-52
13.14. Level Adjustment Switch P.C. Board (BP01-50#) (“#” can be replaced with capital alphabets like A, B, C, etc)
13.14.1. General
The level adjustment switch P.C. board is mounted inside the front door and makes the level
adjustment of the bloodline.
The machine of TYPE 1 and TYPE 2 uses white key-top of SW1 and SW2.
The machine of TYPE 3 and 4 uses gray key-top of SW1 and SW2. It can be compatible by
changing the key top.
O
Item Function
CN1
N
Switch output connector (to Mother P.C. board - CN12)
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
・ Note that the key top (white or gray) may come off.
R
・ Take caution not to mount the P.C. board upside down. Also, actually operate the P.C. board and
confirm the level adjustment in both the upper and lower directions.
U
13.14.4. Adjustment
No special caution is required.
13-53
13.15. LCD Connector Conversion P.C. Board (BP02-30#)
13.15.1. General
The LCD connector conversion P.C. board is secured at the back of LCD panel and relays the
O
signal from the LCD display P.C. board to the LCD panel.
When the Operation Panel is Type2 or later, LCD Connector Conversion P.C. Board is
N
unnecessary.
R
Q
TE

Item Function
SO Y
IN
CN1 LCD signal input connector (to LCD Display P.C. Board - CN2)
R
CN4 LCD signal output connector (to LCD panel- CN1)
U
・ To replace this P.C. board, remove the rear cover at the control panel and remove the LCD
display P.C. board in advance. At that time, take sufficient caution when pulling out or inserting
the cables.
・ Insert in CN4 firmly to the connector of the LCD panel at the time of replacement.
・ There are a machine, which is carrying out the screw stop of this P.C.Board to the LCD panel,
and a machine, which is using the P.C.Board fixing bracket. Since it is fixing to the LCD panel
using a small screw (M2x6 ISO metric thread with a washer and a spring washer) in the case of
the former machine, be careful not to lose at the time of replacement.
13.15.4. Adjustment
13-54
・ BP02-30A1 has no compatibility with BP02-30A. Connector shapes of CN1 to CN3 of
BP02-30A1 are different from them of BP02-30A. So replacing BP02-30A to BP02-30A1,
replace harness connected to CN1 to CN3 of BP02-30A at a time.
・ BP02-30A”2” is designed for LCD display “LQ121S1DG42”. Replacing display from
LQ121S1DG31 or 41 to LQ121S1DG”42”, please replace this Board from BP02-30A or A1 to A2
at a time.
・ The LCD Display “TCG121SVLPB*” connect directly with LCD Display P.C. Board “BP02-15H”
or later. So LCD Connector Conversion P.C. Board and harnesses are unnecessary.
・ Please do not combine different combinations. It may cause of display defect.
Compatibility Table
Associated LCD connector
LCD Display Type Associated Harnesses
CN1: D04-6343
BP02-30A CN2: D04-6342
O
LQ121S1DG31 CN3: D04-6341
LQ121S1DG41
N CN1: D11-6029
R
BP02-30A1 CN2: D11-6028
Q
TE
CN3: D11-6027
CN1: D04-6343
SO Y
BP02-30A
IN
CN2: D04-6342
R
(Need to remove the capacitor)

CN3: D04-6341
LQ121S1DG42 BP02-30A1 CN1: D11-6029
(Need to remove the capacitor) CN2: D11-6028
U
BP02-30A2 CN3: D11-6027
TCG121SVLPB* Unnecessary
13-55
・ The LCD display “LQ121S1DG42” marked on the connectors. It ware connected to CN2 and
CN3 on Inverter P.C. board.
Marking (Red line)
From LCD display “LQ121S1DG42”
O
N
Inverter P.C board (See chapter “13.18.”)
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
13-56
13.16. Connector P.C. Board (BP02-31#) (“#” can be replaced with capital alphabets like A, B, C, etc)
13.16.1. Part allocation of BP02-31B/ C/ D/ E
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN

U R
13-57
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
13.16.4. General
IN
R
The.Connector P.C. board is mounted at the top of the hydraulic unit inside the lower case and
relays switch input signals, valve output signals, flow switch input signals, float level switch input
signal, and rotation sensor input signal to or from the Mother P.C. board.
U

The machine of TYPE 3 uses BP02-31C, D, E.
The machine of TYPE 4 and Type 5 uses BP02-31F.
The machine of TYPE 6 uses BP02-31F or later.
BP02-31G is available for use Central delivery system option.
13-58
BP02-31
BP02-31F BP02-31G Function
B/ C/ D/ E
CP1 CP2 ← +24 V (power input) voltage check terminal
CP2 CP1 ← +24 V line ground voltage check terminal
CP3 ← ← +5 V (power input) voltage check terminal
CP4 ← ← Ground voltage check terminal
Power supply input (+24 V, +5 V) connector (to power supply unit
CN1 ← ←
CN9)
Switches (SW1-11), Flow switches (FS1-3), Float level switch
CN2 ← ← (FW), and Rotation sensor (RP1) output connector (to Mother P.C.
board - CN19)
CN3 ← ← [For option] Switch input connector (to SW1, SW2)
CN4 ← ← [Not used] Switch input connector (to SW3)
CN5 [Not used] Switch input connector (to SW11) [Factory option.]
O
CN6 ← ← Switch input connector (to SW4, SW6)
N
CN7 ← ← Switch input connector (to SW9, SW10)
R
CN8 ← ← Float switch input connector (to FW)
Q
TE
CN9 Flow switch (Proximity sensor) input connector (to FS1)

SO Y
CN10 Flow switch (Proximity sensor) input connector (to FS2)

IN
R
CN11 ← ← [Not used] Flow switch input connector (to FS3)

CN12 ← ← Rotation sensor input connector (to RP1a, RP1b)
Valve input (V1-V64, spare) (to Mother P.C. board - CN18)
CN13 ← ←
(Equal or later BP02-31C, Pin 36 is cut due to the coding-Pin.)
U
Valve output connector (To V1, V2, V3, V4, V5, V12, V13, V14,
CN14 ← ←
V15, V35)
Valve output connector (To V21, V22, V23, V24, V25, V26, V27,
CN15 ← ←
V28, V43)
Valve output connector
CN16 ← ←
(To V11, V16, V31, V32, V33, V34, V41, V42, V51, V52)
[Not used] Valve output connector
CN17
(To V61, V62, V63, V64, and spare) [Factory option.]
CN18 Valve output connector (For Central delivery system option)
CN19 ← Flow switch (Photo sensor) input connector (to FS1)
CN20 ← Flow switch (Photo sensor) input connector (to FS2)
Valve (For Central delivery system option) signal input connector.
CN22
(Mother P.C. Board – CN20)
13-59
・ Be sure to connect the cables correctly at the replacement. Also, actually operate the machine
and confirm that there is no problem with the P.C. board. After the replacement of the P.C. board
housing.
13.16.7. Adjustment
O
N
R
specific TYPE of machine. In case of this P.C.B, BP02-31C to E has a compatibility with the
Q
TE
machine of TYPE 1 and TYPE 2. But BP02-31B or before does not have a compatibility with the
machine of TYPE 3. And, BP02-31F or later dose not have a compatibitiry with the machine type
SO Y
IN
3 or before.
R
Both BP02-31F and 31G are available for use in Machine TYPE 6. However, need to replace a
harness or change a cording pin location when replace the boards each other.
U
Coding pin (No. 36) Coding pin (No. 34)
Fig. Relation of Connector boards and Harnesses
・ CN13 of BP02-31C or later has coding-pin that means Pin No.36 (31C - F) or No.34(31G) are
cut at CN13 of Connector board and also harness side of same Pin No.36 (for 31C - F) or No.34
(for 31G) position hole are blocked. Due to this coding-pin, BP02-31B cannot be used as
13-60
replacement of BP02-31C or later (Physically, impossible to connect). However, BP02-31C and
D can be used as replacement of BP02-31B.
BP02-31E or later can not be used as replacement of BP02-31B (The harness can connect to
connector No.13, but the other connector can not connect.)
・ Take sufficient caution when handling the connection cable.
off.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
13-61
13.17. Pump Driver P.C. Board (BP03-10#) (“#” can be replaced with capital alphabets like A, B, C, etc)
13.17.1. Part allocation of BP03-10A /D
NOTE) BP03-10D does not have the Heatsinks.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
13.17.3. General
The pump driver P.C. board is mounted at the top of the hydraulic unit inside the lower case and
drives and controls the pumps P1 and P2.
Variations of BP03-10A /B /D have a compatible with each other.
BP03-10E does not have a compatible with the BP03-10A /B /D.
Connector CN5 of the BP03-10E can not be used in combination with Magnet gear pump
“MDG-R2BA21-51”.
13-62
BP03-10A /D BP03-10E Function
Power supply and control signal input connector for pump (P1)
CN1 ←
(To Mother P.C. board – CN21)
Power supply and control signal input connector for pump (P2)
CN2 ←
Pump (P1) drive power supply and control signal output
CN3
connector (to P1)
CN4 ←
connector (to P2)
CN5
connector (to P1)
F1 ← Fuse for pump P1 drive circuit (Tube fuse: AC250V T3.15AL)
O
F2 ← Fuse for pump P2 drive circuit (Tube fuse: AC250V T3.15AL)
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R
housing.
・ Be sure to turn OFF the power breaker when replacing the fuse.
U
・ Use the following fuse.

Glass tube type midget fuse: AC250V T3.15AL (250V 3A 5.2×20mm)
・ Take caution not to incorrectly connect the signal cables of the pumps P1 and P2. Perform the
operation check to confirm that the cables are correctly connected after the replacement of the
P.C. board.
13.17.6. Adjustment
machine.
・ Variations of BP03-10A /B /D have a compatible with each other.
・ BP03-10E does not have a compatible with the BP03-10A /B /D.
・ A fuse may be broken since it is a glass tube. Take sufficient caution when handling a fuse.
13-63
・ Take caution not to catch dialysate when servicing the hydraulic.
・ BP03-10D does not equip Heat sinks.
off.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
13-64
13.18. Inverter P.C. Board
13.18.1. Inverter P.C. Board (CXA-P1212B-WJL/ CXA-P1212E-WJL)
13.18.2. Inverter P.C. Board (ALD-310012PJ125)
O
N
R
Q
TE
13.18.3. General
SO Y
The inverter P.C. board is mounted in the vicinity of the LCD display P.C. board inside the case of
IN
R
the operating section and it is for the back lights attached to the LCD panel.
The Inverter P.C. Board “CXA-P1212*” is used to LCD Panel “LQ121S1DG*”.
The Inverter P.C. Board “ALD-310012PJ125” is used to LCD Panel “TCG121SVLPB*”.
U

ALD-310012
CXA-P1212* Function
PJ125
CN1 CN1 Inverter supply input connector (LCD Display P.C. Board - CN9)
CN2 CN2
Inverter output connector (To LCD Panel)
CN3
・ To replace the P.C. board, remove the rear cover at the operating section.
・ Hold the connector housing when inserting or pulling out the cables.
・ Connections to CN2 and CN3 of CXA-P1212* are interchangeable.
13-65
13.18.6. Adjustment
When touching the surrounding of the inverter P.C. board, turn OFF the power supply or put
insulation material on the P.C. board so as not to touch it directly since there is a possibility of an
electric shock because a high voltage (around 1700V) is impressed on it.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
13-66
13.19. UFP encoder P.C. Board (BP05-34 /34A)
13.19.1. General
The UFP encoder P.C. board is mounted on the UF pump, and outputs pulses according to rotation
of the pump. (RP1a, RP1b:one pulse per rotation)

Item Function
O
CN1 N
Pulses (RP1a, RP1b) output connector (to Connector P.C. Board – CN12)
R
PC1 Photo sensor
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R
・ For the replacement, open the front door of the lower case and draw out the hydraulic unit. After
removing the harness connected to UFP encoder P.C. Board, remove the UF pump unit from
the frame. (It’s not necessary for removing the tube.) Remove the fixing bracket with the UFP
U
encoder P.C.Board from UF pump unit and replace the P.C.Board.

13.19.4. Adjustment
・ This P. C. Board is only available machine TYPE 3 or later.
・ Take caution not to splash dialysate to this P.C. Board, and if splashed on it, immediately wipe it
off.
13-67
13.20. Syringe Pump Encoder P.C. Board (BP13-11)
NOTE) This P.C. board was used to TYPE 5 or later machine.
13.20.1. General
Syringe Pump EncorderP.C. Board is mounted on the Syringe Pump Unit, and outputs pulses
according to moving of the pump.
O
Item Function
N
Pulses (RP1a, RP1b) output connector (to Connector P.C. Board – CN12)
R
CN1
Q
TE
PC1 Encorder
SO Y
IN
R
・ For the replacement, open the front door of the lower case. Remove the Cover of Syringe Pump
Encorder that is mounted on the Syringe Pump unit in the inside of the front door. Dismount the
U
PG4a P.C.board unit (right side of the Syiringe Pump unit) and unscrew the right side screw of
this P.C. board bracket. At this time, disconnect the cable. Unscrew the three screws and
dismount this P.C. board and replace it. After replacement, mount them in reverse order.
13.20.4. Adjustment
・ This P. C. Board is only available machine TYPE 5.
13-68
13.21. BLD Conversion P.C. Board
NOTE) This P.C. Board is for BLD conversion Unit.
13.21.1. General
O
This P.C.board is mounted on BLD Conversion Unit, and Type 3 BLD can be use as Type 2 BLD by using
BLD Conversion Unit.
N
R
Q
TE

SO Y
Item Function
IN
R
Power and Test signal input and converted Analog signal output connector (To
J1
mother P.C. Board)
J4 Power signal output and Analog signal input connector (To BLD Type 3)
U
CP1 Grand voltage check terminal
CP2 + 12 V voltage check terminal (+12V)
CP3 + 5 V voltage check terminal (+5V)
CP4 - 12 V voltage check terminal (-12V)
CP7 + 15V voltage check terminal (+15V)
・ For the replacement, open the front door of the lower case and draw out the hydraulic unit. After
removing the Dialysate Flow pass unit of BLD (It’s not necessary for removing the tube.),
remove the BLD conversion unit from unit base. Remove the harness connected to BLD
conversion unit. Separate the converter case and remove the harness connected to P.C. Board.
13-69
Replace the P.C.Board, reassemble and re-fix the unit.
problem with the BLD conversion unit.
13.21.4. Adjustment
This P. C. Board is only available BLD conversion unit (can not use only P.C. board).
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
13-70
14 TECHNICIAN MODE AND MAKER MODE
14.1. TECHNICIAN Mode and MAKER Mode

The operators of this dialysis machine are classified into 3 groups (NURSE, TECHNICIAN, and
MAKER) according to the level of required operations for the purpose of safety. The TECHNICIAN
mode is used by qualified persons for the daily maintenance and inspection while the MAKER mode
is used by the manufacturer of this machine for the inspection on the machine’s delivery, etc.
A PASS I.D. is necessary for the operation in each mode excepting the NURSE mode. Strictly control
the PASS I.D. so that any person excepting properly qualified operators cannot change the
parameters.
A PASS I.D. is a combination of numerals up to eight digits.
The default PASS I.D. set upon shipment is as follows:
Mode PASS I.D.
TECHNICIAN 458
MAKER 119
O
DANGER
N
In TECHNICIAN and MAKER modes, a wrong setting can cause machine malfunction as well as
R
significant damage in the patient. Be sure to change the PASS I.D. after installing the machine.
Manage the PASS I.D. under strict conditions.
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
CAUTION
R
In both the TECHNICIAN and MAKER modes, the patient may get seriously injured or the
machine may be defected if incorrect setting is made. Therefore, always allow only qualified
persons to set parameters in both the TECHNICIAN and MAKER modes.
U
14-1
14.2. PASS I.D. Setting Method
14.2.1. PASS I.D. setting for the TECHNICIAN mode
First of all, you have to login in the TECHNICIAN mode to set a PASS I.D.
1. The following login screen will be displayed by touching “NURSE” displayed at the upper right in
the screen.
2. Confirm the TECHNICIAN button is in orange. Touch the blank column next to the PASS I.D.,
enter the default TECHNICIAN PASS I.D., and press the ENTER button.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R
3. “NURSE” displayed at the upper right changes into red and “TECHNICIAN” will be displayed.
The system subsequently returns to the original screen.
U
4. Press the MENU button and select the TECHNICIAN tab.

Select OPTION-OPERATION ID SETTING to display the following screen.
5. Confirm that the TECHNICIAN button turned orange. If the button is not orange, press the
TECHNICIAN button.
6. Touch the blank column next to the PRESENT ID. Enter the default TECHNICIAN PASS I.D.
7. Touch the blank column at the right of “NEW ID” and input the new PASS I.D. for the technician,
then touch the blank column at the right of “CONFIRM ID” and input the same PASS I.D. for the
CONFIRM ID.
8. Press the ENTER button.
14-2
O
9. When change of ID was completed, the massage “Accept NEW ID” is displayed on the screen.
N
If change of ID was wrong, the massage “Different ID” is displayed on the screen.
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
14-3
14.2.2. PASS I.D. setting for the MAKER mode
First of all, you have to login in the MEKER mode to set a PASS I.D.
1. The following login screen will be displayed by touching “NURSE” displayed at the upper right in
the screen.
2. Confirm the MAKER button is in orange. Touch the blank column next to the PASS I.D., enter the
preset MAKER PASS I.D., and press the ENTER button.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R
3. “NURSE” displayed at the upper right changes into red. “MAKER” will be displayed and the
system returns to the original screen.
U
4. Press the MENU button and select the TECHNICIAN tab.

Select OPTION-OPERATION ID SETTING to display the following screen.
5. Confirm the MAKER button is in orange. If not, press the MAKER button.
6. Touch the blank column next to PRESENT I.D. and enter the default MAKER PASS I.D.
7. Touch the blank column at the right of “NEW ID” and input the new PASS I.D. for the maker, then
touch the blank column at the right of “CONFIRM ID” and input the same PASS I.D. for the
CONFIRM ID.
8. Press the ENTER button.
14-4
O
9. When change of ID was completed, the massage “Accept NEW ID” is displayed on the screen.
N
If change of ID was wrong, the massage “Different ID” is displayed on the screen.
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
14-5
14.3. Setting Items on Each Screen
14.3.1. Hierarchy of setting menu
MENU NURSE TREATMENT 1-1

MODE
1 TREATMENT SINGLE
CONDUCTIVITY
MODE NEEDLE
1-1-1 1-1-2 1-1-3
HEPARIN UF PROFILE AB PROFILE
1-1-4 1-1-5 1-1-6
Kt/V RINSE OF
DIALYZER
1-1-7 1-1-8
PRESSURE ALARM 1-2
O
ARTERIAL N DIALYZER VENOUS
PRESS INLET PRESS
R
1-2-1 1-2-2 1-2-3
Q
TE
DIALYSATE DIALYSATE
SN PRESS
PRESS1 PRESS2
SO Y
1-2-4 1-2-5 1-2-6

IN
R
OPTION 1-3
U
B-POWDER
ETRF OPTION BPM OPTION OPTION
1-3-1 1-3-2 1-3-3
MONITOR 1-4
FLOW MESSAGE
LIST MONITOR
MONITOR HISTORY
1-4-1 1-4-2 1-4-3
MAINTENANCE
GRAPH
DATA
1-4-4 1-4-5
14-6
（MENU）
TECHNICIAN RINSE 2-1
MODE
2 EDIT SOLUTION PARAMETER
PROGRAM SETTING SETTING
2-1-1 2-1-2 2-1-3
TIME SETTING
2-1-4
ALARM 2-2
DIALYSATE TEMPERATURE CONDUCTIVITY
2-2-1 2-2-2 2-2-3
OVER RIDE TMP LEAK CHECK

2-2-4 2-2-5 2-2-6
O
AIR BUBBLE BLOOD LEAK
N
2-2-7 2-2-8
R
Q
TE
OPTION 2-3
SO Y
IN
B-POWDER
R
ETRF OPTION BPM OPTION

OPTION
See OPTION in the NURSE mode (1-3-1, 1-3-2 and 1-3-3).
COMMUNI.
SOFTWARE HARDWARE SYSTEM
U
2-3-4 2-3-5 2-3-6
OPERATION ID CLOCK
SETTING SETTING
2-3-7 2-3-8
MONITOR 2-4
See MONITOR in the NURSE mode (1-4).
INITIAL DATA 2-5
SINGLE
DIALYSATE HEPARIN
NEEDLE
2-5-1 2-5-2 2-5-3
UF PRIMING
2-5-4 2-5-5
14-7
（MENU）（TECH. MODE）
CALIBRATION 2-6
DIALYSATE DIALYSATE
BLOOD PUMP
PUMP SOLUTION
2-6-1 2-6-2 2-6-3
TEMPERATURE CONDUCTIVITY PRESSURE
2-6-4 2-6-5 2-6-6
SYRINGE AIR, BD
UF PUMP PUMP SENSOR
2-6-7 2-6-8 2-6-9
MAKER
MODE INFORMATION 3-1
3
SOFTWARE MACHINE SENSOR
O
VERSION TYPE RESISTANCE
3-1-1
N 3-1-2 3-1-3
R
Q
TE
ALARM
3-2
SO Y
See ALARM in the TECHNICIAN mode (2-2).

IN
R
OPTION 3-3
See OPTION in the TECHNICIAN mode (2-3).

U
MONITOR 3-4
See MONITOR in the NURSE mode (1-4).
OPERATION 3-5
WATER SUPPLY DRAINAGE

FUNCTION FUNCTION
3-5-1 3-5-2
CALIBRATION 3-6
See CALIBRATION in the TECHNICIAN mode (2-6).
14-8
MODE TYPE SET ITEM DISPLAY/SW NURSE TECH. MAKER CONTAINTS OF SETTING
NURSE TREATMENT TREATMENT MODE
14.3.2 List of Setting Items in Each Screen

HD SEQ-UF ○ ← ← Selection of treatment method
1-1-1
DN/SP SN/SP ○ ← ← Selection of blood line
DIALYSATE RATE ○ ← ← Setting of dialysate flow rate
DIALYSATE TEMPERATURE ○ ← ← Setting of dialysate temperature
B+W CONDUCTIVITY ○ ← ← Setting of B conductivity
TOTAL CONDUCTIVITY ○ ← ← Setting of dialysate
DIALYSIS BLOOD RATE ○ ← ← BP initial flow rate setting when dialysis begins
O
RETRANS BLOOD RATE 1 ○ ← ← BP1 initial flow rate when returning of blood begins
N
8.00mm / 6.35mm ○ ← ← Bloodline diameter (pump segment) setting
R
CONDUCTIVITY USE (No.1-No.4) ○ ← ← Selection of registered dialysate No.1 - No.4
1-1-2
Q
TE
TOTAL ○ ← ← Target conductivity (A +B + water)
14-9
SO Y
MIN (TOTAL) × ○ ← Conductivity alarm lower limit setting (A +B + water)
IN
INITIAL (TOTAL)
MAX (TOTAL)
B+W
R ×
×
×
○
○
○
←
←
←
Conductivity initial value (A +B + water)
Conductivity alarm upper limit setting (A +B + water)
Target conductivity setting (B + water)
MIN (B+W) × ○ ← Conductivity alarm lower limit setting (B + water)
U
INITIAL (B+W) ○ ← ← Conductivity initial value (B + water)
MAX (B+W) × ○ ← Conductivity alarm upper limit setting (B + water)
SINGLE NEEDLE MIN × ○ ← Blood Pressure lower limit alarm setting during SN operation.
1-1-3
CHANGE LOWER POINT ○ ← ← Single needle (SN) switching pressure (lower limit) setting
CHANGE UPPER POINT ○ ← ← Single needle (SN) switching pressure (upper limit) setting
MAX × ○ ← Blood pressure upper limit alarm setting during SN operation
DIALYSIS BLOOD RATE × ○ ← Initial value of BP rate on Single Needle
NURSE TREATMENT HEPARIN START ○ ← ← Syringe pump ON/OFF
1-1-4
BOLUS ○ ← ← Bolus ON/OFF
RAPID ○ ← ← ON/OFF of syringe pump fast-forward operation
FLOW RATE ○ ← ← Syringe pump flow rate setting
TOTAL VOLUME - - - Indicate total infused volume
AUTO BOLUS ○ ← ← ON/OFF of auto bolus setting
BOLUS VOLUME ○ ← ← Setting of bolus volume for one time
O
AUTO STOP ○ ← ← ON/OFF of automatic stop
N
10mL / 20mL / 30mL ○ ← ← Syringe size setting
R
UF PROFILE USE ○ ← ← Use of UF profile being displayed
1-1-5
Q
TE
@ × ○ ← Displays profile pattern prepared beforehand
14-10
SO Y
No, 1-No, 6 ○ ← ← Selection of profile No.
IN
Lock
SEQ-UF
R ○(※)
○(※)
←
←
←
←
Enable / Disable for change the profile details
(* appeare only profile using)
Selection of sequential UF operation of each slot in profile
(* See Chapter 13.3.4)
AB PROFILE USE ○ ← ← Use of A and B profiles being displayed
1-1-6
@ × ○ ← Displays profile pattern prepared beforehand
U
No, 1-No, 6 ○ ← ← Selection of profile No.
Enable / Disable for change the profile details
Lock ○(※) ← ←
(* appeare only profile using)
Kt/V PATIENT INFORMATION ○ ← ← Setting of Number of patient data. (Cannot change in Treatment)
1-1-7
SEX ○ ← ← Setting of Sex of the Patient (Cannot change in Treatment)
HEIGHT (cm / in) ○ ← ← Setting of Height of the Patient (Cannot change in Treatment)
WEIGHT (kg / lb) ○ ← ← Setting of Weight of the Patient (Cannot change in Treatment)
Kt/V Setting of Age of Patient (Male only)
NURSE TREATMENT AGE ○ ← ←
1-1-7 (Cannot change in Treatment)
UF TIME ○ ← ← Setting of UF Time (Cannot change in Treatment)
Setting of Target value of the Kt/V (Cannot change in
TARGET ○ ← ←
Treatment)
CURRENT ○ ← ← Indicate the Kt/V current value
ESTIMATED ○ ← ← Indicate the Kt/V estimated value
cm, kg / in, lb ○ ← ← Change the unit of patient information
O
RINSE OF DIALYZER RINSE OF DIALYZER ○ ← ← Setting of use the Rinse of Dialyzer or not
1-1-8
N
RINSE TIME ○ ← ← Setting of dialyzer rinse time upper limit
R
UF GOAL ○ ← ← UF volume during dialyzer rinse time
Q
TE
UF RATE × × × Indication about UF Rate at dialyzer rinse
14-11
SO Y
UF RATE LIMIT × ○ ← Limitation of UF RATE setting.
IN
PRESSURE
ALARM
ARTERIAL PRESS.
（PG4a）
1-2-1
LOWER WIDTH R
ALARM OF BLOOD LEAK ×
○
○
←
←
←
Alarm setting of blood leak setting at dialyzer rinse
Arterial pressure (before BP) alarm automatic setting range
(lower limit side)
Arterial pressure (before BP) alarm automatic setting range
UPPER WIDTH ○ ← ←
(upper limit side)
MIN × ○ ← Arterial pressure (before BP) limit alarm setting (lower limit side)
U
LOWER LIMIT ○ ← ← Arterial pressure (before BP) lower limit alarm setting
UPPER LIMIT ○ ← ← Arterial pressure (before BP) upper limit alarm setting
MAX × ○ ← Arterial pressure (before BP) limit alarm setting (upper limit side)
DIALYZER INLET Arterial pressure (after BP) alarm automatic setting range (lower
LOWER WIDTH ○ ← ←
(PG4b) limit side)
1-2-2 Arterial pressure (after BP) alarm automatic setting range (upper
limit side)
MIN × ○ ← Arterial pressure (after BP) limit alarm setting (lower limit side)
NURSE PRESSURE DIALYZER INLET LOWER LIMIT ○ ← ← Arterial pressure (after BP) lower limit alarm setting
ALARM (PG4b)
1-2-2 UPPER LIMIT ○ ← ← Arterial pressure (after BP) upper limit alarm setting
MAX × ○ ← Arterial pressure (after BP) limit alarm setting (upper limit side)
VENOUS PRESS LOWER WIDTH ○ ← ← Venous pressure alarm automatic setting range(lower limit side)
（PG5）
1-2-3 UPPER WIDTH ○ ← ← Venous pressure alarm automatic setting range(upper limit side)
MIN × ○ ← Venous pressure limit alarm setting (lower limit side)
LOWER LIMIT ○ ← ← Venous pressure lower limit alarm setting
O
UPPER LIMIT ○ ← ← Venous pressure upper limit alarm setting
N
MAX × ○ ← Venous pressure limit alarm setting (upper limit side)
R
DIALYSATE PRESS1 Arterial side concentrate pressure alarm automatic setting range
(PG2) (lower limit side)
Q
TE
14-12
1-2-4 Arterial side concentrate pressure alarm automatic setting range

SO Y
(upper limit side)
Arterial side concentrate pressure limit alarm setting
IN
MIN × ○
LOWER LIMIT R ○ ←
←
←
(lower limit side)
Arterial side concentrate pressure lower limit alarm setting
UPPER LIMIT ○ ← ← Arterial side concentrate pressure upper limit alarm setting
Arterial side concentrate pressure limit alarm setting
MAX × ○ ←
(upper limit side)
U
DIALYSATE PRESS2 Concentrate pressure alarm automatic setting range
(PG3) (lower limit side)
1-2-5 Concentrate pressure alarm automatic setting range
(upper limit side)
MIN × ○ ← Concentrate pressure limit alarm setting (lower limit side)
LOWER LIMIT ○ ← ← Concentrate pressure lower limit alarm setting
UPPER LIMIT ○ ← ← Concentrate pressure upper limit alarm setting
MAX × ○ ← Concentrate pressure limit alarm setting (upper limit side)
NURSE PRESSURE SN PRESS MIN STROKE VOLUME × ○ ← Lower limit of blood flow volume par one single needle (SN) cycle
ALARM 1-2-6
MAX STROKE TIME × ○ ← Upper limit of blood flow time par one single needle (SN) cycle
MAX VOLUME LIMIT × ○ ← Lower limit of blood volume par one single needle (SN) cycle
MIN × ○ ← Blood pressure abnormal alarm lower limit setting
Single needle chamber pressure alarm automatic setting range
(lower limit side)
Single needle chamber pressure alarm automatic setting range
(upper limit side)
O
MAX × ○ ← Blood pressure abnormal alarm upper limit setting
N
OPTION ETRF OPTION ETRF × ○ ← Select ETRF Option USE or UNUSE
1-3-1
R
REPLACE △ ○ ← Replace date set and usage conditions clear button
Q
TE
TREATMENT COUNT × ○ ← Current treatment counts with current ETRF
14-13
LAST REPLACE × ○ ← The current ETRF installation date
SO Y
IN
USE TIME × ○ ← Total flow passing time
EFFECTIVE DAYS
PERCENTAGE
R FOR
×
×
○
○
←
←
Estimated usable period of ETRF
Setting of reminder function for ETRF usage condition

REPLACEMENT REMINDER
(LIMIT) DATE × ○ ← Limitation date of ETRF use
U
(LIMIT) TIME × ○ ← Limitation of flow passing times
BPM BPM OPTION × ○ ← Select BPM option USE or UNUSE
OPTION SETTING
1-3-2 CONNECT - - - Establishment of communication with BPM unit
INFORMATION AT Have a chime or not after performing Blood Pressure
○ ← ←
MEASUREMENT END measurement.
INFANT MODE ○ ← ← Select INFANT mode ON or OFF
CUFF PRESSURE ○ ← ← Setting of cuff pressure at the first measurement
SMART PRESSURE
○ ← ← Select SMART PRESSURE measurement function
INCREASING
NURSE OPTION BPM BPM LOWER LIMIT (DIA, SYS, HR) ○ ← ← Blood pressure lower limit alarm setting
OPTION SETTING
UPPER LIMIT (DIA, SYS, HR) ○ ← ← Blood pressure upper limit alarm setting
1-3-2
BPM USE / UNUSE ○ ← ← Select BPM Profile USE or UNUSE
PROFILE
No.1 – No.3 ○ ← ← Select Profiles
SPAN TIME (SPAN 1 – 3) ○ ← ← Span time configure of Profiles
INTERVAL TIME (SPAN 1 – 3) ○ ← ← Interval time configure of Profiles
SMART TIME (SPAN 1 – 3) ○ ← ← Interval time configure of SMART PRESSURE measurement
O
WARNING FOR START ○ ← ← Time setting from information to start measurement
N
MEASUREMENT AT CHANGE ○ ← ← Setting of SMART PRESSURE measurement
R
SETTING ○ ← ← Change screen to BPM setting
Q
TE
PROFILE ○ ← ← Change screen to BPM profiles
14-14
SO Y
MEASUREMENT ○ ← ← Start measurement
IN
B-POWDER OPTION B-POWDER
1-3-3
PRIMING R ×
○
○
←
←
←
Select B-POWDER Option USE or UNUSE
Priming start button
(PRIMING) × ○ ← Priming time setting
DRAIN / REPLACE ○ ← ← Drainage start button
U
(DRAIN / REPLACE) × ○ ← Drainage time setting
MONITOR FLOW MONITOR Operating condition display of machine (Flow diagram) (* Forced
FLOW1 FLOW2 ○（※） ← ←
1-4-1 out function is operative at TECHNICIAN or higher level.)
LIST MONITOR Operating condition display of machine (List) (* Forced out
LIST ○（※） ← ←
1-4-2 function is operative at TECHNICIAN or higher level.)
MESSAGE HISTORY ○ ← ← Message history
1-4-3
CLEAR × × ○ Clear all message histories
GRAPH Transition graph of Conductivity, Temperature, Pressure, and so
○ ← ←
1-4-4 on.
TECHN RINSE MAINTENANCE DATA Total driving time of each part/driving count
○ ← ←
ICIAN 1-4-5 (MAKER mode only can revise the value of time or counts.)
TIME / TURN ○ ← ← Switch maintenance data that displayed
CLEAR × × ○ Clear the count of using time and number of times.
EDIT PROGRAM
× ○ ← Rinse program making screen
2-1-1
SOLUTION SETTING CONCENTRATION ORIGIN × ○ ← Concentration of disinfectant to be used for rinse
2-1-2
CONCENTRATION DILUTION × ○ ← Dilution ratio of disinfectant to be used for rinse
O
SOLUTION SETTING CONDUCTIVITY LOWER
× ○ ← Conductivity lower limit alarm value after disinfectant dilution
2-1-2 LIMIT
N
CONDUCTIVITY UPPER
× ○ ← Conductivity upper limit alarm value after disinfectant dilution
LIMIT
R
Selection of disinfectant port to be used
INHALATION PORT × ○ ←
Q
TE
(when rinse port option is used )
14-15
PARAMETER SINGLE PASS RATE × ○ ← Liquid flow rate setting at rinse
SO Y
SETTING
RECIRCURATION RATE
IN
2-1-3 × ○ ← Liquid flow rate setting at circulation rinse
R
LINE CAPACITY
AUTO PREPARATION AFTER
RINSE
×
×
×
○
○
←
Total capacity inside line
Auto start setting to dialysis preparation process after rinse is
complete (Only at the time disinfection end become effective.)
Auto start setting to dialysis preparation process after power
AUTO PREPARATION AFTER
× ○ ← supply is turned ON (Only at the time disinfection end become
POWER ON
effective.)
U
ADDITIONAL VOLUME × × ○ Amount in tube at disinfectant port
REVERSE TIME × × ○ Exchange amount in reverse flush of disinfectant port
USE / UNUSE × ○ ← Select 2nd Rinse port option USE or UNUSE
TIME SETTING RINSE MIN.TIME × × ○ Minimum time for setting each rinse method in RINSE EDIT
2-1-4
Minimum time setting of WATER RINSE necessary after each
AFTER WATER RINSE TIME × × ○
rinse in RINSE EDIT
HEATING TIME × × ○ Setting of time necessary to reach set temperature
TECHN ALARM DIALYSATE Deaeration pump flow rate abnormality setting (Tolerance of real
P1 FLOW RATE RATIO × × ○
ICIAN 2-2-1 flow rate to set flow rate)
Dialysate pump flow rate abnormality setting (Tolerance of real
P2 FLOW RATE RATIO × × ○
flow rate to set flow rate)
MAX RATIO of UF to BP × ○ ← Limit flow rate ratio of blood pump to UF pump
Time setting when detector outputs signal since blood pump
BP STOP × ○ ←
stops
PRESSURE ALARM FIX TIME × ○ ← Setting of the time until fix the pressure alarm
Kt/V 2.0 ALARM × ○ ← Sound ON/OFF setting
O
TEMPERATURE LOWER LIMIT × ○ ← Temperature alarm lower limit set value
2-2-2
N
UPPER LIMIT × ○ ← Temperature alarm upper limit set value
R
DIFFERENCE JUDGE
× × ○ Temperature difference alarm output condition 1 (T1-T3/T2-T4)
TEMPERATURE
Q
TE
14-16
DIFFERENCE JUDGE TIME × × ○ Temperature difference alarm output condition 2 (T2-T4)
SO Y
CONDUCTIVITY B+W WIDTH × ○ ← Conductivity allowable width (B concentrate + water)
IN
2-2-3
TOTAL WIDTH
R
SOLUTION CHECK B+W
×
×
○
○
←
←
Conductivity allowable width (Dialysate)
Dialysate abnormality alarm output upper /lower limit set values
(B concentrate + water)
Dialysate abnormality alarm output upper/lower limit set values
SOLUTION CHECK TOTAL × ○ ←
(Dialysate)
U
DIFFERENCE JUDGE B+W × × ○ Conductivity difference alarm output condition 1 (CD2-CD4)
DIFFERENCE JUDGE TOTAL × × ○ Conductivity difference alarm output condition 1 (CD1-CD3)
Conductivity difference alarm output condition 2
DIFFERENCE JUDGE TIME × × ○
(CD1-CD3/CD2-CD4)
OVERRIDE TIME × ○ ← Setting of possible operation time in OVERRIDE mode
2-2-4
COUNT × ○ ← Possible operation speed of blood pump in OVERRIDE mode
TMP AUTO OFFSET × ○ ← TMP (transmembrane pressure) automatic offset switching
2-2-5
MANUAL OFFSET × ○ ← Offset value when dialysis begins
TECHN TMP TMP (transmembrane pressure) abnormality alarm lowermost
ALARM LOWER LIMIT × ○ ←
ICIAN 2-2-5 limit value setting
TMP (transmembrane pressure) abnormality alarm uppermost
UPPER LIMIT × ○ ←
limit value setting
LEAK CHECK TARGET PRESSURE × ○ ← Pressure build-up target setting when leak check is performed
2-2-6
Pressure build-up time upper limit setting when leak check is
TARGET TIME × ○ ←
performed
Pressure change measuring time setting when leak check is
HOLD TIME × ○ ←
performed
O
PRESSURE LIMIT × ○ ← Permissible leak pressure width setting
STARTUP TEST × ○ ← Leak check test additional setting at startup test
N
LEAK CHECK TARGET PRESSURE × ○ ← Threshold of delta Pressure during the leak check.
R
(AT DIALYSIS)
TARGET TIME × ○ ← Pump driving time for creating the negative pressure.
2-2-6
Q
TE
Interval time setting of leak check to be done during dialysis
14-17
INTERVAL × ○ ←
process
SO Y
AIR BUBBLE SINGLE BUBBLE × ○ ← Setting the alarm value of the single bubble detection.
IN
2-2-7
TOTAL BUBBLE
R
ACCUMULATE TIME
×
×
○
○
←
←
Setting the alarm value of the Total bubble in a given time.
Setting the accumulate time of the buble detection.
Indication value of the air bubble detector (voltage and µL
VALUE (CPU1/CPU2) - - - equivalent). (CPU1: Control P.C. board; CPU2: Monitor P.C.
board)
U
SHOT (CPU1/CPU2) - - - Indication of the detected value of the single bubble.
Indication of the detected value of the total bubble in a given
TOTAL (CPU1/CPU2) - - - time.
(CPU1: Control P.C. board; CPU2: Monitor P.C. board)
BD - - - Indication of the status of the blood detector.
BLOOD LEAK ALARM VALUE × ○ ← Setting value of the Blood leak alarm setting value.
2-2-8
RINSE OF DIALYSER × ○ ← Setting the function use or unuse in DIALYZER RINSE process.
ZEROLIZE × ○ ← Zero adjustment button.
TECHN ALARM BLOOD LEAK OVERRIDE × ○ ← Blood leak override setting value.
ICIAN 2-2-8
TIME × ○ ← Blood leak override time setting.
ALARM COUNT × ○ ← The number of the time until enable the function
NURSE × ○ ← Setting of whether to be able to use by nurse.
VALUE (CPU1/CPU2) - - - Indication of the blood detecting value.
A/D (CPU1/CPU2) - - - Indication of the blood detecting A/D value
Correction coefficient a (gain) and b (offset) for CPU1: Control
COEFFICIENT (a1/b1) × ○ ←
O
P.C. board
Correction coefficient a (gain) and b (offset) for CPU2: Monitor
N
P.C. board
OPTION ETRF OPTION
R
Refer to 1-3-1
2-3-1
Q
TE
14-18
BPM OPTION
Refer to 1-3-2
SO Y
2-3-2
IN
B-POWDER OPTION
2-3-3
SOFTWARE
Refer to 1-3-3
PREP AT SEQ-UF
R × ○ ← Machine operation setting for dialysate at SEQ-UF operation
2-3-4
AUTO BYPASS AT BP STOP × ○ ← Switching of automatic bypass system when blood pump stop
Switching of permission to omit water-washing process in
RINSE SKIP BY NURSE × ○ ←
U
NURSE mode
MELODY AT TREATMENT
× ○ ← Selection of melody to sound when dialysis completes
END
TEST × ○ ← Sounding selected melody sound
OVERRIDE COUNT AT RINSE
× ○ ← Setting override rotation count for Rinse Of Dialyser process
OF DIALYZER
ALLOW NURSE RESET ETRF × ○ ← Activation switch of ETRF replacement by Nurse
Time until alarm sound stops (Alarm is output 2 min. later when 0
AUTO MUTE TIME × ○ ←
min. is set.) Rinse mode become effective.
TECHN OPTION SOFTWARE TIME LIMIT FOR DIALYSIS
× ○ ←
Setting of time until message to urge the move to dialysis is
ICIAN 2-3-4 BUTTON output after dialysis preparation is complete
AIR SEPARATOR MAX × ○ ← Frequency of AS2 error until dialysis is interrupted
Switching of multi-language function (switching installed
MULTILINGUAL × ○ ←
languages and English)
POINTER × ○ ← Switching of cursor display function
AUTO ESC × ○ ← Close Ten—key window without touching “ESC” key
ML CALCULATION × ○ ← Switch the unit of UF indication value (L or mL)
O
HARDWARE PG2 × ○ ← Switching of software setting when optional mechanism is added
2-3-5
N
PG4b × ○ ← Switching of software setting when optional mechanism is added
R
PG6 × ○ ← Switching of software setting when optional mechanism is added
DOUBLE PUMP × × × Not supported..
Q
TE
14-19
ARTERIAL CLAMP × ○ ← Switching of software setting when optional mechanism is added
SO Y
CENTRAL × ○ ← Select from “A1”, “A2” and “B” button.
IN
COMUNICATION
SYSTEM
2-3-6
OPTION
No.
R ×
×
○
○
←
←
Select communication system USE or UNUSE
Setting of machine No.
SPEED × ○ ← Baud rate setting
FORMAT × ○ ← Output data format setting
U
OPERATION ID PRESENT ID × ○ ← Present password input column when changing password
SETTING
2-3-7 NEW ID × ○ ← New password input column when changing password
New password input column when changing password (for
CONFIRM ID × ○ ←
inputting for confirmation)
CLOCK SETTING DATE × ○ ← Setting change of “Year”, "month" and "day"
2-3-8
WEEK × ○ ← Setting change of "day of a week"
TIME × ○ ← Setting change of "time"
TECHN MONITOR Refer to from 1-4-1 to 1-4-5
ICIAN
INITIAL DATA DIALYSATE DIALYSATE RATE × ○ ← Dialysate flow rate initial setting
2-5-1
HEPARIN RATE × ○ ← Syringe pump flow rate setting
HEPARIN BOLUS VOLUME × ○ ← Setting of bolus volume for one time
Setting of time until dialysis completes after syringe pump
HEPARIN AUTO STOP TIME × ○ ←
automatic operation stops
10mL / 20mL / 30mL × ○ ← Syringe size setting
O
MIN × ○ ← Temperature possible setting range lower limit
N
DIALYSATE TEMPERATURE × ○ ← Set temperature initial setting
R
MAX × ○ ← Temperature possible setting range upper limit
Q
TE
UF GOAL × ○ ← UF goal (total remove value)initial setting value
14-20
UF RATE × ○ ← UF rate initial setting value
SO Y
IN
UF TIME × ○ ← UF time initial setting value
R
MINIMUM (TOTAL)
TOTAL CONDUCTIVITY
×
×
○
○
←
←
Conductivity alarm lower limit initial setting (A +B + water)
Target conductivity initial setting(A +B + water)
MAXIMUM (TOTAL) × ○ ← Conductivity alarm upper limit initial setting (A +B + water)
U
MINIMUM (B+W) × ○ ← Conductivity alarm lower limit initial setting (B + water)
B+W CONDUCTIVITY × ○ ← Target conductivity initial setting (B + water)
MAXIMUM (B+W) × ○ ← Conductivity alarm upper limit initial setting (B + water)
8.00mm / 6.35mm ○ ← ← Setting of tube diameter and Maximum flow rate setting.
SINGLE NEEDLE Single needle (SN) switch operating pressure possible setting
MIN × ○ ←
2-5-2 range Minimum value
CHANGE LOWER POINT × ○ ← Single needle (SN) switch operation lower limit set value
CHANGE UPPER POINT × ○ ← Single needle (SN) switch operation upper limit set value
TECHN INITIAL DATA HEPARIN MAX × ○ ←
Single needle (SN) switch operating pressure possible setting
ICIAN 2-5-3 range Maximum value
DIALYSIS BLOOD RATE × ○ ← BP1 flow rate initial set value for single needle (SN) operation
FLOW RATE × ○ ← Syringe pump flow rate initial set value
AUTO BOLUS × ○ ← Automatic BOLUS setting at beginning of dialysis
BOLUS VOLUME × ○ ← Initial setting of BOLUS volume
Setting of time until dialysis completes after syringe pump
AUTO STOP TIME × ○ ←
automatic operation stops
O
CONNECTED STOP × ○ ← Interlock setting between blood pump and syringe pump
N
SYRINGE SIZE/LENGTH × ○ ← Calibrated value of syringe
R
UF GOAL × ○ ← Total UF (ultrafiltration) volume initial setting
2-5-4
Initial setting of remaining time until UF (ultrafiltration)
Q
TE
REMAINING TIME × ○ ←
14-21
completes
SO Y
MIN × ○ ← UF (ultrafiltration) speed possible setting range Minimum value
IN
RATE
MAX R ×
×
○
○
←
←
UF (ultrafiltration) speed initial setting
UF (ultrafiltration) speed possible setting range Maximum value
UF (ultrafiltration) speed (for MIN-UF) possible setting range
MIN-UF RATE × ○ ←
Maximum value
AUTO CAL. LIMIT × ○ ← Calculation limit on Auto Calculation of UF rate
U
MAX RATIO OF UF TO BP × ○ ← Setting of upper limit of UF rate related to BP flow rate
UF SETTING ON BYPASS × ○ ← UF pump operation specification during bypass operation
UF MODE × ○ ← Selection of UF (ultrafiltration) method
PRIMING ARTERIAL: VOLUME × ○ ← Priming volume of blood line (Used at an auto. priming.)
2-5-5
ARTERIAL: RATE × ○ ← Flow rate setting at auto priming
CALIBRATION DIALYSATE PUMP P1 RATE × ○ ← (Use manufacturer only on shipment)
2-6-1
P2 RATE × ○ ← (Use manufacturer only on shipment)
TECHN CALIBRATION DIALYSATE PUMP CHECK × ○ ← Calibration button for RV2
ICIAN 2-6-1
CAPACITY CHAMBER A/ B × ○ ← Capacity of chamber A / B
DIALYSATE CONCENTRATE TYPE × ○ ← Type selection of disinfectant to be used
SOLUTION
2-6-2 SOLUTION A (or B) × ○ ← Name of dialysate to be used
ESTIMATED. COND × ○ ← Estimated conductivity
ALARM (TOTAL / B) × ○ ← Allowable width of Solution Check
CONDUCTIVITY (TOTAL /B) × ○ ← Conductivity at calibration by concentrate
O
DILUTION (TOTAL / B) × ○ ← Dilution ratio setting
N
MIN (TOTAL / B) × ○ ← Solution Check alarm lower limit set value
R
INITIAL (TOTAL / B) × ○ ← Target value of diluted concentrate
Q
TE
MAX (TOTAL / B) × ○ ← Solution Check alarm upper limit set value
14-22
SO Y
PREPARE RATIO × ○ ← Standard ratio
IN
BLOOD PUMP
2-6-3
OFFSET
MIN
GAIN
R ×
×
×
○
○
○
←
←
←
Blood pump calibration start button
Blood Pump minimum flow rate setting
Blood pump calibration start button
MAX × ○ ← Blood Pump maximum flow rate setting
U
8.00mm/6.35mm × ○ ← Tube dia. Selection at blood pump of blood circuit for calibration
CHECK MIN × ○ ← Flow rate Check button (Minimum flow rate)
CHECK 100 × ○ ← Flow rate Check button (100 mL/min)
CHECK 300 × ○ ← Flow rate Check button (300 mL/min)
CHECK MAX × ○ ← Flow rate Check button (MAX mL/min)
DIGIT × ○ ← Setting the Digit value for OFFSET
START VOLUME × ○ ← Entry field to input value on calibration
TECHN CALIBRATION BLOOD PUMP END VOLUME × ○ ← Entry field to input value on calibration
ICIAN 2-6-3
ACTUAL VOLUME × ○ ← Display field of the measurement result
TEMPERATURE Indication value of each temperature sensor (CPU1: Control P.C.
VALUE (CPU1/CPU2) - - -
2-6-4 board; CPU2: Monitor P.C. board)
Indication value of each temperature sensor (A/D value) (CPU1:
A/D (CPU1/CPU2) - - -
Control P.C. board; CPU2: Monitor P.C. board)
P.C. board
O
P.C. board
CHECK × ○ ← Calibration start button
N
OFFSET × ○ ← Calibration start button
R
Temperature calibration start button at machine adjustment on
LOW POINT/HIGH POINT × ○ ←
Q
TE
shipment
14-23
TEST × ○ ← Analogue signal output button
SO Y
CLEAR × ○ ← Clear button to clear previous value
IN
CONDUCTIVITY
2-6-5 R
VALUE (CPU1/CPU2) - - -
Indication value of each conductivity sensor (CPU1: Control P.C.
board; CPU2: Monitor P.C. board)
Indication value of each conductivity sensor (A/D value) (CPU1:
A/D (CPU1/CPU2) - - -
P.C. board
U
P.C. board
Conductivity calibration start button at machine adjustment on
LOW POINT/HIGH POINT × ○ ←
shipment
TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT × × ○ Temperature correction coefficient of conductivity sensor value
TECHN CALIBRATION PRESSURE VALUE (CPU1/CPU2) - - -
Indication value of each pressure sensor (CPU1: Control P.C.
ICIAN 2-6-6 board; CPU2: Monitor P.C. board)
Indication value of each pressure sensor (A/D value) (CPU1:
A/D (CPU1/CPU2) - - -
P.C. board
P.C. board
O
LOW POINT HI POINT × ○ ← Pressure sensor calibration start button at shipping adjustment
N
R
Q
TE
14-24
UF RATE - ○ ← UF Rate on calibration.
SO Y
UF TIME - ○ ← UF remaining time on calibration
IN
P2 RATE
BP RATE
R ×
×
○
○
←
←
P2 flow rate on calibration
Blood pump flow rate on calibration
ONE SHOT × ○ ← One shot capacity of UF pump
HD L.CHECK × ○ ← HD offset check button (Lower point)
U
HD H.CHECK × ○ ← HD offset check button (Higher point)
SEQ CHECK × ○ ← SEQ offset check button
UF/ Rate 100, 500, 1000, 2000,
× ○ ← Measurement UF value of each UF rate
3000 (mL/min)
P2/300, 700 (mL/min) × ○ ← Measurement UF value of wach P2 Rate
UF PUMP (%) × ○ ← Correction percentage of High Dialysate rate.
2-6-7
SEQ (%) × ○ ← Correction percentage of SEQ-UF mode.
NORMAL/SINGLE FILTER ○ ← ← No CF option / with CF1 option
TECHN CALIBRATION UF PUMP START VOLUME × ○ ← Entry field to input value on calibration
ICIAN 2-6-7
END VOLUME × ○ ← Entry field to input value on calibration
ACTUAL VOLUME × ○ ← Display field of the measurement result
SYRINGE PUMP FLOW RATE - ○ ← Flow rate on calibration
2-6-8
TIME LEFT - ○ ← Remaining time on calibration
SYRINGE SIZE × ○ ← Size setting of syringe to be used
LENGTH × ○ ← Length setting of syringe
O
RATE × ○ ← RATE Check button (only manufacturer use on shipment)
N
START VOLUME × ○ ← Entry field to input value on calibration
R
END VOLUME × ○ ← Entry field to input value on calibration
Q
TE
14-25
ACTUAL VOLUE × ○ ← Display field of the measurement result
SO Y
RAPID × ○ ← Rapid button
IN
AIR, BD
SENSOR
2-6-9
AIR
VALUE (V, µL)
(CPU1/CPU2)
R
TABLE(0.3, 2.0, 10.0) ×
-
○
-
←
-
Correction coefficient for air bubble detection
Indication value of air bubble detection
Indication value of single bubble detection
SHOT (µL) (CPU1/CPU2) - - -
U
Indication value of total bubble detection
TOTAL (µL) (CPU1/CPU2) - - -
ADD Time × ○ ← Setting the accumulate time of the buble detection.
TEST - - - Indication value of the test and after test.
BD STANDARD × ○ ← Input the value of normal value
THRESHOLD × ○ ← Display of threshold value
STATE × ○ ← STATE Check button (only manufacturer use on shipment)
MAKER INFORMATION SOFTWARE VERSION SOFTWARE VERSION - - - Display of installed software version
3-2-1
CPU1 - - - Display of installed software (CPU1) version
CPU2 - - - Display of installed software (CPU2) version
LCD - - - Display of installed software (LCD) version
BMP - - - Display of installed software (BMP) version
MACHINE TYPE HYDRAULIC × × ○ Software switch to consistency between software and hardware
3-2-2
TEMPERATURE SENSOR × × ○ Change of temperature sensor type
O
BLD × × ○ Change of BLD sensor type
N
HEATER × × ○ Change of heater type
R
UFP × × ○ Change of UFP encoder type
Q
TE
14-26
ABD × × ○ Change of ABD P.C. Board type
SO Y
SYRINGE PUMP × × ○ Change of Syringe Pump Type
IN
SENSOR
RESISTANCE
3-2-3
32℃
37℃
R ×
×
×
×
○
○
Temperature characteristic value of thermistor (resistance at
32℃) (for T1-T4)
37℃) (for T1-T4)
41℃ × × ○
41℃) (for T1-T4)
U
Temperature characteristic value of thermistor
0℃ × × ○
(Resistance at 0℃) (For T6)
Temperature characteristic value of Thermistor
37℃ × × ○
Temperature characteristic value of Thermistor
100℃ × × ○
ALARM Refer to 2-2
OPTION Refer to 2-3
MONITOR Refer to 1-4
OPEREATION WATER SUPPLY
START × × ○ Water supply operation start button
FUNCTION 3-1-1
DRAINAGE FUNCTION
START × × ○ Drainage operation start button
3-1-2
CALIBRATION Refer to 2-6
O
N
R
Q
TE
14-27
SO Y
IN
U R
14.4. Rinse Program Setting and Creating Methods
This machine can register 20 rinse program patterns at maximum combining various types of rinse
methods.
14.4.1. Rinse program creating method

First of all, you have to login in the TECHNICIAN mode to create a rinse program pattern.
The following login screen will be displayed by touching “NURSE” displayed at the upper right in the
screen.
1. Confirm the TECHNICIAN button is in orange. If not, press the button.
2. After touching the empty column at the right of “PASS ID”, input the preset PASS I.D. with the ten
keys, and then press the ENTER button.
3. The previous screen is displayed. “NURSE” displayed at the upper right changes into red and the
display changes to “TECHNICIAN”.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
14-28
4. Press the MENU button, select the TECHNICIAN tab, and choose RINSE-EDIT-PROGRAM.
Then, the following screen will appear.
O
N
R
Q
TE
5. 20 rinse program patterns, A through T, can be registered at maximum. Select an alphabet

SO Y
identical to the registration pattern. Pressing the arrow (>) will scroll the alphabets.
IN
U R
14-29
6. Touch the portion shown in the figure below, then the touched portion changes into orange and
the buttons for selecting the rinse method will appear at the lower part in the screen. For
description of each program item, see 14.4.2 precautions when creating a rinse program and
disinfectant settings.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
7. Select an intended rinse method, then it will be input as shown in the figure below.
IN
U R
14-30
8. Here, input the rinse time for the set rinse as follows. Press the portion pointed by the arrow in
the following figure to display the ten keys, then input the rinse time and press the ENTER button.
Press the ESC key of the ten keys to return to the original screen.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
9. Touch the arrow portion in the following figure to display temperature setting keys. Set a
IN
R
temperature using ENTER keys. After entering the temperature, press the ESC key to return to
the original screen.
U
14-31
10. Press the rinse selection portion again. The rinse selection button disappears, and it returns to
the original screen.
O
N
11. You can continue inputting for another rinse method. Touch and select the green portion of the
R
adjacent frame, then the selected portion will change into orange.
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
14-32
12. Select an intended rinse method and input the rinse time and the set temperature in the manner
same as in Step 8. above.
O
N
13. Repeat the operations in the steps 6 through 12 to create a rinse program.
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
14-33
14. By selecting “SLEEP”, you can create a program in which the power supply automatically turns
OFF once after rinse is complete and it automatically turns ON again to complete a rinse process
at a preset time.
For example, when a rinse program is executed being set as shown in the figure above, the machine
automatically starts up so that its power supply turns OFF after a WATER process lasts for 15
minutes and the second rinse process ends at 17:00 2 days after the rinse program is started.
O
In order to specify the time to finish a rinse process, touch the portion pointed by the arrow in the
N
figure below to display the ten keys, and then set intended date and time to complete the rinse
process.
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
14-34
15. Use “AUTO OFF” to set so that the system automatically turns off the power after rinsing.
For instance, if the above setting program is in operation, the system automatically turns off the
power after 10 minutes of water rinse.
Repeat the above-mentioned operations to create and register intended numbers of rinse programs.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
14-35
14.4.2. Notices on creating a rinse program and setting for disinfectant to be used
This dialysis machine allows the selection of the following rinse methods.
Permitted
Disinfectant
Rinse program setting Usage
to be used
temperature
Washes inside of line by clear water for
WATER − 0ºC/40ºC
set time.
Washes inside of line by clear water at
HOT WATER − 75-85ºC temperature controlled to set temperature
for set time.
Suctions citric acid from disinfectant port,
CITRIC ACID Citric acid -
dilutes it, and circulates it for set time.
Suctions sodium hypochlorite from
SOLDIUM Sodium
- disinfectant port, dilutes it, and circulates
HYPOCHLO hypochlorite
it inside line for set time.
Suctions peracetic acid from disinfectant
Peracetic
O
PERACETIC ACID - port, dilutes it, and circulates it inside line
acid
Nfor set time.
Suctions citric acid from disinfectant port,
R
HOT CITRIC ACID Citric acid 75-85ºC dilutes it, and circulates it at temperature
Q
TE
controlled to set temperature for set time.

SO Y
Suctions acetic acid from disinfectant port,

IN
R
ACETIC ACID Acetic acid - dilutes it, and circulates it inside line only
for set time.
DWELL − - Keep inside line soaked for set time.
Used to create a program in which power
U
supply is automatically turns OFF once

POWER OFF − - after rinse is completed, it automatically
turns ON at specified time, and rinse
process starts.
In order to prevent different disinfectants from being mixed at rinse or disinfection performed using
disinfectant, the programs with the possibility of mixing disinfectants cannot be used at the same time.
You have to follow the restrictions below when creating programs. Take caution not to make any
incorrect setting since it will cause an error, stopping the rinse program.
• Set WATER at the beginning and last of the rinse program.

• Set a time longer than the minimum rinse time set in the Rinse Parameter screen (to be described
later).
• After setting a rinse program other than WATER, always set WATER for a time longer than the
time set in the Rinse Parameter screen.
• Set WATER just before POWER OFF.
• POWER OFF can be used once in one rinse program.
In order to refer to the conditions such as the shortest rinse time, etc., press the MENU button in the
14-36
Rinse Standby screen, select the TECHNICIAN tab, and choose RINSE-TIME SETTING. Then, the
following screen will appear.
Or, you may press the TIME button at the bottom of the Rinse Program screen to display the same
screen.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R
Also, the setting for the dilution ratio of the disinfectant used for disinfection can be done in the Rinse
Solution screen. In order to set various kinds of disinfectants to be used for disinfection, press the
MENU button in the Rinse Standby screen, select the TECHNICIAN tab, and choose
RINSE-SOLUTION SETTING. Then, the following screen will appear.
U
14-37
Or, you may press the SOLUTION button at the bottom of the Rinse Program screen to display the
same screen.
The following items can be set in this screen. Touch an intended item to display the ten keys and
input a set value.
Two types of concentration settings are possible for each rinse solution.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R
Sets concentration of disinfectant to be used

U
ORIGIN
for rinse and disinfection.
CONCENTRATION Sets concentration to which disinfectant to be
DILUTION used is actually diluted for rinse and
disinfection
Sets lower limit of disinfectant concentration
LOWER LIMIT
alarm at rinse and disinfection.
CONDUCTIVITY
Sets upper limit of disinfectant concentration
UPPER LIMIT
alarm at rinse and disinfection.
Used to distinguish rinse ports depending on
INHARATION PORT kind of disinfectant. Used only when PORT 2
is optionally furnished.
14-38
14.4.3. Registering rinse program in Rinse Standby screen
Register the created rinse programs in Rinse Standby screen so that you can select various rinse
methods in the NURSE mode.
Five patterns can be registered at maximum in one rinse program.
1. Login in the TECHNICIAN mode.

2. Press the MENU button, select the TECHNICIAN tab, and choose RINSE-EDIT PROGRAM.
Then, the Rinse Program screen will appear.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R
3. Select one of the formerly registered rinse programs A through T to display a rinse program to
register in the Rinse Standby screen.
U
14-39
4. Touch an intended alphabet to which you want to register a rinse program. Then, the rinse
program displayed at present will be registered.
O
Set rinse programs No.1-No.5 in the same manner.
N
R
Q
TE
The rinse program registered in Step 4. corresponds to the No. pointed by the arrow in the following
SO Y
Rinse Standby screen.

IN
U R
14-40
14.4.4. Registering WEEKLY RINSE in Rinse Standby screen
The WEEKLY RINSE button in the Rinse Standby screen will allocate a rinse program to be
displayed on each day of a week.
For example, when “WEEKLY RINSE” is set as shown in the above figure, Rinse program A will be
displayed when the WEEKLY RINSE button is pressed on Sunday, and Rinse program B when the
button is pressed on Monday.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
14-41
1. Login the TECHNICIAN mode.
2. Press the MENU button, select the TECHNICIAN tab, and choose RINSE-EDIT PROGRAM.
Then, the Rinse Program screen will appear.
O
N
R
3. Select one of the formerly registered rinse programs A through T to display a rinse program to
Q
register the Rinse Standby screen.

TE
SO Y
IN
U R
14-42
4. Touch an intended alphabet to which you want to register a rinse program. Then, the rinse
program being displayed at present will be registered.
O
N
Set intended rinse programs to be allocated for one week in the same manner.
R
Out of rinse programs registered in Step 4., a rinse program set for each day of a week will be
Q
TE
displayed by touching the button pointed by the arrow in the following Rinse Standby screen.
SO Y
IN
U R
14-43
14.5. UF PROFILE Program Creating Method
First of all, you have to login in the TECHNICIAN mode to create an UF PROFILE program.
The following login screen will be displayed by touching “NURSE” displayed at upper right in the
screen.
1. Confirm the TECHNICIAN button is in orange. If not, press the TECHNICIAN button.
3. The previous screen is restored. “NURSE” displayed at the upper right changes into red and the
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R
4. Press the MENU button, select the NURSE tab, and choose TREATMENT-UF PROFILE. Then,
the following screen will appear.
U
14-44
5. Six programs, No.1 through No.6, can be registered at maximum as the UF PROFILE program.
Press a button identical to the registration No.
O
N
R
6. Touch the graph directly to create a profile. The UF volume set in dialysis is regarded as 100%,
Q
TE
and proportions to the 100% appears in the middle of each slot.

SO Y
IN
U R
14-45
7. Press the mark “@” button on the right side of the screen to display the basic pattern at the
bottom of the graph. A profile can be created by pressing the corresponding pattern.
O
8.
N
Create a profile from No.1 through No. 6 like as below.
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
14-46
9. When the SEQ-UF is pressed, the slot performs sequential UF.
O
10. Press the EXIT button after all profiles are input. If you want to continue creating other profiles,
N
press an intended profile No. at the bottom of the screen and create the profiles in the manner
same as above.
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
14-47
14.6. AB PROFILE Program Creating Method
First of all, you have to login the TECHNICIAN mode to create an AB PROFILE program.
The following login screen will be displayed by touching “ NURSE” displayed at upper right in the
screen
1. Confirm the TECHNICIAN button is in orange. If not, press the TECHNICIAN button.
3. The former screen is restored. “NURSE” displayed at the upper right changes into red and the
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R
4. Press the MENU button, select the NURSE tab, and choose TREATMENT-AB PROFILE. Then,
the following screen will appear.
U
14-48
5. Six programs, No.1 through No.6, can be registered at maximum as the AB PROFILE program.
Press a button identical to the registration No.
O
N
R
6. Touch the graph directly to create a profile. The solution A can be set within the range of 12.5
Q
TE
mS/cm-15.5 mS/cm. The target conductivity appears below each slot. Use this as a guidance to
SO Y
create a profile.
IN
U R
14-49
O
N
8. Create the concentration profiles for dialysate B according to the procedures same as in step 6.
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
14-50
9. Create a concentration profile for dialysate B in the same fashion. Touch the graph directly to
create a profile. The solution B can be set within the range of 2.0 mS/cm-8.0 mS/cm. The target
conductivity appears below each slot. Use this as a guidance to prepare a profile.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
14-51
11. Create a necessary profile from No.1 through No. 6 like as below.
O
12. Press the EXIT button to end this procedure. N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
14-52
15 ADJUSTMENT
15.1. Pressure regulator, Relief Valve

15.1.1. Adjustment of pressure regulator (PR1)
Note) The following procedure is applicable to the reducing valves (Danle Co. Ltd. ER884ZB)
equipped with the models from serial No. 03A0001E to No. 04A0207E. Adjustment is not
necessary for the valves equipped with the later models. Check the serial No., and follow the
procedure.
1. Instruments and tools required
Calibrated pressure gauge, Hexagon wrench (5 mm), Clamp, tube T-connector
2. Procedure
(1) Remove the back cover of dialysate line section of the machine, open the front door of the
machine, and then draw out the dialysate line forward.
(2) Clamp the inlet of V01 with a clamp, and connect a pressure gauge at a position between the
O
clamp and V01.
N
R
CAUTION
Q
TE
Securely clamp the inlet of V01 with a clamp. If clamping is not sufficient, supply water
SO Y
spouts mightily.
IN
R
(3) Remove the clamp and turn ON the power supply of the machine.
(4) Start PREPARATION at the dialysate flow rate of 500 mL/min.
(5) Press the keys in the order of “MENU”→”NURSE”→”MONITOR”→”LIST MONITOR” to open the
U
List Monitor screen. Find the FS1 indicator.

(6) When FS1 is ON (when the chamber is filling process), read the value of the pressure gauge and
adjust pressure to 0.025 ± 0.01 MPa (188 ± 75mmHg) with hexagon wrench. For the adjustment,
remove the seal of the reducing valve and turn the adjusting screw with the Hexagon wrench.
The pressure will increase when the screw is turned clockwise (CW) and decrease when turned
counterclockwise (CCW).
Turned CCW: Pressure decreases Turned CW: Pressure increases
15-1
(7) Press EXIT button to go back to previous screen.
(8) Stop the machine by pressing the RINSE STANBY button, and then detach the pressure gauge.
(9) Install the back cover and close the front door to their normal positions.
Reference)
Adjustment is not necessary for the pressure regulator equipped with the models with serial No.
04A0208E or later. Check the pressure when failure is suspected.
The factory default pressures are show below.
Regulated pressure Regulated pressure

Status of hydraulic line
(03A0001E to 04A0207E) (04A0208E or later)
0.025 ±0.01 MPa 0.030 ± 0.01 MPa
FS1 ON (with flow)
（188 ± 75mmHg） (225 ± 75mmHg)
0.040 ± 0.01 MPa
FS1 OFF (without flow) -
(300 ± 75mmHg)
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
15-2
15.1.2. Adjustment of filling completion pressure (RV1)

Calibrated pressure gauge, Clamp, Spanner wrench (23 mm), Spanner wrench (26 mm), tube,
T-connector
2. Procedure
(1) Remove the back cover of dialysate line section of the machine.
(2) Clamp the inlet of RV1 with a clamp and connect a pressure gauge at a position between the
clamp and RV1.
(3) Remove the clamp. Turn ON the power supply of the machine and enter the TECHNICIAN mode.
(4) Start PREPARATION (without detaching both A/B concentrate nozzles from machine) at the
dialysate flow rate of 500 mL/min.
CAUTION
O
Before starting PREPARATION, ensure that the clamp is removed.
N
If the machine is operated with the clamp, the connected tube to the pump may be disconnected,
R
and water may spout.
Q
TE
SO Y
NOTE
IN
R
Solution port alarm (0162 SOLUTION A PORT CLOSE, 0163 SOLUTION B PORT CLOSE) may
be detected, but ignore these alarms. The PREPARATION program runs in this condition.
(5) Press the keys in the order of “MENU”→”NURSE”→”MONITOR”→”FLOW MONITOR”. Find FS1
U
indicator.
(6) Press the FORCED OUT button to activate the valves manually.
(7) Press V01 icon several times to open Valve 01 forcibly, then icon turns green. And press V02
icon several times to close Valve 02 forcibly. V02 icon turns gray.
(8) When FS1 is OFF (Chamber is fully-filled. FS1 icon color is gray.), read the indication value of
the pressure gauge and adjust it to 0.120 ± 0.01 MPa (900 ± 75mmHg). Loosen the fixing nut of
RV1 and turn the valve body. The pressure will decrease at the time when the valve body is
loosen, and will increase when it is tighten.
(9) Tighten the fixing nut after adjustment is complete. Check the filling completion pressure again,
because tightening the fixing nut may change the adjusted pressure more or less.
NOTE
Please check whether RV1 vibrate abnormally or not during chamber filling procedure by touching the
RV1. If so, please decrease the pressure by loosing the valve body till stop the abnormal vibration.
Otherwise, Conductivity may become different value (fluctuate) for each A / B Chamber times.
15-3
(10) Find P1 indicator and confirm the P1 flow rate is more than 750 mL/min. If the P1 flow rate is out
of range, make the adjustment in section 15.1.1 “Adjustment of pressure regulator (PR1)” and
then readjust RV1. (Increasing the setting value of PR1, RV1 / P1 flow rate will increase.)
(11) Press EXIT button to go back to previous screen.
(12) Press the RINSE STANDBY button to stop the machine after the adjustment is complete and
detaches the pressure gauge.
(13) Install the back cover.
NOTE
- After the RV1 calibration, please calibrate dialysate (See 15.7 calibration dialysate).
- If you found the conductivity fluctuation trouble (different conductivity for each chamber) at
dialysis fluid mixing procedure, RV1 may vibrate abnormally condition (You can check by
touching RV1) during chamber filling procedure (FS1 icon color is green). Please loose a bit the
valve body of RV1 to decrease the pressure till stop the abnormal vibration and repeat RV1
calibration.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
15-4
15.1.3. Adjustment of closed line pressure (RV2) (For software version Ver.04 or later)
This procedure applies to software version Ver.04 or later. Check the software version of your
machine and follow the procedure if applicable.
(If you do not know to verify the software version, on the wake-up screen right after the machine
turned on.)
1. Instrument and tools required
Spanner wrench (23 mm), Spanner wrench (26 mm), Dialyzer
2. Procedure
1) Open the front door of the machine and draw out the dialysate line forward.
2) Set the coupler of the machine to the dialyzer.
3) Turn ON the power supply of the machine and enter the TECHNICIAN mode.
4) Press the keys in the order of “MENU”→”TECHNICIAN”→”CALIBRATION”→”DIALYSATE
PUMP” to open the DIALYSATE PUMP CALIBRATION screen.
O
5) Press and hold the CHECK button to start calibration.
N
R
NOTE
Q
TE
The machine runs when the CALIBRATION button is pressed, air bubbles may be generated in
SO Y
the closed line and the blood leak alarm occurs. (0111 DIRTY BLOOD LEAK SENSOR) In such
IN
R
a case, continue the adjustment by resetting the alarm with the MUTE button.
6) Run the machine more than 3 minutes. By RV2, P2 rate on the screen becomes 830-880
mL/min.
U
7) Loosen the fixing nut of RV2 and turn the valve body for adjustment. The flow rate will decrease
when the valve body is loosen, and will increase when it is screwed in. P2 RATE on the screen is
updated every chamber cycles. Wait for several minutes until the P2 rate becomes stable. After
adjustment confirm if the flow rate is within the range of 830-880 mL/min.
NOTE
When the P2 RATE column is red, it means that informs P2 rate is out of the adjustment range.
The column turns back to white when the value is within the adjustment range. (830-880
mL/min.)
15-5
NOTE
Flow rate is regarded as stable when the fluctuation band was within 20 mL/min per two minutes.
8) Tighten the fixing nut when the adjustment is complete. Check the flow rate in the screen again
because tightening of the fixing nut may change the adjusted flow rate.
9) Press and hold the CHECK button to stop the machine.
10) Put the dialysate line into place, and close the front door.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
15-6
15.2. UF
15.2.1. For software version from Ver 04 to 05.20
This procedure applies to software version from Ver.04 to 05.20. Check the software version of your
turned on.)
15.2.1.1 ONE-SHOT volume of UF pump calibration
1. Instruments and tools required.

Electronic balance, Drainage tube (A tube that can draw from the drainage port to the bucket
during measurement), Measurement container (Capacity: approx. 3 L), Bucket (Fill with 5 L of
water)
O
2. Procedure
1)
N
Turn ON the power supply and enter the TECHNICIAN mode.
R
Q
TE
NOTE
SO Y
If the Technician did not operate the machine for a few minutes, the machine releases the
IN
R
TECHNICIAN mode automatically. Some items can not operate with NURSE mode, so enter the
TECHNICIAN mode again to carry on the machine calibration.
2) Press the keys in the order of “MENU”→”TECHNICIAN”→”CALIBRATION”→”UF PUMP” to

U
open the UF PUMP CALIBRATION screen.

3) Remove the red dialyzer coupler and soak it with 5 L of water in the bucket.
4) Put the drainage tube behind the machine into the bucket.
5) Press and hold the ONE-SHOT button. The ONE-SHOT button turns orange and the priming of
the dialysate line starts. Perform the priming more than three minutes for proper calibration.
6) After adequate priming is done, press and hold the ONE-SHOT button to stop priming.
The button blinks orange.
7) Check the screen to confirm whether the following condition is set. If the numbers are different,
press the number to display the ten-key pad and enter the following condition.
ONE SHOT 0.7000 mL

UF RATE 7000 mL/h
TIME LEFT 00:15 (15 min) (※)
※ ) Entering 0.15 would be displayed as 00:15.
15-7
8) Measure the measurement container with an electric balance, and input the gram value of
container to START VOLUME column. In this case, throw away a water corrected during priming
process in 5).
9) Place the drainage tube into the blank measurement container.
10) Press and hold the ONE-SHOT button, then the button turns yellow and measurement starts.
When the setting time passed and the machine completed measurement, the UF pump stops and
the button blinks yellow.
NOTE
TECHNICIAN mode automatically. Some items cannot operate with NURSE mode, so enter the
11) Pull the drainage tube from the measurement container. Measure the measurement container
O
with an electric balance, and input the gram value of container to END VOLUME column.
N
12) Press and hold the ONE-SHOT button again to automatically calculate ONE-SHOT VOLUME.
R
13) If the calculated ONE-SHOT VOLUME is not within the range of 0.7000±0.0140 (See NOTE
Q
TE
below), calibrate again.

SO Y
14) Place the dialyzer coupler and the drainage tube back.
IN
R
NOTE: The range of ONE-SHOT volume is revised on Software Version 05.00 or later.
The range on Ver. 05.00 or later: 0.6500 – 0.7140 ml / shot.
U
NOTE
If repeated calibration does not allow the calculated ONE-SHOT VOLUME to be within the
range, the UF pump needs to be replaced.
15-8
15.2.1.2 UF correction coefficient d calibration

Electronic balance, Bloodline (Including a needle), Dialyzer, Measurement container (Capacity:
approx. 3 L)
2. Procedure
Perform this procedure after “ 15.2.1 ONE-SHOT volume of UF pump calibration “.
1) Turn ON the power supply and connect the bloodline and dialyzer to the machine. Then,
connect the dialyzer coupler to the dialyzer.
2) Soak the inlet and outlet of the bloodline into the measurement container with approx. 3 L of
water. Turn ON the blood pump and prime the bloodline and dialyzer. Air in the dialyzer can be
removed smoothly if the blue coupler is facing up.
NOTE
O
To keep a constant pressure in the vein chamber (PG 5), make a narrow tube around exit of
bloodline by a needle, a clamp or etc.
N
R
Q
TE
NOTE
SO Y
To obtain an accurate value, prime the bloodline and dialyzer completely. Be sure to connect a
IN
R
needle on tip of the bloodline.
3) Stop the Blood pump after confirming the bloodline priming enough.
4) Enter the TECHNICIAN mode and press the keys in the order of “MENU”→”TECHNICIAN”
U
→”CALIBRATION”→”UF PUMP” to open the UF PUMP CALIBRATION screen.

5) If the machine has Cut Filter Option, select the SINGLE FILTER tab.
NOTE
6) Confirm that the values in the correction coefficient column on the right side of the screen are
a = -0.2000 and d = 0. If these values are different, press the number to display the ten-key pad
to change.
7) Press and hold the HD OFFSET button, the button turns orange and the measurement
preparation operation starts. At the same time, the dialyzer is being primed. Air in the dialyzer
can be removed smoothly if the red coupler is facing up while priming.
15-9
8) Run the machine for 5 minutes or longer to stabilize the fluid flowing inside the dialyzer.
9) Press the GRAPH button to display a graph and confirm the pressure PG3 is stable.
10) Press and hold the HD OFFSET button again to stop measurement preparation and the button
blinks orange.
11) Put the measurement container with approx. 3 L of water on the electronic balance.
NOTE
Pay attention so that water is not empty and pour water of enough quantity into the container.
12) Read the number on the electronic balance and input the gram value into the START VOLUME
column.
13) Press and hold the HD OFFSET button, it turns yellow and measurement starts.
14) When the setting time passes and the machine completes measurement, the UF pump stops
and the button blinks yellow.
15) Read the number of the electronic balance, and input the gram value of remained liquid into the
O
END VOLUME column. N
16) Press and hold the blinking HD OFFSET button again to calculate correction coefficient d
R
automatically.
Q
TE
SO Y
NOTE
IN
R
When d is increased, the actual UF increases against the preset UFR; and when d decreases,
the actual UF decreases.
17) If d is not within the range of –60 to +30, readjust the pressure regulator (PR1), filling completion
U
pressure (RV1), closed line pressure (RV2), and calibration of the BP flow rate.
NOTE
The hydraulic line has been running till move out from calibration mode by pressing EXIT button.
Please move out from calibration mode to stop the hydraulic line in case you need other
operation.
15-10
15.2.1.3 Verification test of UF accuracy

Electronic balance, Bloodline (Including a needle), Dialyzer, Measurement Container (Capacity:
approx. 3 L)
2. Procedure
NOTE
O
N
R
3) Stop the Blood pump after confirming the bloodline priming enough.
Q
TE
SO Y

IN
R
NOTE
U
5) Press and hold HD L.CHECK button, then the button turns orange and the measurement
can be removed smoothly if the red coupler is facing up.
6) Run the machine for 5 minutes or longer to stabilize the fluid flowing inside the dialyzer. When
air inside the dialyzer is fully removed, turn up the blue coupler.
8) Press and hold the HD L.CHECK button again to stop measurement preparation and the button
blinks orange.
15-11
NOTE
Pay attention to that water is not empty and pour water of enough quantity into the container.
column.
11) Press and hold the HD L.CHECK button, it turns yellow and measurement starts. When the
setting time passes and the machine completes measurement, the UF pump stops and the button
blinks yellow.
END VOLUME column.
13) Press and hold the blinking HD L.CHECK button again. The value is calculated automatically.
When the valve is out of the prescribed range, the valve column of HD L.CHECK is displayed to red.
14) Press and hold HD H.CHECK button, then the button turns orange and the measurement
preparation operation starts.
15) Run the machine for 5 minutes or longer to stabilize the fluid flowing inside the dialyzer. When
O
air inside the dialyzer is fully removed, turn up the blue coupler.
N
R
17) Press and hold the HD H.CHECK button again to stop measurement preparation and the button
Q
TE
blinks orange.
SO Y
IN
R
column.
20) Press and hold the HD H.CHECK button, it turns yellow and measurement starts. When the
U
blinks yellow.
END VOLUME column.
22) Press and hold the blinking HD H.CHECK button again. The value is calculated automatically.
23) When the setting values of either ± 30 g/h or ± 1% is met, the machine passed this verification
test. When the valve is out of the prescribed range, the number column is displayed to red.
If the calculated value meets the prescribed range ± 30 g/h or ± 1% of setting range, the test is
passed. When the value is not out of range that ± 30 g/h or ± 1%of setting value, the value column is
displayed to red.
15-12
NOTE
If this test does not allow measurement to be within the prescribed range, determine the UF
correction coefficient d once again.
Reference：Setting condition at the time of the verification.

HD L.CHECK HD H.CHECK
UF RATE 500 mL/h 5000 mL/h
TIME LEFT 00:15 (15 minutes) 00:20 (20 minutes)
BP 200 mL/min 300 mL/min
15.2.1.4 Decision of UF correction coefficient d’ (For SEQ-UF)
O
Electronic balance, Bloodline (Including a needle), Dialyzer, Measurement container (Capacity:
approx. 3 L) N
R
2. Procedure
Q
TE
Perform this procedure after calibration of UF pump and ONE-SHOT flow rate.
SO Y
IN
R

U
NOTE
To keep a constant pressure in the vein chamber (PG 5), make a narrow tube around exit of bloodline
by a needle, a clamp or etc.
NOTE
3) Stop the blood pump after enough priming.

15-13
NOTE
TECHNICIAN mode automatically. Some items cannot operate with NURSE mode, so enter the
5) Confirm that the values in the correction coefficient column on the right side of the screen are
a = -0.2000 and d’ = 0. If these values are different, press the number to display the ten-key pad
to change.
NOTE
If the machine has Cut Filter Option, select the SINGLE FILTER tab.
6) Press and hold the SEQ OFFSET button, the button turns orange and the measurement
O
can be removed smoothly if the red coupler is facing up while priming.
7) Run the machine for 5 minutes or longer to stabilize the fluid flowing inside the dialyzer.
N
R
9) Press and hold the SEQ OFFSET button again to stop measurement preparation.
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R
column.
NOTE
U
12) Press and hold the SEQ OFFSET button, it turns yellow and measurement starts.
13) When the setting time passes and the machine completes measurement, the UF pump stops
and the button blinks yellow.
END VOLUME column
15) Press and hold the blinking SEQ OFFSET button again to calculate correction coefficient d’
automatically.
NOTE
When d is increased, the actual UF increases against the preset UFR; and when d decreases,
the actual UF decreases.
15-14
16) If d is not within the range of 25 to 85, readjust the pressure regulator (PR1), filling completion
pressure (RV1), closed line pressure (RV2), and calibration of the BP flow rate.
NOTE
The hydraulic line has been running till move out from calibration mode by pressing EXIT button.
Please move out from calibration mode to stop the hydraulic line in case you need other
operation.
15.2.1.5 Verification test of UF accuracy (For SEQ-UF)

approx. 3 L)
O
2. Procedure N
1) Turn ON the power supply and connect the bloodline and dialyzer to the machine. Then, connect
R
the dialyzer coupler to the dialyzer.
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R
NOTE
To obtain an accurate value, prime the bloodline and dialyzer thoroughly. Be sure to connect a
U
3) Stop the blood pump after enough priming.

NOTE
5) Press and hold SEQ CHECK button, then the button turns orange and the measurement
preparation operation starts. At the same time, the dialyzer is being primed. Air in the dialyzer can
be removed smoothly if the red coupler is facing up.
15-15
6) Run the machine for 5 minutes or longer to stabilize the fluid flowing inside the dialyzer. When air
inside the dialyzer is fully removed, turn up the blue coupler.
8) Press and hold the SEQ CHECK button again to stop measurement preparation and the button
blinks orange.
column.
NOTE
Pay attention so that water is not empty and pour water of enough quantity into the container.
11) Press and hold the SEQ CHECK button, it turns yellow and measurement starts. When the
blinks yellow.
12) Read the number on the electronic balance and enter the dialysate gram value discharged in the
O
END VOLUME column. N
13) Press and hold the blinking SEQ CHECK button again. The value is calculated automatically.
R
When the number is out of the prescribed range, the number column of SEQ CHECK is displayed
Q
TE
to red.
SO Y
IN
R
If the calculated value meets the prescribed range ± 30 g/h or ± 1% of setting range, the test is
passed. When the value is not out of range that ± 30 g/h or ± 1%of setting value, the value column is
displayed to red.
U
NOTE
If this test does not allow measurement to be within the prescribed range, determine the UF
correction coefficient d’ once again.
Reference：Setting condition at the time of the verification.

UF RATE 1000 mL/h
TIME LEFT 00:15 (15 minutes)
BP 200 mL/min
15-16
15.2.2. For software version Ver.06.00 or later
turned on.)
15.2.2.1 UF calibration
NOTE
It is not necessary to measurement of ONE-SHOT for UF Calibration after Software Version
ver.6.00 or later. Set the value of ONE-SHOT to 0.7000mL
1. Instruments and tools

approx. 3 L)
O
2. Procedure
N
R
HD calibration
Q
TE
1) Turn ON the power supply and connect the bloodline and dialyzer to the machine. Then, connect
SO Y
the dialyzer coupler to the dialyzer.

IN
R
U
NOTE
3) Log in to MAKER mode and press the keys in the order of “MENU” → ”TECHNICIAN”
4) Confirm the tab of correction display area
(see right figure) is “Normal”.
Change the setting value of each UF Rate
to 100, 500, 1000, 2000 and 3000
(Rate:100 is added version 7.40 for
improvement of accuracy).
Futhermore, change the value of SEQ to 0.
(Do not change the two value of the P2.)
15-17
5) Press and hold HD L.CHECK button, then the button turns orange and the measurement
preparation operation starts. At the same time, the dialyzer is being primed. Air in the dialyzer can
be removed smoothly if the red coupler is facing up.
6) Run the machine for 5 minutes or longer to stabilize the fluid flowing inside the dialyzer. When air
inside the dialyzer is fully removed, turn up the blue coupler.
Press the GRAPH button to display a graph and confirm the pressure PG3 is stable.
7) Press and hold the HD L.CHECK button again to stop measurement preparation and the button
blinks orange. Put the measurement container with approx. 3 L of water on the electronic balance.
NOTE
8) Read the number on the electronic balance and record the start value.
9) Press and hold the HD L.CHECK button, it turns yellow and measurement starts (UF rate:
500mL/h). When the setting time passes and the machine completes measurement, the UF pump
O
stops and the button blinks yellow. N
10) Read the number of the electronic balance, and record the remaining value.
R
Calculate and recorde the removed value per one hour (quadruple the number of difference
Q
TE
between “start value” and “remaining value”).

SO Y
(This value input after all measurement.)

IN
R
11) Press and hold the HD L.CHECK and start change

measurement preparation operation. Change the
value of the UF RATE (See right figure) to 100
(Ver.7.40 or later), 1000, 2000, 3000 and wait until
U
pressure PG3 stable.

12) After confirm the stable, measure the start and
remaining value at each UF RATE in the same
way.
SEQ-UF calibration
1) Press and hold the SEQ-CHECK, and then the button turns orange and the measurement
preparation operation starts.
3) Press and hold the SEQ-CHECK button again to stop measurement preparation and the button
blinks orange. Put the measurement container with approx. 3 L of water on the electronic balance.
4) Press and hold the SEQ-CHECK button again, and start measurement.
5) When the setting time passes and the machine completes measurement, the UF pump stops and
the button blinks yellow.
15-18
6) Read the number of the electronic balance, and record the remaining value.
Calculate the removed value (difference between “start value” and “remaining value”).
7) After end of measurements, calculate SEQ correction by following fomula.
(Removed Value of "SEQ‐CHECK"× 4) − 1000

(%)
× 100 　
1000
Input correction value

After all measurement (HD and SEQ), input measured value into UF correction cloumns.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R
15.2.2.2 Verification test of UF and SEQ accuracy
Please refer to the Chapter 15.2.1.3 and 15.2.1.5 of this maintenance manual.
U
15-19
15.3. Sensors (For software version Ver.04 or later)
turned on.)
15.3.1. Dialysate pressure sensor (PG3)calibration

Calibrated pressure gauge, Equipment to apply air
pressure such as syringe, tube, T-connector, clamps
O
2. Procedure
2-1. Calibration
N (Ex) Equipment to apply
R
1) Open the front door and clamp on the upper tube that is connected to the dialysate pressure
Q
TE
sensor. Disconnect the lower tube to leave the sensor in the atmospheric pressure.(Zero
SO Y
pressure)
IN
R
2) Turn ON the power supply and enter the TECHNICIAN mode.

3) Press the keys in the order of “MENU”→”TECHNITIAN”→”CALIBRATION”→”PRESSURE” to
display the PRESSURE CALIBRATION screen.
4) Press the PG3 below the camera icon to turns it to orange.
U
5) Confirm that LOW POINT is 0 mmHg and HI POINT is 735 mmHg. If these values are different,
touch the number and input correct values by ten-key pad.
6) Press and hold the CLEAR button at the bottom of the screen to reset the COEFFICIENT value.
7) When the LOW POINT button is pressed, the button turns yellow and the countdown of the
TIME LEFT starts. In the meantime, the machine records the data at atmospheric pressure.
8) Connect the calibration equipment to the opened connector of the pressure sensor.
15-20
9) By the syringe, to apply air pressure at
735mmHg to the pressure sensor. Read
the pressure though standard pressure
gauge and adjust it at 735mmHg. Clamp
the tube between syringe and T-connector
to hold the pressure (see figure on right).
10) When the HI POINT button is pressed, it
turns yellow and TIME LEFT starts
countdown. In the meantime, the machine
records the data at 735mmHg.
11) When TIME LEFT becomes 0 and data Blockage of tube
recording is complete, the CALCULATE

button appears. Press and hold this button. COEFFICIENT value is calculated and displayed
based on the data.
12) Press the PG3 colored orange to turn to blue again to turn off the orange.
O
2-2 Confirmation after calibration
N
R
1) Disconnect the calibration equipment. Confirm the PG3 VALUE is within 0±5 mmHg under the
Q
TE
atmospheric pressure condition.

SO Y
2) Reconnect the calibration equipment, pressurize around 700 mmHg and clamp. Confirm the
IN
R
PG3 VALUE is within the displayed value ±5 mmHg of the standard pressure gauge.
3) If the result of step 1) or 2), or both one failed, recalibrate the sensor.
4) If results are passed, press the EXIT button to exit from the calibration screen and turn off the
power supply. Remove the calibration equipment and reconnect the tube to the original position.
U
15-21
15.3.2. Arterial (PG4a)/Venous (PG5) Pressure Sensor Calibration (For software version
Ver.04 or later)
This procedure applies to software version Ver.04 or later.
Check the software version of your machine and follow
the procedure if applicable.
(If you do not know to verify the software version, on the
wake-up screen right after the machine turned on.)

Calibrated pressure gauge, Equipment to apply air
pressure such as syringe, tube, T-connector, clamps
(Ex) Equipment to apply
2. Procedure
2-1 Offset calibration
1) Confirm both arterial pressure1 (PG4a) and venous (PG5) connection ports are open.
O
3)
N
Press the keys in the order of “MENU”→”TECHNITIAN”→”CALIBRATION”→”PRESSURE” to
R
Q
TE
4) Press PG4a and PG5 below the camera icon to turn them to orange.
SO Y
5) Press and hold the CLEAR button at the bottom of the screen to reset the COEFFICIENT value.
IN
R
6) When the OFFSET button is pressed, the button turns yellow and TIME LEFT countdown starts.
In the meantime, the machine records the data at the atmospheric pressure.
7) When TIME LEFT becomes 0 and data recording is complete, OFFSET values (b1 and b2) are
automatically calculated and displayed based on the data recorded.
U

1) Confirm the PG4a and PG5 VALUE are within 0 ± 5 mmHg under the atmospheric pressure
condition.
2) Connect the calibration equipment to the arterial / venous pressure port, and pressurize around
400 mmHg. Confirm that the PG4a and PG5 values are within the displayed value ± 5 mmHg of
the standard pressure gauge.
3) If the results of step 1) or 2) or both are failed, follow calibrate the sensor(s) under the
pressurized condition referred to 2-3.
15-22
2-3 Calibration under the pressurized condition
2) Press the keys in the order of “MENU”→”TECHNITIAN”→”CALIBRATION”→”PRESSURE” to
3) Press the sensor needs to be calibrated below the camera icon, and to turn it to orange.
4) Confirm that LOW POINT value is 0 mmHg and HI POINT is 500 mmHg. If these values are
different, touch the number and input correct values by the ten-key pad.
5) Press and hold the CLEAR button at the bottom of the screen. To reset the COEFFICIENT
value.
6) Press the number below the TIME LEFT button and input “60” by the ten-key pad.
7) When the LOW POINT button is pressed, the button turns yellow and the countdown of the
TIME LEFT starts. In the meantime, the machine records the data at atmospheric pressure.
8) When TIME LEFT becomes 0 and data recording is complete. Again, input “60” into the time left
and press ENTER.
O
NOTE N
Although CALCULATE button appears and flashes, do not touch it.
R
Q
TE
9) Connect the calibration equipment to the blood pressure port needs to be calibrated.
SO Y
10) By the syringe, to apply air pressure at 500mmHg to the

IN
R
pressure sensor. Read the pressure though standard

pressure gauge and adjust it at 500mmHg. Clamp the tube
between syringe and T-connector to hold the pressure (see
figure on right).
U
11) When the HI POINT button is pressed, it turns yellow and

TIME LEFT starts countdown. In the meantime, the machine
records the data at 500mmHg.
12) When TIME LEFT becomes 0 and data reading is complete,
the CALCULATION button appears. Press and hold this
button. COEFFICIENT value is calculated and displayed
Blockage of tube
based on the data.
13) Repeat 2-2 Confirmation after calibration. If the results are failed, repeat 2-3.
14) If the results are passsed, press the EXIT button to exit from the calibration screen.
15-23
15.3.3. Temperature sensor calibration (For software version Ver.04 or later)
turned on.)

Calibrated temperature meter (which can be connected to the dialyzer coupler.), 2 clamps (Used
for T2/T4 calibration)
NOTE
If you do not have the connectable temperature meter to the coupler, calibration can be
performed by directly connecting a temperature meter to the dialysate line tube. In this case,
remove the dialyzer coupler from the coupler holder beforehand, and then put into the container
O
with water. Calibration cannot be performed if the machine detects the presence of the coupler.
N
R
2. Procedure
Q
TE
2-1 Calibration of T1 and T3

SO Y
1) Close the front door and back cover.

IN
R
2) Connect the calibrated temperature meter to the dialyzer coupler.

4) Press the keys in the order of “MENU”→”TECHNICIAN”→”CALIBRATION”→” TEMPERATURE”
to display the TEMPERATURE CALIBRATION screen.
U
5) Press the T1 and T3 below the camera icon, and turn them to orange. Confirm that temperature
sensor other than T1 and T3 are not selected (gray).
6) Press and hold the CLEAR button to reset the COEFFICIENT value.
7) Press the number portion at the right side of the CHECK button. Enter “25.0” by ten-key pad
and press ENTER.
8) When the CHECK button is pressed, temperature adjustment starts and the button turns yellow.
9) Run the machine under this condition for approx. 5 minutes. Monitor the temperature displayed
at VALUE (°C), and confirm that it reaches around 25.0°C and it is stable.
NOTE
Press the GRAPH button located at the bottom of the screen to display the temperature trend
graph. If the temperature amplitude is within ±0.3°C for 10 seconds, it is regarded as stable.
15-24
NOTE
When water supply temperature is higher than 25.0 degrees Celsius, please wait to be stable at
the temperature.
NOTE
If the displayed temperature value looks incorrect or wrongly, air bubbles are possibly
accumulated in the temperature sensor portion. Remove the air bubbles and calibration again.
10) After confirming that the temperature is stable, read the value indicated by the Standard
temperature meter.
11) Press the number portion at the right side of the LOW POINT button. By the ten-key pad, enter
the value indicated by the Standard temperature meter, and press ENTER.
12) Press the LOW POINT button to measure LOW POINT Temperature. Pressing LOW POINT
button starts the measurement, and it turns yellow. The button returns to gray when the
O
measurement is finished.
13) Press CHECK button to finish LOW POINT measurement. The CHECK button turns gray.
N
14) Press the number portion at the right side of the CHECK button. Enter “37.0” by the ten-key pad
R
and press ENTER.
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R
at VALUE (°C), and confirm that it reaches stable around 37.0°C and it is stable.
NOTE
U
graph. If the temperature fluctuation is within ±0.3°C per 10 seconds, it is regarded as stable.
temperature sensor.
18) Press the number portion at the right side of the HI POINT button. By the ten-key pad enter the
value indicated by the Standard temperature meter and press ENTER.
19) Press the HI POINT button to measure LOW POINT Temperature. Pressing HI POINT button
starts the measurement, and it turns yellow. The button returns to gray when the measurement is
finished. CALCULATE button appears in the bottom of screen.
20) Press and hold the CALCULATE button to calculate COEFFICIENT of T1 and T3 (a1, a2, b1
and b2).
21) Confirm that the values indicated in T1, T3 and the Standard temperature sensor indicate almost
same values.
22) Press CHECK button to stop temperature calibration.
15-25
23) Press theT1 and T3 below the camera icon, and turn them to gray to cancel the selection.
2-2 Calibration of T2 and T4

When the system is not in operation, check the temperature difference between T2 and T4 from the
TEMPERATURE CALIBRATION screen. If the difference is ± 0.4°C or higher, calibrate T2 and T4.
1) Turn OFF the power supply.
2) Open the back cover and close a clamp at the lower side of the T2 and T4 tubes.
3) Remove the lower side of the CD2 tube and connect the Standard temperature meter
inbetween.
CAUTION
If the tube is removed, air bubbles can enter the tube or temperature sensor. This can cause
failure in dialysate temperature measurement. Take extra caution not to allow air to enter when
removing the tube.
4) Remove the clamp and confirm that connection is proper. Turn ON the power supply and enter
O
the TECHNICIAN mode. N
5) Press the keys in the order of “MENU”→”TECHNICIAN”→”CALIBRATION”→”TEMPERATURE”
R
to display the TEMPERATURE CALIBRATION screen.
Q
TE
6) Press the T2 and T4 below the camera icon, and turn them to orange. Confirm that temperature
SO Y
sensor other than T2 and T4 are not selected (gray).

IN
R
7) Press and hold the CLEAR button to reset current value.

8) Press the number portion at the right side of the CHECK button. Enter “25.0” by ten-key pad and
press ENTER.
U
at VALUE (°C), and confirm that it reaches around 25.0°C and it is stable.
NOTE
graph. If the temperature change is within ±0.3°C for 10 seconds, it is regarded as stable.
NOTE
When water supply temperature is higher than 25.0 degrees Celsius, please wait to be stable at
the temperature.
15-26
NOTE
If the displayed temperature value looks incorrect or wrongly, air bubbles are possibly
accumulated in the temperature sensor portion. Remove the air bubbles and calibrate again.
temperature meter.
12) Press the number portion at the right side of the LOW POINT button. By the ten-key pad, enter
the value indicated by the Standard temperature meter, and press ENTER.
13) Press the LOW POINT button to measure LOW POINT Temperature. Pressing LOW POINT
button starts the measurement, and it turns yellow. The button returns to gray when the
measurement is finished.
14) Press CHECK button to finish measurement of 25°C.
15) Press the number portion at the right side of the CHECK button. Enter “37.0” by the ten-key pad
and press ENTER.
O
N
at VALUE and confirm that it reaches around 37.0°C and it is stable.
R
Q
TE
NOTE
SO Y
IN
R
temperature sensor.
U
19) Press the number portion at the right side of the HI POINT button. By the ten-key pad, enter the
value indicated by the Standard temperature meter and press ENTER.
24) Press the HI POINT button to measure HIGH POINT Temperature. Pressing HI POINT button
starts the measurement, and it turns yellow. The button returns to gray when the measurement is
finished. CALCULATE button appears in the bottom of screen.
20) Press and hold CALCULATE button to calculate COEFFICIENT of T2 and T4 (a1, a2, b1 and
b2).
21) Confirm that the values indicated in T2, T4 and the Standard temperature sensor indicate the
almost same values.
22) Press CHECK button to stop temperature adjustment.
23) Touch the display portion of T2 and T4 below the camera icon to cancel the selection.
15-27
15.3.4. Conductivity sensor calibration (For software version Ver.04 or later)
turned on.)
NOTE
If one of the following situations may be occurred, Conductivity sensor can not be calibrated
properly. Please check all one by one.
-Temperature sensor may not correct value: “Please calibrate the temperature sensor first.”
-Sensor is already dirt: “Please clean it like by giving Hot Citric Rinse etc.”
-Leakage the sensor or damaged: Please check (loose tubing/screws) and replace if needed.
-Loose screws of sensor for fixing the harness: “Tighten the screws of sensors.”
-Loose connectors on the Cond. P.C.B.: “Check connectors CN1,2,3 and 4 on the Cond. P.C.B.”
O
1. Instrument and tools required N
Standard conductivity sensor (which can be connected to the dialyzer coupler), Solution that is 60
R
mS/cm or higher (Dialysate A solution can be used)
Q
TE
SO Y
NOTE
IN
R
Even if you do not have the standard conductivity sensor that can be connected to the dialyzer
coupler, calibration can be performed. See reference listed later in this chapter for details.
NOTE
U
Central delivery system option can use for conductivity sensor calibration.
2. Procedure
2-1 Calibration
1) Close the front and back doors.
2) Connect the standard conductivity sensor to the dialyzer coupler.
4) Press the keys in the order of “MENU”→”TECHNICIAN”→”CALIBRATION”→”CONDUCTIVITY”
to display the CONDUCTIVITY CALIBRATION screen.
5) Touch and select the CD1, CD2, CD3 and CD4 display portions below the camera icon to turn
on the orange.
6) Press and hold the CLEAR button located at the bottom of the screen to reset the
COEFFICIENT value.
15-28
7) Prepare the Solution for Conductivity sensor calibration.
・ Use the concentration container:

Remove the blue nozzle and insert it into the container with the solution that has 60 mS/cm
or higher. (Recommendation: A solution)
・ Use the Central delivery system:

Select the solution type from lower right buttons and NOT remove the nozzles.
8) Press the number portion at the right side of the CHECK button to display the ten-key pad. Enter
“2.0” and press ENTER.
9) Press the CHECK button. When the CHECK button turns yellow, the P4 pump starts. The
solution is aspirated from the blue nozzle and it sends the solution to the coupler side.
10) Run the machine under this condition for approx. 2 minutes. Monitor the conductivity displayed
at VALUE and confirm that it becomes stable around 1.5-2.5 mS/cm.
O
NOTE
N
R
Press the GRAPH button located at the bottom of the screen to display the conductivity change
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R
NOTE
If the conductivity value might be displayed incorrect or wrongly, air bubbles are possibly
accumulated in the conductivity sensor portion. Remove the air bubbles and repeat the
U
procedure.
11) After confirming that the conductivity is stable, read the value indicated by the standard
conductivity sensor.
12) Press the number portion at the right side of the LOW POINT button to display the ten-key pad.
Enter the value indicated by the standard conductivity sensor in 2) and press ENTER.
13) When the LOW POINT button is pressed, the button turns yellow and TIME LEFT countdown
starts. In the meantime, the machine records conductivity data of each sensor. Record the data
while conductivity sensor for calibration is recording the data.
14) After recording data is complete, the light of the LOW POINT button goes off.
15) Press CHECK button to stop the pumps.
16) Press the number portion at the right side of the CHECK button to display the ten keys. Enter
“16.0” and press ENTER.
17) Press the CHECK button. When the CHECK turns yellow, the P4 pump starts. The solution is
15-29
aspirated from the blue nozzle and it sends the solution to the coupler side.
at VALUE and confirm that it becomes stable around 15.0-17.0 mS/cm.
NOTE
Press the GRAPH button located at the bottom of the screen to display the conductivity change
NOTE
If the conductivity value might be displayed incorrect or wrongly, air bubbles are possibly
accumulated in the conductivity sensor portion. Remove the air bubbles and repeat the
procedure.
19) After confirming that the conductivity is stable, read the value indicated by the standard
O
conductivity sensor.
20) Press the number portion at the right side of the HI POINT button to display the ten-key pad.
N
Enter the value indicated by the standard conductivity sensor in 2) and press ENTER.
R
21) When the HI POINT button is pressed again, blinking light changes to the state of being lit, and
Q
TE
TIME LEFT countdown starts. In the meantime, the machine reads conductivity data of each
SO Y
sensor. Record the data while conductivity sensor for calibration is reading the data.
IN
R
22) After reading data is complete, the light of the HI POINT button goes off, and the CALCULATE
button appears and blinks.
23) Press and hold CALCULATE button to calculate the value of Coefficient data. Correction
coefficient will be calculated automatically and it will be displayed in the COEFFICIENT column.
U
24) Press CHECK button to stop the pumps.

25) Touch the display portion from CD1 to CD4 below the camera icon to cancel the selection.
NOTE
An air bubble may stick to the conductivity sensor or the sensor is stained when the indication
column of Coefficient turned red. Please carry out calibration again after rinsing hydraulic line.
15-30
1) Touch the number portion at the right side of the CHECK button to display the ten-key pad and
enter 14.0 mS/cm.
2) When the CHECK button is pressed, the solution is aspirated through the blue nozzle. The P4
pump works so that it will be 14.0mS/cm and the solution will be sent to the coupler side.
at VALUE and confirm that the value is stable.
NOTE
Press the GRAPH button located at the bottom of the screen to display the temperature change
graph. If the conductivity stays at 14.0±0.3 mS/cm per 10 seconds, it is regarded as stable.
4) Confirm that it is within the target range. Press the CHECK button again to stop its running. If it
is not within the range, repeat calibration.
5) Press the EXIT button and perform WATER RINSE for 10 minutes or longer. Next, return to the
O
CONDUCTIVITY CALIBRATION screen and confirm that the value of each sensor is within the
N
range of 0.1-0.3 mS/cm. If it is not within the range, repeat calibration.
R
Q
TE
REFERENCE
SO Y
When the standard conductivity sensor that can be directly connected to the coupler holder is not
IN
R
available, measure the basic conductivity by the following procedure.

When reading the value indicated by the standard conductivity sensor, do so by the following
procedure:
1) Prepare a container with 10 L or more water. Soak the red and blue dialyzer coupler holders and
U
start calibration.
2) Pull up the blue dialyzer coupler from the container.
3) Collect the solution that is discharged from the blue dialyzer coupler in a separate container.
(Leave the red dialyzer coupler in water.)
4) Measure the conductivity of the collected solution.
15-31
15.4. Blood sensor calibration (BD)
15.4.1. Blood sensor calibration (BD) (For amp type: FX-D1)
Note) This procedure is applicable to the sensor amps (SUNX (Panasonic) FX-D1) equipped with the
models with serial No. 03A0001E to No. 04A0207E. Check the serial No. of equipment, and
perform the applicable procedure.

Bloodline tube filled with saline (or water), Bloodline tube filled with simulated blood
CAUTION
Do not set the mode change switch of the sensor amp to MODE in this adjustment.
2. Procedure
1) Turn ON the power supply.
O
2) Open the front door. Confirm that a number is displayed on the blood sensor amp located at the
N
lower portion of the back of the door.
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
BD Sensor AMP
CAUTION
Sensor fiber is extremely delicate. Take extra caution not to bend or damage the coating.
If the output of sensor amp is extremely low, check the following:
・ Connection of the sensor fiber amp (check the lock lever)
・ Check if the sensor fiber is bending or there is damage on the coating
・ Check if the receiver or reflector of the sensor is soiled
If the status is not improved after checking the above points, the sensor amp, blood sensor fiber,
or reflector needs to be replaced.
15-32
3) Press the keys in the order of “MENU”→”TECHNICIAN”→”CALIBRATION”→”BD / AIR / BLD
SENSOR” to display the BD CALIBRATION screen.
(In case of the software version Ver.6.00 or later, please press the keys in the order of “MENU”
→”TECHNICIAN”→”CALIBRATION”→”BD/AIR”.)
4) Empty inside of the clamp cover and confirm the clamp cover is closed.
5) Touch the number portion at the right side of the STANDARD button to display the ten-key
pad .Enter the value indicated in the blood sensor amp.
6) Machine calculates the value of threshold level and indicates in threshold column.
7) Enter the threshold level in the amp. (See Figure 2)
I. Open the cover of the amp.
II. Bring the mode change switch to the RUN side.
III. Turn the JOG switch to the ＋ or － side and set it as the detection output 1.
NOTE
When the JOG switch is pressed accidentally, the display changes to %. Press the JOG switch
O
again to return to the original display.
N
R
IV. Bring the mode change switch to the SET side. The current threshold level is displayed.
Q
TE
V. Enter the value of threshold level displayed in 6) to the amp. The threshold level gradually
SO Y
increases when the JOG switch is turned to the ＋ side. When it is fully turned to the ＋
IN
R
side, the threshold level will increase by the fast forwarding mode. Turn the JOG switch to
the － side to gradually decrease the threshold level. When it is fully turned to the － side,
the threshold level will decrease by fast the forwarding mode.
VI. Bring the mode change switch to the RUN side.
U
VII. Also enter the threshold level to the detection output 2, same as above procedure 7) Ⅰto
Ⅶ.
Detection output display

JOG switch
Displays detection output 1 Mode change switch
Figure 2 Rough sketch of the blood sensor amp

Displays detection output 2
15-33
8) After entering the threshold level detection output 2, bring the mode change switch to the RUN
side and install the cover.
9) Press the keys in the order of “MENU” → ”NURSE” → ”MONITOR” → ”FLOW MONITOR”
→”FLOW2” to display the FLOW2 MONITOR screen. Confirm that the graphic display of the
bloodline is the same as shown in Table 2 under the conditions of following “a” and “b”
a When bloodline tube filled with saline (or water) is set to the blood sensor.
b When bloodline tube for simulated blood is set to the blood sensor.
Table 2
Type of tube Color of bloodline
Tube is not inserted (Clamp cover is closed) Gray
Saline tube (Above “a”) is inserted Blue
Simulated blood tube (Above “b”) is inserted Red
NOTE
O
When the state of blood line in FLOW MONITOR2 screen is wrong, change the input value to
N
amp from “STANDARD value” to “intermediate value of measurement result of simulated Blood
R
and Air tube”.
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
15-34
15.4.2. Blood sensor calibration (BD) (For amp type: FX-301)
Note) This procedure is applicable to the sensor amps (SUNX (Panasonic) FX-301) equipped with
the models with serial No. 04A0208E or later. Check the serial No., and perform the applicable
procedure.

• Bloodline tube filled with saline (or water).
• Bloodline tube filled with simulated blood.
2. Procedure
lower position of the back of the door.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R
BD Sensor AMP
U
CAUTION
If the sensor amp output is extremely low, check the following:
・ Check if the sensor fiber is bending or there is damage on the coating.
・ Check if the receiver or reflector of the sensor is soiled.
If the status is not improved after checking the above, the sensor amp, blood sensor fiber or
reflector need to be replaced.
15-35
3) Press the keys in the order of “MENU”→”TECHNICIAN”→”CALIBRATION”→”BD / AIR / BLD
SENSOR” to display the BD CALIBRATION screen.
(In case of the software version Ver.6.00 or later, please press the keys in the order of “MENU”
→”TECHNICIAN”→”CALIBRATION”→”BD/AIR”.)
4) Enter the threshold level in the amp.
(Refer to Figure 3.)
i Press the Mode change switch several times to bring the mode display LED to Pro. (Pro is
displayed).
ii The PRO mode can be entered by pressing JOG switch, and Pro 1 to Pro 5 can be selected
by turning the JOG switch to be + or – side several times. In this step, press the JOG switch
with Pro1 displayed to select Pro1.
iii Turn the JOG switch to the + or – side several times to display SPEd, and press the JOG
switch select SPEd.
iv When S-d is not displayed, display S-d by turning the JOG switch to the + or – side several
times, and press the JOG switch to select S-d mode.
O
v Return to the initial status by pressing the Mode changing switch several times. Check that
RUN is displayed for the mode display LED.
N
R
Mode change switch
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R
JOG switch
U
Mode display LED
6) Touch the number portion at the right side of the STANDARD button to display the ten-key pad
and enter the value indicated in the blood sensor amp.
7) Machine calculates the value of threshold level and indicates in threshold column.
15-36
8) Enter the threshold level in the amp.
i Press the Mode change switch several times to bring the mode display LED to ADJ. (The
current threshold level is displayed.)
ii Turn the JOG switch to the + or – side to adjust display value that is the threshold level to
calculated value in step 5)
NOTE
When turning the JOG switch to the + side, the threshold level is raised slowly at first and then
gradually faster. When turning it to the – side, the threshold level is lowered slowly at first and
then gradually faster.
iii When the threshold level to be set is displayed, press the JOG switch to enter it.
iv Return to the initial status by pressing the Mode change switch several times. Check that
RUN is displayed for the mode display LED.
O
9) After entering the threshold level, attach the cover.
N
10) Confirm that the machine properly recognizes the Blood tube condition. Press the keys in the
R
order of “MENU > NURSE > MONITOR > FLOW MONITOR > FLOW 2 to display the FLOW2
Q
TE
MONITOR screen. Confirm that the graphic display of the bloodline is the same as shown in
SO Y
Table 3 under the conditions of following “a” and “b”

IN
R
b When bloodline tube for simulated blood is set to the blood sensor
Table 3
U

NOTE
and Air tube”.
15-37
Reference:
If you had wrong calibrate, and you cannot calibrate it properly, you should reset it once and calibrate
again.
So this normally, you do not need RESET color sensor.
RESET of blood color sensor (BD) (For amp type: FX-301)

Note) This procedure is applicable to the sensor amps (SUNX Limited FX-301) equipped with the
models with serial No. 04A0208E or later. Check the serial No. and perform the applicable procedure.
Procedure
CAUTION
O
N
R
Q
TE

SO Y

IN
R
3) Change the sensor amp mode from the Std mode to the S-d mode (dim mode). (Refer to
U
Chapter 15.4.2: Figure 3.)

i Press the Mode change switch several times to bring the mode display LED to Pro. (Pro is
displayed).
ii The PRO mode can be entered by pressing JOG switch, and Pro 1 to Pro 5 can be selected by
turning the JOG switch to be + or – side several times. In this step, press the JOG switch with
PRO 1 displayed to select Pro 5.
iii Turn the JOG switch to the + or – side several times to display , and press the
JOG switch select it.
15-38
15.4.3. Blood sensor calibration (BD) (For amp type: FX-101)
Note) This procedure is applicable to the sensor amps (SUNX (Panasonic) FX-101) equipped with
the models with serial No. 13G8302E or later. Check the serial No., and perform the applicable
procedure.

• Bloodline tube filled with saline (or water).
• Bloodline tube filled with simulated blood.
2. Procedure
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R
BD Sensor AMP
U
CAUTION
15-39
3) Press the keys in the order of “MENU”→”TECHNICIAN”→”CALIBRATION”→”AIR/BD SENSOR”
to display the AIR / BD CALIBRATION screen.
5) Open the front cover of the amp from Operation Lamp cover side. (See Figure4)
6) Confirm the indication value of Incident light intensity (① in the figure4: Red).
7) Touch the number portion on the right side of the STANDARD button to display the ten-key pad
and enter the indication value of Incident light intensity. Machine calculation the threshold value.
8) Press hold MODE and ▽ key for over 2sec (until “ ” is displayed), and
unlock.
NOTE
If it is in a locked state, “ ” is displayed when push the any key.
O
9) Press △ (ON) and ▽ (OFF) key and change the threshold value (② in the figure4: Green),
N
and enter the threshold level in the amp. The threshold value is memorized in 3 seconds
R
automatically.
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R
ON / Volume UP key
Operation Lamp（Orange） MODE Key OFF / Volume DOWN key

U
②Threshold value(Green) ①Incident light intensity (Red)
Figure 4 Rough sketch of the blood sensor amp (FX-101)
10) After entering the threshold value, attach the cover.

11) Confirm that the machine properly recognizes the Blood tube condition. Press the keys in the
order of “MENU > NURSE > MONITOR > FLOW MONITOR > FLOW 2 to display the FLOW2
MONITOR screen. Confirm that the graphic display of the bloodline is the same as shown in
Table 3 under the conditions of following “a” and “b”
b When bloodline tube for simulated blood is set to the blood sensor
15-40
Table 3
NOTE
and Air tube”.
Reference:
If you had wrong calibrate, and you cannot calibrate it properly, you should reset it once and calibrate
O
again.
So this normally, you do not need RESET color sensor. N
R
How to RESET of blood color sensor (BD) (For amp type: FX-101)
Q
TE
Note) This procedure is applicable to the sensor amps (SUNX Limited FX-101) equipped with the
SO Y
models with serial No. 13G8302E or later. Check the serial No. and perform the applicable
IN
R
procedure.
Procedure
U
CAUTION
15-41
3) Press hold the MODE key for over 4sec (until “ ” is displayed), and enter the PRO
mode.
( is displayed in the 2sec from pressing.)
4) Press MODE key 8 times in PRO mode, and confirm ” ” is displayed.
5) Press △ or ▽key、and change to ” ”. Press the mode key once, reset the all
setting of this amp.
6) Next, set up the amp. Press hold the MODE key for over 2sec, and enter the mode.
7) Press the mode key once, and confirm ” ” is displayed.
Press △ or ▽ key, and change to ” ”. Press the mode key once, determine
O
the setting.
N
R
8) Press MODE key twice, confirm ” ” is displayed.
Q
TE
Press ▽ key twice, and change to ” ”. Press the MODE key once, determine
SO Y
IN
R
the setting.
9) Press MODE key, Calibrate the BD sensor (refer to 15.4.3)
U
15-42
15.5. Blood Pump
15.5.1. Adjustment of BP (Blood Pump) closed condition
[When using a large diameter tube (Inner dia. φ8 mm) bloodline]

Arterial side bloodline, Box wrench (7 mm), calipers
2. Procedure
(1) Pull the handle to toward the front, and remove rotor. (Refer to Chapter11.3.25 Blood Pump.)
(2) Adjust the gap between the rotor and the rotor bracket (See table below.). The gap increases
when the gap adjusting nut is turned counterclockwise, and decreases when turned clockwise.
Gap adjusting nut
O
N View A
R
Q
TE
B: Gap between rotor and rotor bracket

Center of blood pump
SO Y
IN
R
Table: Dimension of Gap B
Large diameter Small diameter

Bloodline size
Inner dia. φ8 Inner dia. φ6.35
Aluminum Casing (silver) 3.5mm 4.2mm

U
Plastic Casing (white) 3.9mm 4.6mm
Plastic Casing (white)

4.2mm 4.8mm
See NOTE)
NOTE) The case of expanding BP flow rate to less than 50mL/min. However, it required the Machine
Type4 and software ver.7.20.
(3) Set the bloodline to the blood pump and perform priming of the bloodline.
(4) Block the rolling tube of the bloodline with one roller.
(5) Set up the bloodline so that the vertical distance from the center of the blood pump to the tip of
the bloodline on the discharge side becomes approximately 1.5 meter.
(6) Confirm that there is no liquid leak from the suction side of the bloodline.
(7) Turn the rotor step by step by 45° at one time from the position in Step (6) and confirm that there
is no liquid leak at each turning position. Continue this check until the rotor returns to its original
15-43
orientation.
(8) If any liquid leak is observed, increase the gap between the rotor and the rotor bracket (B). and
then perform the leak check in the procedures in Steps (2) to (6) again.
(9) Make the gap adjustment until liquid leak is completely eliminated by repeating the above
procedures.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
15-44
15.5.2. Calibration of BP (Blood Pump) flow rate (For software version from Ver.04 to
Ver.07.11)
This procedure applies to software version from Ver.04 to Ver.07.11. Check the software version of
your machine and use the appropriate procedure. (If you do not know the version, it is displayed by
screen right after power supply of the machine is turned on.)

Electronic balance (or measuring cylinder that can hold approx. 1000 mL), Measuring container
1 L or more), Arterial side bloodline, Bucket
CAUTION
Check the gap adjustment of the rotor according to a using pump segment dimension before
calibration.
See 15.5.1 Adjustment of BP (Blood Pump) closed condition
O
2. Procedure
N
R
1) Set the Arterial side bloodline on the machine and soak it into the bucket filled with water to
Q
TE
prime the bloodline.

SO Y
2) Turn ON the power supply. Water is filled up in the bloodline by running the blood pump.
IN
R
3) Enter the TECHNICIAN mode, and press the keys in the order of “MENU”→”TECHNICIAN”
→”CALIBRATION”→”BP PUMP” to display the BP CALIBRATION screen.
4) Prepare an electronic balance, and place the measuring container on it.
5) Measure the measurement container with electric balance, and input the gram value of
U
container to START VOLUME column.

6) Place the outlet side of the bloodline into the measuring container.
7) Press the 8.00mm or 6.35mm button to select the tube to be used.
8) Press and hold the OFFSET button. The blood pump starts rotating. It stops automatically after
a certain period of time passes.
9) Take out the bloodline from the measuring container and read the display on the electronic
balance. Input the gram value into the END VOLUME column.
10) Press and hold the OFFSET button. The offset value is calculated automatically and the color of
the button returns to the original color.
11) Set the bloodline again in accordance with the procedures (5) and (6).
12) Press and hold the GAIN button. The blood pump starts rotating and stops automatically after a
certain period of time passes.
balance And input the gram value of container to END VOLUME column.
14) Press and hold the GAIN button. The gain value is calculated automatically and the color of the
15-45
button returns to the original color.
15) When calibration is complete, use the same bloodline to measure the flow volumes for when the
BP runs at 100 mL/min, 300 mL/min, and 600 mL/min settings (When select the 6.35mm,
600mL/min is changed to 450mL/min.). Confirm that the measurement is within the range of the
preset flow ±10%.The confirmation of flow quantity, check the following reference.
Reference: Verification test of BP rate

3) Measure the Measurement container with electric balance, and input the value of container to
START VOLUME column.
6) Press and hold the CHECK 100 button. The blood pump starts rotating with 100mL/min. It stops
O
automatically after 60 seconds.
N
R
balance. And input the value of container to END VOLUME column.
Q
TE
8) Press and hold the CHECK 100 button. It judges flow quantity accuracy from measured value.
SO Y
IN
R
NOTE
When the CHECK100 column is red, it means that is out of the standard range. In that case carry out
the pump calibration again.
U
9) Confirm flow quantity accuracy of 300mL/min, 600 mL/min (When select the 6.35mm,
600mL/min is changed to 450mL/min.) as well.
NOTE
If it is not within the above range, adjust in accordance with “Confirmation of BP (Blood Pump)
closed condition” and calibrate the BP flow again.
15-46
15.5.3. Calibration of BP (Blood Pump) flow rate (For software version Ver. 07.20 or later)
This procedure applies to software version Ver.07.20 or later. Check the software version and use the
appropriate procedure. Additionally, the procedure is different between machine types.
(If you do not know the version and machine type, software version is displayed in startup screen and
be able to check the machine type from S/N. Please refer to Chapter 11.3.)

Electronic balance (or measuring cylinder that can hold approx. 1000 mL),
Measuring container (1 L or more), Arterial side bloodline, Bucket
2. Procedure
CAUTION
Check the gap adjustment of the rotor according to a using pump segment dimension before
calibration.
O
See 15.5.1 Adjustment of BP (Blood Pump) closed condition
N
R
Q
TE

SO Y
2) Turn ON the power supply. Water is filled up in the bloodline by running the blood pump.
IN
R
3) Enter the TECHNICIAN mode, and press the keys in the order of “MENU”→”TECHNICIAN”
→”CALIBRATION”→”BP PUMP” to display the BP CALIBRATION screen.
5) Measure the measurement container with electric balance, and input the gram value of
U
container to START VOLUME column.

8) Changes the procedure according to machine type or BP flow range.

The machine type is Type3 or before, or not change the range of BP flow rate from Initial
setting.
-> Skip the procedures to step 10)
Change the range of BP flow rate.

Change the “Digit” value that is located in upper right screen to “105”.
If the rotor turn smoothly when operate by OFFSET, advance to next process. Otherwise, add 5
to Digit value and check the rotation. Repeat it until rotor turn smoothly.
9) Set the Minimun and Maximum value.

15-47
10) Press and hold the OFFSET button. The blood pump starts rotating. It stops automatically after
a certain period of time passes.
balance. Input the gram value into the END VOLUME column.
12) Press and hold the OFFSET button. The offset value is calculated automatically and the color of
the button returns to the original color.
13) Set the bloodline again in accordance with the procedures (5) and (6).
14) Press and hold the GAIN button. The blood pump starts rotating and stops automatically after a
certain period of time passes.
balance and input the gram value of container to END VOLUME column.
16) Press and hold the GAIN button. The gain value is calculated automatically and the color of the
button returns to the original color.
17) When calibration is complete, use the same bloodline to measure the flow volumes for when the
BP runs at Minimum, 100 mL/min, 300 mL/min, and Maximum settings.
18) Confirm that the measurement is within the accuracy (50 mL/min or more: ±10%, less than 50
O
mL/min: ±20%). The confirmation of flow quantity, check the following reference.
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
15-48
Reference: Verification test of BP rate
3) Measure the Measurement container with electric balance, and input the value of container to
START VOLUME column.
6) Press and hold the CHECK MIN button. The blood pump starts rotating with Minimum setting.
It stops automatically after 60 seconds. (If the Minimum setting is less than 50 mL/min, the time
is 120 seconds.)
balance. And input the value of container to END VOLUME column.
8) Press and hold the CHECK MIN button. It judges flow quantity accuracy from measured value.
O
NOTE N
When the CHECK MIN column is red, it means that is out of the standard range. In that case carry out
R
the pump calibration again.
Q
TE
SO Y
9) Confirm flow quantity accuracy of 100, 300 mL/min, and Maximum setting as well.
IN
R
NOTE
If it is not within the above range, adjust in accordance with “Confirmation of BP (Blood Pump)
closed condition” and calibrate the BP flow again.
U
15-49
15.6. Syringe Pump
15.6.1. Working point adjustment of syringe pump overload limit switch

Hexagon wrench (2 mm), Spanner wrench (7 mm)
2. Procedure
1) Push down the pusher to the bottom.
2) Open the front door of the machine and turn ON the power supply.
3) Loosen “the hex. Nut”
4) Loosen “the hex. socket-head set screw” by turning it counterclockwise and stop loosening it at
the position where the overload limit switch turns OFF. (See the display MENU – NURSE –
MONITOR – LIST MONITOR – LIMIT). When the overload limit switch OFF, LIMIT color changes
to yellow.
5) Syringe pump overload error (0230 HEPARIN LIMIT SW ON ) occurred.
O
6) Turn “the hex. socket-head set screw” clockwise by approximately 270° from this position, and
N
confirm the Syringe pump overload error has stopped.
R
7) Fix “the hex. socket-head set screw” by tightening “the hex. nut”.
Q
TE
(As “the hex. socket-head set screw” might turn around with “the hex. nut”, so hold “the hex.
SO Y
socket-head set screw” by Hexagon wrench while tightening “the hex. nut”. )
IN
R
Hex. Nut
Hex. Socket-head Set Screw
U
Limit Switch
15-50
15.6.2. Overload adjustment of syringe pump (when using NIPRO 20 mL syringe)
<Standard Procedures>
Spring balance
2. Procedure Syringe Pusher

2) Set the spring balance to the syringe pusher of the
syringe pump and fix the spring balance not to move.
3) Press the keys in the order of “MENU”→”NURSE”
→”TREATMENT”→”HEPARIN”.
4) Press the RAPID button to run the syringe pump in Spring Balance
the fast-forwarding mode.
5) Stop the fast-forwarding movement as soon as the
O
overload limit switch turns OFF and then read the
N
value of the spring balance (See the display MENU –
R
NURSE – MONITOR – LIST MONITOR – LIMIT).
Q
TE
When the overload limit switch OFF, LIMIT color

SO Y
changes to yellow.
IN
Fig. 1
R
6) Confirm the value of the spring balance (See table 1

next page).
7) If the value is not within the range, adjust the overload setting by turning the adjusting nut
(See Fig.2 below). As to the adjusting nut, force will be weaker when the nut is turned
U
clockwise when seen from the top (arrow direction in the figure) of the syringe pump, and
stronger when turned counterclockwise.
Adjusting nut
Fig.2
15-51
8) Check the adjustment again according to the steps (1) through (6) to confirm that the
adjusted value falls within the acceptable range.
Table 1 Adjustment value

Serial No. of Machine Adjustment value
Before 05A0309 3.5 – 4.0kgf
05A0310 or later 5.0 – 7.0kgf
<Simplified Procedures>
NIPRO 20 mL syringe (new one), Pressure gauge, etc.
2. Procedure Pressure Gauge
O
2) Set a new NIPRO20mL syringe filled with water or saline solution to
N
the syringe pump and connect a pressure gauge to the syringe as
R
shown in Fig. 3.
Q
TE
3) Press the keys in the order of “MENU”→”NURSE”→”TREATMENT”

SO Y
→”HEPARIN.”
IN
R
4) Press the RAPID button, and move the syringe pump in the
fast-forwarding mode.
5) Stop the fast-forwarding movement as soon as the overload limit
switch turns OFF and then read the value of the spring balance. (See
U
the display MENU – NURSE – MONITOR – LIST MONITOR – LIMIT).

6) Confirm the pressure value is in the range of 0.10-0.12 MPa (750 –
900 mmHg).
Fig. 3
NOTE
Be sure to use a new syringe since no accurate numerical value is obtained if a used
syringe is used.
7) Adjust the adjusting nut as in the standard procedures if the measured pressure value is not
within the acceptable range in the above step.
8) Confirm the adjusted value again according to the procedures in Steps (1) - (6) after adjustment.
15-52
15.6.3. Verification test of syringe pump stroke

Stopwatch, Calipers, NIPRO 20 mL syringe
2. Procedure
2) Press the keys in the order of “MENU” → ”NURSE”
→”TREATMENT”→”HEPARIN.”
3) Press the INITIAL button to open the Heparin Initial Data
screen and confirm that SYRINGE SIZE is 20mL and RATIO
is 100%. If RATIO is not 100%, record the present value and
change it to 100%.
4) Return to the SETTING screen by pressing SETTING.
5) Push down the pusher to the bottom. Install an empty NIPRO
O
20mL syringe to the syringe pump and perform BOLUS once,
N
afterwards measure the distance A shown in the right figure.
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R
NOTE
U
Be sure to perform BOLUS once. If measured without performing BOLUS, the movement
distance calculated later cannot be correctly measured.
6) Adjust FLOW RATE to 5mL/h and press the START button to start the pump.
7) Measure the distance A after the operation for one hour, and then confirm the difference in
distance (movement distance) between at the beginning and at the end is within 15.5 ± 0.5 mm.
8) Return the setting value for RATIO of 20 mL to the original setting in the Heparin Initial Data
screen.
15-53
15.6.4. Setting of syringe ratio (For software version from Ver.04 to Ver.06)
This procedure applies to software version from Ver.04 to Ver.06. Check the software version of your
turned on.)
NOTE
If a syringe is not manufactured by NIPRO, the syringe ratio needs to be set for the machine.
CAUTION
The 10 mL syringe pusher might be possible to hold the pressing, because part of it is slender
than holding part. Make sure that the pump can hold it correctly before calibration.
O
1. Instrument and tools required N
Electronic balance, 20 mL syringe, Tube for syringe connection, measuring container (Capacity:
R
50 mL or more)
Q
TE
SO Y
2. Procedure
IN
R

2) Press the keys in the order of “MENU”→”TECHNICIAN”→”CALIBRATION”→”SYRINGE PUMP”
to display the SYRINGE PUMP CALIBRATION screen.
3) Fill the syringe with water. Connect the tube so that water that comes out of the syringe and
U
goes into a measuring container.

4) Push the syringe lightly and fill the tube with water and set it to the syringe pump.
5) Press the RAPID button to discharge approx. 5 mL. Remove air inside the tube completely.
6) Confirm the type of 20 mL syringe is selected. If other type of syringe is selected, press the 20
mL button to select 20mL type.
7) Press and hold the RATE button. The color of the button turns orange, and the syringe pump
starts with set flow quantity. Keep it running until no air bubble found in a syringe and then, press
and hold the RATE button to stop a syringe pump.
8) Place a container on the electronic balance. Measure a container weight, and input the gram
value of container to START VOLUME column. Place the tube that is connected to the syringe
into the measuring container.
9) Press and hold the RATE button again. When the RATE button is pressed, RATE button turns
yellow and calibration starts.
10) When the setting time passes and the machine completes measurement, the syringe pump
stops and the RATE button blinks. The calibration time is adjustable by changing TIME LEFT.
15-54
Flow rate as well.
11) Pull out the tube from the measuring container, and read the number on the electronic balance.
12) Login the Technician mode again, and input the gram value to the END VOLUME column.
13) Press and hold RATE button, calibration stops and the CALCULATE button appears.
14) Press and hold the CALCULATE button, the value is calculated automatically.
Reference：Setting condition at the time of 15.6.4

FLOW RATE 5.0 mL/h
TIME LEFT 00:30 (30 min)
SYRINGE SIZE 20mL
RATE 100%
15) Repeat the steps 3)-15) to calibrate for 10 mL- and 30 mL- syringes.
CAUTION
O
The ratio that has a setting for each syringe shows the stroke ratio to standard syringes 10 mL/20
N
mL/30 mL. Be sure to calibrate the syringes of all sizes you will use.
R
Q
TE
SO Y
15.6.5. Setting of syringe length (For software version from Ver.07 or later)
IN
R
turned on.)
U
CAUTION
The 10 mL syringe pusher might be possible to hold the pressing, because part of it is slender
than holding part. Make sure that the pump can hold it correctly before calibration.

Syringe, Caliper or Scale.
2. Procedure
2) Press the keys in the order of “MENU”→”TECHNICIAN”→”CALIBRATION”→”SYRINGE PUMP”
to display the SYRINGE PUMP CALIBRATION screen.
15-55
3) Measure the distance from 0 to line of the each syringe size by Caliper or Scale.
4) Enter it to right column of the syringe size.
NOTE
Please confirm the infusion volume after the setting. Please see capter 7. in this manual.
15.7. Calibration of dialysate

NOTE
If the values of displayed conductivity are not correct, this calibration could not be done properly.
Please confirm those whether correct values or not before do this calibration. If not correct,
please calibrate conductivity sensor value first.
NOTE
If you use the BICARB CARTRIDGRE OPTION and or CENTRAL DELIVERY SYSTEM
O
OPTION, please refer to the option manual.
N
R
1. Instruments and required
Dialysate solution
Q
TE
2. Procedure
SO Y
1) Turn ON the power supply of the machine and enter the TECHNICIAN mode.
IN
R
2) Press the keys in the order of “MENU”→”TECHNICIAN”→”CALIBRATION”→”DIALYSATE

SOLUTION” to open the Dialysate Solution Calibration screen.
3) Select one tab number (No.1 – No.4) to register dialysate concentrate.
4) Select the dialysis mode to use at CONCENTRATE TYPE, BICARBO or ACETATE.
U
A) Select BICARBO in step (4)

5) Touch the column of “SOLUTION A” or “SOLUTION B ” to input the names of the dialysate to use
to SOLUTION A and SOLUTION B.
6) Input the dilution ratio of A concentrate and B concentrate to DILUTION.
7) Input the estimated conductivity value “TOTAL” and “B+W” to A solution side and B solution side
respectively. (The estimated conductivity is a theoretical conductivity.)
8) Set the dialysate solution (A solution and B solution) and hold the CALIBRATION button pressed
for a while.
NOTE
Depends on the ESTIMATED COND. value, an alarm（0050 SOLUTION B CALIBRATION
FAILER / 0051 SOLUTION A CALIBRATION FAILER）might occur. In this case, press the
MUTE/RESET button and go ahead.
15-56
9) Press the FLOW MONITOR button on the lower left side of the screen to confirm that the
hydraulic line is in work.
10) The color lamp blinks during the calibration and it turns off as soon as the calibration is complete.
Return the aspiration nozzle for dialysate and execute rinse process.
11) Enter preparation-mode and confirm that any alarms do not occur.
B) Select ACETATE in step (4)

5) Input the names of the dialysate to use to SOLUTION A.
6) Input the dilution ratio of A concentrate to DILUTION.
7) Input the estimated total conductivity value. (The estimated conductivity is a theoretical
conductivity.)
8) Set the dialysate concentrate (A concentrate) and hold the CALIBRATION button pressed for a
while.
NOTE
O
Depends on the ESTIMATED COND. value, an alarm（0050 SOLUTION B CALIBRATION
N
FAILER / 0051 SOLUTION A CALIBRATION FAILER）might occur. In this case, press the
R
MUTE/RESET button and go ahead.
Q
TE
SO Y
9) The color lamp blinks during the calibration and it turns off as soon as the calibration is complete.
IN
R
Return the aspiration nozzle for dialysate and execute rinse process.
10) Enter preparation-mode and confirm that any alarms do not occur.
U
15-57
16 Others
16.1. Upgrading and Confirmation of Software Version
This machine is furnished with the control P.C. board, the monitoring P.C. board, and the LCD
display P.C. board and respective software is installed in each P.C. board. The machine is so
designed to operate safely with these programs that runs cooperating to each other. Also, this
machine is furnished with a CompactFlash memory slot or a USB port so that the latest software
can be loaded from the CompactFlash memory or the USB Flash Drives to easily upgrade the
software.
This section explains the method to install software though the CompactFlash memory and USB
Flash Drives.
NOTE: CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk Corporation.
CAUTION
Do not use specially shaped USB Flash Drives.
Hit the USB Flash Drives on the machine body when raise the operation panel, as this may
O
damage the Drives and LCD Display P.C. Board.
N
R
Q
TE
CAUTION
SO Y
Take special caution on the static electricity when handling electric parts including a P.C. board. If
IN
this is failed, a P.C. board may be defected. In addition, do not touch a P.C. board with bare hand.
R
The adhered sebum, etc. may cause rust.

U
16-1
16.1.1. Installation of software
1. Turn OFF the power supply and shut down

the power breaker.
2. Lean the operation panel forward.

Some models are limited tilt angle.
If operation panel could not lean enough,
remove the stopper metals (Part B in the right
figure) mounted at the hinges on both the right
and left sides with the Phillips screwdriver.
O
N
R
Q
TE
3. Remove the rear cover of operation

SO Y
panel by removing six screws with the

IN
R
Phillips screwdriver.
Thereafter, remove the metal plate.
U
16-2
A) Load a program from CompactFlash memory
(LCD Display P.C. Board: BP02-15A – H)
I. Section A is the CompactFlash

memory slot.
Securely insert a
CompactFlash memory card
with the new software.
II. Set ON No.1 switch of the dip

switch (SW1) at Section B.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
R
NOTE
When change the software from “Ver.05.00 or before” to “Ver.05.02 or later”, turn ON the switch
in P.C. board.
Control P.C. board BP02-16B, BP05-12A , BP05-12B# : No.3 of SW2

U
Control P.C. board BP05-12E, BP05-12G, BP05-12H : No.3 of SW3

Monitoring P.C. board BP02-17#, BP05-13# : No.3 of SW3
If installation of software is completed, please turn OFF the switch.
III. Turn ON the power breaker, and turn ON the Power ON/OFF switch. Then, the Program
Loading screen is displayed.
16-3
B) Load a program from USB Flash Drives
(LCD Display P.C. Board: BP02-15J*)
I. Section A is the USB port.

Securely insert a USB Flash
Memory with the new
software.
II. Set ON No.1 switch of the dip

switch (SW1) at Section B.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
NOTE
IN
R
When change the software from “Ver.05.00 or before” to “Ver.07.10 or later”, turn ON the switch
in P.C. board.
Control P.C. board BP02-16B, BP05-12A, BP05-12B# : No.3 of SW2

Control P.C. board BP05-12E, BP05-12G, BP05-12H : No.3 of SW3
U
Monitoring P.C. board BP02-17#, BP05-13# : No.3 of SW3
If installation of software is completed, please turn OFF the switch.
NOTE
LCD Display P.C. Board BP02-15J* or later can only be used with Software version 7.10 or
later.
IV. Turn ON the power breaker, and turn ON the Power ON/OFF switch. Then, the Program
Loading screen is displayed.
16-4
16.1.2. Loading program and language file (for software version V01)
This adjustment method applies to software version V01. Check the software version of your
machine in advance.
DANGER
Never turn the power off during loading program. This makes serious damage to the machine.
1. Touch the portion pointed by the arrow to

select an intended item to update.
P.C. board with the software

Display
to be renewed
CPU1 Control P.C. board
CPU2 Monitor P.C. board
O
LCD LCD display P.C. board
Language text N
BMP
(Explained later.)
R
Q
TE
The standard language used in this machine is English, however the machine can display other
language using the BMP files with corresponded language and the MULTILINGUAL function.
SO Y
This section explains the method to install other language.

IN
R
CAUTION
Be sure to load BMP data though the machine does not use MULTILINGUAL function.
U
2. It is also possible to initialize the input

parameter and calibration test data
respectively at the same time. In order to
initialize each data, hold the botton pointed
by the arrow pressed for a while. Then, the
intended button is selected and the button
turns ON in yellow.
16-5
CAUTION
If you select Parameter or Calibration, the saved data of Calibration or parameter will be erased.
We recommended to note all former data before initialize.
3. After confirming the selected item, press EXIT button. Then, the installation of the program
will begin. The color lamps blink in the order of “red → yellow → green → blue” and
blinking stops when the installation is complete.
4. After the installation of a program is complete, press the Power ON/OFF switch to turn OFF
the power supply, pull out the CompactFlash memory, and then set OFF the dip switch set
ON in the former step 5.
5. Attach the rear cover in the order reverse to its removal procedure and install the stopper
metals at the root of the hinges.
6. When a file in other language is loaded, turn ON MULTILINGUAL function by following the
steps below.
7. Turn ON the power supply by pressing the Power ON/OFF switch again and then log in in the
TECHNICHIAN mode.
8. Press MENU and select TECHNICIAN tab to display the Technician Maintenance screen.
9. Press OPTION-SOFTWARE to display the Software Selection screen shown in the right
O
figure.
N
10. Touch UNUSE at MULTILINGUAL pointed by the arrow in the right figure to switch it to USE
and then press EXIT to restore the original screen.
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
16-6
16.1.3. Loading program and language file (for software version V02 or later)
This adjustment method applies to software versions after V02. Check the software version of
your machine in advance.
DANGER
Never turn the power off during loading program. This makes serious damage to the machine.
Loading screen is as follows,
a b)
)
c)
①
O
N d)
R
Q
TE
SO Y
a. Version holder
IN
R
・ Open ① window by “…” switch to see the program in CompactFlash or USB Flash
Drives.
・ Touch the title in ① window and select the version.
・ This window is blank if one program is in CompactFlash or USB Flash Drives.
b. Language holder.
U
・ Switch language holder after pressing “>>” switch if some language holder are
memorized in CompactFlash or USB Flash Drives.
・ “>>” switch is disabled if one language holder is in CompactFlash or USB Flash
Drives.
c. PRG holder.
・ This window is blank if there is no MOT file.
d. Initialize parameter and calibration data same as previous version.
NOTE
The Software Ver.05.02 or before is not displayed in Version holder (a) when the BP02-15H or
later of LCD P.C. Board was equipped.
And the Ver.07.03 or before is not displayed when the BP02-15J* or later was equipped.
If store the previous or corrupted programs in VER0703 or later folder and try to load it to
BP02-15J*, error message “File Format NG” is displayed.
16-7
CAUTION
If you select Parameter or Calibration, the saved Calibration or parameter will be initialized.
We recommended to note all former data in the machine before initialize.
CAUTION
Be sure to load BMP data though the machine does not use MULTILINGUAL function.
e. Touch and select loading file and then press “EXEC” switch.
f. Wait until “OK” is displayed on the right of all selected programs.
g. Turn OFF the power supply by pressing the Power ON/OFF switch.
h. Set OFF No.1 switch of the dip switch (SW1) on the LCD Display P.C. Board, and
CompactFlash or USB Flash Drives.
i. Fix the metal plate, and rear cover of operation panel with six screw.
CAUTION
O
Be sure to check the cables are not pinched by metal plate and rear cover.
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
16-8
Reference: Procedure to arrange files and folders in Compact Flash for loading program
(Later than Ver. 02.00 software installed DIAMAX only)
Preparing of CompactFlash and USB Flash Drives.
We recommended using the CompactFlash manufactured by SanDisk Corporation.

The machine is designed that almost of CompactFlash cards manufactured by other makers can
use, but some cards cannot use for DIAMAX.
NOTE
Some manufacture of compact flash could not use for DIAMAX. For more information, please
contact the nearest branch or agency.
NOTE
DIAMAX support FAT16 / FAT32 file systems, but does not support NTFS file systems.
(The initial file system of marketed products is usually FAT16 or FAT32.)
O
Please arrange folder of compact flash and USB Flash Drives as following figure.
N
R
Please make folder that is version folder
Q
1. The folder name should start from “VER”

TE
2. The folder name has to be within “5 characters”

SO Y
CompactFlash Memory or USB Flash Drives

without “VER”.
IN
R
3. Do not use special character such as

“¥”, “/ “,”:”, “*”, “?”, “< “, “>”, “| “ etc. for the name, VER0703
otherwise machine did not display at the screen

of PROGRAM ROAD. VER0710
4. Please do not make more than 5 Version
U
folders in the Compact Flash and USB Flash PRG

Drives. If you arrange more than 6 version
folders, one of them did not display. CPU1.MOT
CPU2.MOT
5. Please put MOT files in the PRG folder.
LCD.MOT
6. File names of MOT are fix name that
“CPU1.MOT”,”CPU2.MOT” and “LCD.MOT”. BMP
Do not change their file names.
7. Please make or put Language folder in the ENGLISH
BMP folder. SPANISH

8. You can make name within “8 characters” like
as JAPANESE, SPANISH, etc. PORTUGUESE
9. Please put “ALARM”, etc folders into this
Language folder.
16-9
16.1.4. Confirm software version
Check the software version to confirm whether new software is installed.
1. Press the Power ON/OFF switch to turn on the power.
2. The start-up screen is displayed, and Ver. is displayed under the logo “DIAMAX.” Check if
the number has been updated.
Confirmation can be done while the machine is in operation.

1. Log in with the MAKER mode.
2. Press the MAKER tab to display the maker maintenance screen.
For software version V01, press the SOFWARE VERSION button.
For software version V02, press the INFORMATION button to display the SOFTWARE
VERSION button.
3. Check if the software No and Ver of CPU1, CPU2, LCD, and BMP indicate updated
numbers.
16.1.5. Parameter Resetting
O
Machine Type Setting
N
Check the Serial Number and Machine Type, and set each setting item correctly.
R
Log in to the machine in the Maker mode, and press MENU -> MAKER -> INFORMATION
Q
TE
button and open the MACHINE TYPE SETTING screen.

SO Y
About the details of setting, refer to chapter 11.3. in this manual.

IN
R
CAUTION
If use with wrong setting, there is a possibility that problems may occur.
U
Chamber and Line (Hydraulic) capacity
CAUTION
Need to set the Chamber and Line capacity (Hydraulic volume) correctly for accurate flow and
conductivity control, and assured chemical rinse / disinfection.
After change the chamber, initialize of calibration data caused by software version up, be sure to
check and setting the Chamber and Line capacity setting as following method.
The Chamber and Line capacity is difference for each chamber type, machine type and the
presence or absence of ETRF option.
Please check these setting value by following the instruction below.
16-10
- Chamber capacity
Log in to the machine in the Technician mode.
Open front door and draw out the hydraulic part.
Press MENU -> TECHNICIAN tab -> Calibration button -> DIALYSATE PUMP button and open
the Dialysate Pump Calibration screen.
Check the Chamber appearance and capacity.
Chamber type Type1 Type2
Appearance
O
N
R
Q
TE
Capacity (mL) 223 248

SO Y
IN
R
- Line capacity
Log in to the machine in the Maker mode.

U
Open front door and draw out the hydraulic part.
Press MENU -> TECHNICIAN tab -> Rinse button -> Parameter setting button and open the
Rinse Parameter screen.
Enter the “Default value + 50 (mL)” to “Line Capacity” setting column.
Note) The hydraulic value is difference for each machine type and Chamber type.
Chamber: Type1 Chamber: Type2
Machine type ETRF option
Capacity (mL) Capacity (mL)
No 1950 2000
Type1 to Type4
Yes 2190 2240
No 1850 1900
Type5 or later
Yes 2090 2140
16-11
16.2. Touch Calibration
NOTE) “Touch Calibration” is the function of the LCD Display P.C. Board BP02-15H with
Software Ver.05.10 or later installed.
If the gap has occurred between the touch position and the display position, please calibrate the
position in Touch Calibration mode.
1. Turn off the Power supply and the breaker.

2. Remove the back panel of Operation Panel. (See Chapter 16.1)
3. Set the DIP-SW 1-4 of LCD Display P.C. Board to ON.
4. The Touch Calibration mode is displayed, after turn on the power supply.
5. First, touch the red marking on the upper-left corner. Then, it turns gray and the
upper-right marking will turn red. And, touch it.
O
N
R
Q
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
6. Similarly touch the marking of bottom-left and bottom-right.
16-12
7. When end of the calibration, “OK” was displayed on center of the screen.
Touch the blank spade and confirm that the gap was calibrated.
O
N
R
NOTE
Q
TE
When center area is no gap, the gap may occur at the edge of the display.
SO Y
IN
R
8. After calibration, touch the “EXIT” button.

If retry the calibration, touch the “RETRY” button.
(Move the cursor to the “RETRY” button.)
When the gap was big and cannot move the cursor to the “RETRY” button, power off and
U
on, and retry the Touch Calibration from first.

9. Select the “EXIT”, move the Rinse Standby Monitor automatically.
Turn off the Power supply and breaker, and set the DIP-SW 1-4 to OFF.
Fix the back cover of Operation Panel.
If the “ERR: 00” to “ERR: 04” was displayed after calibration, turn off and calibrate again.
The “ERR: 08” is displayed both Title screen and Calibration screen.
It is a problem of connection with a touch panel. Power off and confirm that the connection.
16-13
16.3. Color Lamp - State Diagram
Machine indicates the conditions by 4 colors lamp, red, yellow, green, and blue. Present
condition of the machine is shown by the ON/OFF combination of these four colors.
State of lamp:
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
Lamp is ON Lamp is blink
State of color lamp
O
Process Remarks
(Normal state) (At alarm)
N
Usual condition when power
R
ON/OFF switch is turned ON
Q
TE
Rinse standby
SO Y
IN
R
ON: No color
Blink: No color
Green lamp turns ON when

U
rinse process begins.
Rinse process
Blink: No color
ON: Green
Yellow and green lamps

Dialysis blink during startup test
preparation
process
( Include
startup test) Blink: Yellow, Green
ON: No color.
16-14
State of color lamp
Process Remarks
Dialysis Green lamp blinks when

preparation mixture of dialysate begins.
End
−
Connection Blink: Green
process ON: No color
Green lamp turns ON in the

dialysis process.
Dialysis
process
Blink:
ON: Green
O
N Blue lamp turns ON in
R
Sequential UF.
Dialysis
Q
TE
process
Sequential
SO Y
UF operation Blink: No color

IN
R
ON: Green
Green blinks when flow to

dialyser is bypassed by
U
abnorma concentration, etc.

Dialysis
process
bypass
Blink: Green
ON: No color
Yellow lamp blinks when

reached to the set UF
volume. Yellow lamp
Dialysis changes to ON when the
process chime of the dialysis
at UF completion is muted with
completion MUTE button.
Blink: Yellow
ON: Green
16-15
State of color lamp
Process Remarks
Green lamp blinks during the

collection process and
patient is disconnected.
Collection
process
Blink: Green
ON: No color
NOTE) The red lamp blinks when machine detects the alarm condition, and the lamp changes to
ON when the alarm sound is muted by pressed MUTE button. However, the alarm
resume and the red lamp blink if alarm condition was not dissolved within 2 minutes in
the dialysis preparation process and the dialysis process.
16.4. State of Backup Battery Operation
O
Added the backup battery indicator during battery operation from software version 7.21.
N
When machine is operated by backup battery, the battery state and elapsed time is displayed in
R
bottom right.
Q
The indicator is shown in three levels (signals) in accordance with the remaining battery level.
TE
SO Y
IN
U R
NOTE
The battery capacity vary according to the frequency in use, environment and so on.
The time of each span is not same, because the state is shown by remaining battery.
From battery performance characteristics, the time during red signal is very short compared to
time of green or yellow signals.
16-16
16.5. Conversion Table (Pressure)
MPa Kgf/cm2 mmHg Kgf/cm2 MPa mmHg

-0.10 -1.11972 -750.064 -1.0 -0.09807 -735.561
-0.09 -1.00774 -675.057 -0.9 -0.08826 -662.005
-0.08 -0.89577 -600.051 -0.8 -0.07845 -588.449
-0.07 -0.78380 -525.045 -0.7 -0.06865 -514.893
-0.06 -0.67183 -450.038 -0.6 -0.05884 -441.337
-0.05 -0.55986 -375.032 -0.5 -0.04903 -367.781
-0.04 -0.44789 -300.026 -0.4 -0.03923 -294.225
-0.03 -0.33592 -225.019 -0.3 -0.02942 -220.668
-0.02 -0.22394 -150.013 -0.2 -0.01961 -147.112
-0.01 -0.11197 -75.0064 -0.1 -0.00981 -73.5561
0 0 0 0 0 0
0.01 0.11197 75.0064 0.1 0.00981 73.5561
O
0.02 0.22394 150.013 0.2 0.01961 147.112
0.03 0.33592 225.019 N 0.3 0.02942 220.668
0.04 0.44789 300.026 0.4 0.03923 294.225
R
0.05 0.55986 375.032 0.5 0.04903 367.781
Q
TE
0.06 0.67183 450.038 0.6 0.05884 441.337

SO Y
0.07 0.78380 525.045 0.7 0.06865 514.893

IN
R
0.08 0.89577 600.051 0.8 0.07845 588.449

0.09 1.00775 675.057 0.9 0.08826 662.005
0.10 1.11972 750.064 1.0 0.09807 735.561
0.11 1.23169 825.070 1.1 0.10787 809.117
0.12 1.34366 900.077 1.2 0.11768 882.674
U
0.13 1.45563 975.083 1.3 0.12749 956.230

0.14 1.57603 1050.089 1.4 0.13729 1029.79
0.15 1.67957 1125.096 1.5 0.14710 1103.34
0.16 1.79155 1200.102 1.6 0.15691 1176.90
0.17 1.90352 1275.108 1.7 0.16671 1250.45
0.18 2.01549 1350.115 1.8 0.17652 1324.01
0.19 2.12746 1425.121 1.9 0.18633 1397.57
0.20 2.23943 1500.128 2.0 0.19613 1471.12
1.0000 Kgf/cm2 = 0.098067 MPa = 735.5613 mmHg

1.01972 Kgf/cm2 = 1.0000 MPa = 750.0064 mmHg
16-17
16.6. Meanings of Symbols and Displays
Symbols Meaning
Caution, Consult documents
Ingress protection marking:

IPX1 protected against dripping water (IPX1)
Degree of protection against electric shock: Type B
Degree of protection against electric shock: Type BF

(Applied part: Cuff for BPM option)
Read usage instructions
Do not push
O
Equipotential N
R
Q
TE
Protective earth
SO Y
IN
R
Date of manufacture
I ON (Main power)
U
O OFF (Main power)
Power ON/OFF switch
ON/OFF (Main power) indicator
Battery indicator
MUTE switch
RESET switch
BLOOD PUMP switch
16-18
17 TERMINOLOGY
The following definitions will apply for the meaning of the terminology used in this manual.
1) Dialysis: Hemodialysis treatment in which substances are removed by diffusion
2) Dialysate concentration: The concentration of sodium electrolyte (unit: mEq/L) included in the
dialysate is simply defined as the dialysate concentration. Also, the simple wording,
"concentration" means the dialysate concentration if not specified for other meaning.
3) Ultrafiltration (UF): Method of treatment to remove excessive body fluid through dialyzer
membrane.
4) Sequential dialysis: Operation to perform UF (ultrafiltration) without flowing dialysate.
5) Double needle: Method of treatment performed through bloodline with two fistula needles or
catheter inserted in artery and vein independently
6) Single needle (SN): Method of treatment performed through bloodline with one fistula needle or
catheter.
7) Venous pressure: Pressure in the venous side drip chamber. It is measured by connecting the
O
venous pressure monitor line from the venous drip chamber of the bloodline to the venous
N
pressure sensor of this machine. In a word, the pressure in the bloodline from the dialyzer outlet to
R
a patient can be measured. This machine defines and displays this pressure as the venous
pressure.
Q
TE
8) Arterial pressure: Pressure in the arterial side drip chamber. It is measured by connecting the
SO Y
IN
arterial pressure monitor line from the arterial drip chamber of the bloodline to the arterial pressure
R
sensor of this machine. In a word, the pressure in the bloodline from a patient to the dialyzer inlet
can be measured. This machine defines and displays this value as the arterial pressure.
9) "TMP": Abbreviation of “Transmembrane Pressure”; Indicates the difference in pressure between
U
the bloodline side and the dialysate line side. This machine simply uses the following method for
calculation.
TMP= (Arterial pressure (PG4b) + Venous pressure (PG5))/2 –
(Dialysate inlet side pressure (PG2) + Dialysate outlet side pressure (PG3))/2 + OFFSET
When it has not the pressure sensor option, TMP is calculated as PG2 = PG3 and PG4b = PG5
10) Dialysate: Liquid to filter wastes from blood by using osmotic pressure.
11) Bicarbonate: Represents bicarbonate ion or carbonic acid ion. Dialysis method of using
bicarbonate as the alkalization agent is called the bicarbonate dialysis.
12) Acetate: Represents acetic acid. Dialysis method of using acetic acid as the alkalization agent is
called the acetate dialysis.
13) Bloodline: Represents the tube in which blood passes through the extracorporeal circulation.
14) Dialyzer: Medical equipment used for hemodialysis; Removal of body fluid and dialysis are
performed through this dialyzer.
17-1
15) Rinse process: A process to pass water through and drain it from the dialysate line of the
machine for a cleaning purpose.
16) Disinfection process: A process to disinfect the dialysate line by passing the
appropriately-diluted disinfectant concentrate through and drain it from the dialysate line of this
machine.
17) Rinse program: A function of the machine to complete the target rinse and disinfection processes
automatically by presetting the pattern of the rinse and disinfection operation such as washing,
disinfection, acetic acid rinsing, etc.
18) Preparation: A process to prepare for the dialysis operation of the machine getting ready for
passing the dialysate after the rinse process is complete.
19) Priming: Filling the dialyzer and the bloodline before use with saline solution, etc.
20) Bypass: Short-circuit line for the dialysate, bypassing the dialyzer; Used to temporarily interrupt
the dialysis treatment by switching to this line when the state of the dialysate becomes improper
because of some reasons during the dialysis treatment.
21) Closed system: The chamber is filled with fresh dialysate first, and the dialysate is fed with the
O
pump and returns to the room on the opposite side of the same chamber through the dialyzer. The
N
whole hydraulic line in which the dialysate passes at this time is called the closed system.
R
22) Blood pump: A pump to give the blood flow, overcoming the internal resistance of the dialyzer
Q
TE
and the extracorporeal circulation line.

SO Y
23) Syringe pump: A pump to inject the anticoagulant agent into blood by pushing the syringe piston
IN
R
containing the agent at a preset speed.

24) Bolus: A function of the syringe pump to immediately inject the anticoagulant agent only of the
preset volume.
25) Conductivity sensor: Measures the conductivity of the dialysate.
U
26) Temperature sensor: Measures the temperature of necessary sections in the dialysate line.
27) Air bubble detector: Detects the air bubbles in the venous side bloodline and prevents the air
entry to a patient.
28) Blood leak detector: Detects the blood loss through dialyzer membrane by an optical method.
29) Venous clamp: Closes the venous bloodline to protect a patient when the machine detects
unsafe condition on extracorporeal circuit.
30) Grounding: Taking ground. Earthing
31) Disinfectant nozzle: A nozzle to be inserted into the container of the cleaning solution or
disinfectant to aspirate the concentrate in the rinse and disinfection processes.
32) Technician: A person who can operate, service, and repair this dialysis machine.
17-2

MX2010 1704e6ryq

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MX2010 1704e6ryq

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SINGLE PATIENT DIALYSIS MACHINE

Nipro Europe N.V.

1. APPLICATION .................................................................................................... 1-1

4. GENERAL DESCRIPTION ................................................................................. 4-1

4.4. Fuses ................................................................................................................................ 4-2

4.5. External Connections ........................................................................................................ 4-2

4.6. Storage and Transportation ............................................................................................... 4-2

4.8.3. Dialysate pressure ................................................................................................... 4-4

5. REGULAR INSPECTION ................................................................................... 5-1

5.3. Replacement of Parts ........................................................................................................ 5-3

5.4. Responsibility for Readjustment and Repair....................................................................... 5-3

5.5. Daily Inspection by Operator.............................................................................................. 5-3

6. MAINTENANCE INSPECTION .......................................................................... 6-1

7. MAINTENANCE MANUAL ................................................................................. 7-1

7.5.4. Confirmation of air bubble detector (ABD) .............................................................. 7-12

7.6. Inspection of Electrical Equipment ................................................................................... 7-12

7.6.1. Confirmation of insulation resistance...................................................................... 7-12

7.7.2. Confirmation of conductivity error alarm ................................................................. 7-14

8. MAINTENANCE CHECKLIST ............................................................................ 8-1

9. INSTALLATION .................................................................................................. 9-1

9.8. Changing a PASS ID ....................................................................................................... 9-16

9.9. Verifying operation after installation ................................................................................. 9-16

10. FLOWCHART ................................................................................................. 10-1

11. REPLACEMENT OF PARTS ........................................................................... 11-1

11.4.13. Mixing Tank ..................................................................................................... 11-38

11.4.14. Gear Pump (P1, P2) ........................................................................................ 11-39

11.4.15. Piston Pump .................................................................................................... 11-47

11.4.15.5. Concentration Pump (For A liquid; P5) (Type 1) .................................. 11-56

11.5.3.3. SSR-Box ............................................................................................ 11-117

11.5.4. Machine Type4 ................................................................................................ 11-118

11.5.4.1. Power supply section ......................................................................... 11-118

11.6. Other Parts................................................................................................................ 11-123

12. COMPOSITION OF ELECTICAL EQUIPMENT ............................................. 12-1

13. CONNECTION AND REPLACEMENT OF P.C.BOARD ................................ 13-1

13.3.1. Part allocation of BP02-15A/B/C/D....................................................................... 13-2

13.3.2. Part allocation of BP02-15F ................................................................................. 13-2

13.3.3. Part allocation of BP02-15H ................................................................................. 13-3

13.3.4. Part allocation of BP02-15J1................................................................................ 13-3

13.3.8. Replacement ....................................................................................................... 13-8

13.7.5. General ............................................................................................................. 13-35

13.7.6. Function of each part ......................................................................................... 13-36

13.7.7. Replacement ..................................................................................................... 13-39

13.8.2. Function of each part ......................................................................................... 13-40

13.13.4. Adjustment ...................................................................................................... 13-52

13.13.5. Precautions ..................................................................................................... 13-52

13.14. Level Adjustment Switch P.C. Board (BP01-50#) ....................................................... 13-53

13.14.5. Precautions ..................................................................................................... 13-53

13.19.5. Precautions ..................................................................................................... 13-67

13.20.Syringe pump Encoder P.C. Board (BP13-11) ............................................................. 13-68

13.20.1. General ........................................................................................................... 13-68

13.21.BLD Conversion P.C. Board ........................................................................................ 13-69

14. TECHNICIAN MODE AND MAKER MODE.................................................... 14-1

15. ADJUSTMENT ............................................................................................... 15-1

15.2.1.5. Verification test of UF accuracy (For SEQ-UF)...................................... 15-15

15.2.2. For software version ver.06.00 or later ............................................................... 15-17

15.2.2.1. UF calibration ....................................................................................... 15-17

15.2.2.2. Verification test of UF and SEQ accuracy ............................................. 15-19

15.3.3. Temperature sensor calibration.......................................................................... 15-24

16. OTHERS ......................................................................................................... 16-1

Any application other than dialysis using DIAMAX is contraindicated.

3.1. Equipment Classification and Handling precautions

3.2. Precaution for Fluid Penetration